manual for non commissioned officers and privates of field artillery

8/8/2019 Manual for Non Commissioned Officers and Privates of Field Artillery

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manual-for-non-commissioned-officers-and-privates-of-field-artillery 1/280

WAR DEPARTMENT

MANUALFOR

Noncommissioned Officers and PrivatesOF

FIELD ARTILLERY, OF

THE' ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES

1917

VOLUME I

WASHiNGTO~

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE1917



'VAR DEPAnTMENT,

Document No. 014.

OOlce 0/ The Adjutant General.

ADDITIONAL COPIES

or TBlS PUDLlCAnON )lAY BE PROCURED FROM

THE SUrERIN'l'ENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE

WASIIlNGTON, D. C.

1~ TWO VOLUMESSOLD L.'i 511:T8 ONLT-70 CENTS rER SET



WAn. DEPART:\IENT,

"~ASIIIXGTOX, JUlie IG, IDli.

The followin; Manual for ~oncommissiolle<1 Ofl1cers an<1.

Prlva tes of Fiehl Artillery of the Army of the Cnite<1 States isnpproved l'Ind herewith published for the information nn<1gov-

ernment of n.Il concerned.

[~5S2S24 A. G. 0.]

By ORDER OF TilE SECRETARY OF 'VAR:

TASKER II. BLISS,

Major General, .:1ctil1[f -C:hicf of Staff.

OFFICIAL:

II. 1'. :UcCAIK.

1.'/tc Adjutant Gelleral.



, TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Page.

CHAPTER T. MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COt:nTESY__________ 7-17Section 1. Onth of enlistmenL_____________________ 7S~ctlon 2. Obc<1iel1ee 8-9Section 3. LoJ'nlty 9Scetlon 4. DiseiplinC' -'______________________ 9-11

Section 5. l\Ii1itllr~' courtesy 11Section G. Sn Iutlng________________________________ 11-13Section 7. Hules governing saluting 13-17Section~. Courtesics in conversntlon_______________ 17

CHAPTER II. ARUS. UNIFORMR, AND EQUIP~IE~T 18-56 .Section 1. 1"i('l<1artmer~~. t~'pes oL 18-22Section 2. 'l'hc pistol :. ~2-:.H

Section 3. Cure :ll1d mnintenance of equipmenL ~5-41Section 4. Uniforms 41-43

Section n. The service IdL 43-50Section 6. The surplus kiL 50-51

Section 7. Assembling Infantry equipmenL 52-56CIIAPTEJ:. III. n.I,1'lONS A!\D FOnAGE 57-63

Section 1. 'l'lw rntlon 57-58Section 2. Individunl ('ooking 58-62Section 3. 'l'he forage rntiol1 62-63

CHAPTEr:. IV. I'r:r.SO;';.\L nYGIF.~E Arm C.\RF. OF THE FEET 61-70

UII~PTEn. V. EX'!"l~.'(',"[; :FI:O:U Dr:rLL Al'\D SI-:nncE I:J:::;L'L.\-TIO!\S l.on FlEW Ar.T1LLEnY, IDIG . ,;"l~.~Sl

Rectlonl. D('finitions .:.__ ._ 71-73S('('tion 2. G0nernl .. 73-8lJ

Section3. General rules for fOl'm3tions 80-83Section 4. Orders, comm~Jl(ls, Ul1l1 slgllnls 83-8nRc-ctlon 5. School of the 80111101',1ismoulltc(L 9o-n:>Section 6. Manual of the pi8toL 9:>-98

5



8 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

Section 2, Obedience,

The very first paragTnph In the Army RegulntIons reads:.. All persons In the military service are required to obey

strictly and to execute promptly the lawful orders of theirsuperIors,"

Obeti!ence Is the first and la~t dnty of a 801d101', It Is thefoundation upon which nIl mllltary etlic1ency Is hum, WithoutIt an army becomes a moh, while with it a moh ceases to be amob find becomes possessed of much of the power of an organ-Ized force. It Is a quality that 11"1C'mandNl of every petMIl Inthe Army, from the highest to the lowest. Each enlistc<l manbinds hImself, hy his enllshnent oath, to ohccllence. Bnchofficer, In accepting his commission, must take upon hImself thesame solemn ohllgntlon.

Ohey strictly an<l execute promptly the In'wflll ol'ders of yonI'superiors. It Is enough to know that the person gIving theorder, whether he he an otllcer, a noncommissioned ollieC'r, or aprIvate acting as such, Is ~'our laWful SUI)erIor, You may notlike hIm, :rou ma~' not r(81)('ct him, but ~'ou must respect hisposItion and nuthorItj, ntHI reflect honor nnd cre<lIt U1)on your-self and ~'our p1'ofession hy ~'Ieldlng to all 8111)('rIo1'8hat ('om-plete an(l unhesitating ollPdlence which Is the r1lensu1'c ns wellns the duty of ('\"er~' true polrller.

Or(lers must be strictly cnl'l'il'<l out. It Is not sumd('nt tocomply with onl;\' thnt part which 8111tlil~'ou 01' w1lI('h Involvesno work or dnng'('r 01' hr\l'(1shlp, Nor Is It proper or pl'rmissible,when YOU llre 01'<1(""('<1o <10 It thing' In n ('('tnin WllY or toaccomplish a work In n d('finlt(\I~' prescrllw(1 mnnner, for youto ohtnln the same rel"lults h~' other methodR,Ohedlence must he prompt and unquestioning, When nny

soldIer (nn<1 thl8 word Incl\J(I<>soffic(\,'s fiS well as (ln1l8t('(1men)receives nn 01'(1('1',It ls not for him to consider whetl101' the

order Is a good one or not, whethel" it would have been bettel' hadsuch all order never 1I('('n glv('n, or wIH"ther the duty might hebetter performed hy some one else, 01' nt sOllJe other time, orIn some other manner. 1IIs duty Is, first, to un<1erstantl justwhat the order requires, nnd, second, to lJroce('<1at once to carryout the order to the h.-st of hl8 nblllty,

'



MANUAL FOR FIELD .ARTILLERY. 9

Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certainIndE'pen.ellce In the execution of the tasks to which they arenSio;j;:ncd and are e~pected to show. initiative in meeting thedifferent situations as they arise. Everr individual, from thehighest commander to the lowest private, must always rem em.

ber that inaction and neglect of opportunities will warrant moreSevere censure than an error in the choice of the means."(Pre/ace, Pield Service Regulations.) ,

Section 3. Loyalty.

Hut even with implicit obedience ~'ou may ~'et fall to measureup to that high standard of uutr which is at once the pride andglory of everJ' true soldIer. Not until ~'ou carry out the desires

and wishes of ~'our suveriors in a hearty, wiIl1ng, and cheerfulmanner are you meeting all the requirements of rour profession.11~orun order is but the will of your superior, however It muybe expressed. LOJaIty means that ~'ou are for ~'our organizationand its officers and noncommissioned officers-not against them;that ~'ou lllwn~'s extend your most earnest and hearty supportto those in authority. No soldier is a loral soldier who is aknocker or a grumbler or a shirker. Just one man of this classIn n company bree'ls dIscontent awl dissatlsfuctioD among many

others. Y(;U should, therefore, 110t onl~' b'1lard ngninst <1oln~8u('h things ~'ourseJf but should <1iscourage such uctlons amongnny of ~'our comraues .

. Section 4. Discipline.

"l. All person!'! in the military service flre reqnlred to obeystriC'tIy nnd to execute promptly the lawful orders of theirSUperiors .

.. 2. l\lIlitnr~1 fiuthorlty wIII be exel'<'iseC with firmness, kInd.ness, find justice. Punishments must ('onform to lnw nnd fol.low 01'f('I1S{'S us promptly fiS circumstunces will permit ... 3. Superiors ure fOl'1I1'hlell to injul'e those Ul1l1er.th<'ir au.

thorltl' by tyrannical or cUl1ricions conuuct or br abusive Ian.gunge. WhIle maintainIng discipline and the thorough andprOlnvt performance of mIlitary dut~., all otl1cers, in dealing

"




with enlisted men, will bear in mind the absolute necessity otso treating them as to preserve theIr self-respect. OfIiceJ:Swillkeep in as close touch as possible with the men under theIrcomm:llld and will strive to build up such relations of confidenceand s~"mpathy as will insure the free approach of their men tothem for counsel and nssistance .. This relationship may begained and maIntained without relaxation of the bonds ofdiscipline and with great henefit to the service as a whole ... 4. Court£>sy amon;- military men .is indispensable to dis-

cipline; respect to superiors will not be confined to obedIenceon dut~", but will be extended on all occasIons ... G. Deliberations or discussions among mIlitary men convey-

Ing praise or censure,. or any mark of approbation, towardothers In the military service, amI all publications relating toprivate or personal transactIons JJetweCllofficers are prohibIted.Efforts to influence legIslation affecting the Army or to procurepersonal favor or consIderatIon shoulll never be made ex~eptthrou~h regular military channell]; the adoption of nny othermetho(l by any ofi1cer or enllsted man wJll be noted in the rullI-tary record of those concerned." (Armll Regulations.) ,

.. The discipline which makes the soldIer of a free countryreliable In battle is not to be gaIned by harsh or tyrannicaltreatment. On the contrar~", such treatment Is far more likelyto destroy than to make an army. It Is possible to Impnrt In-struction amI give commnnds In such manner and In such toneof voice as to inspIre In the soldIer no feeling but nn Intense de-sire to obe~', while the opposite manner and tone of voice cannot fall to excite stron~ l'e~entment anel a deslre to disobe~"~The one mode 01' the other of dealing with subordinate springsfrom a corresponding spirit ill the brenst of the commander.He who feels the resrect which Is due to others can not fail toinspire in them re~ard for himself, While he Who f<.>els,andhence manifests, disrespect towartl others, especIally hIs infe-riors, can not fail to Inspire hntrel.1 against himself." (.lc1clrc8.'lof Jlaj. Gen •• John M. Schofield to tlte Unitcd Slate8 Cor[J8 0/Cadets, Aug. 11; 1879.)

""hen, by long-continued drill and subordination, you havelearned ~"our duties, nnd obedience becomes secon(! nature,you have acqulrecl discipline. It can not be acquIred In a



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 11

day' norn month. It is a growth. It 1s the habit of obedi-ence. '1'0 teach this habit of obedience is the main object ofthe ('lose-order drill, and, if good results are to be expected,.thegreatest attention must be paid to even the smallest details.'1'1.1ecompany or squad must be formed promptly at the pre.

scribed time-not a minute or even a second late. All mustWear the exact uniform prescribed and in the exact manner}lrescrioed. When at attention there must be 110 gazing about,no raising of hands, no chewing or .spitting in ranks. Themanual of arms nnd all movements must be executed abso-lutely as prescribed. A drlll of this kind teaches discipline.A cqreless, sloppy drill breeds disobedience and Insubordi-nation. In ot1.1erwords, discipline simply means efficiency.

Section 5. Military Courtesy.

In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of goodbreeding are always respectful and courteous to those aboutthem. It helps to muke life move' along more smoothly. Incivil life this courtesy is shown by the custom of tipping thehat to ladies, shaking hands with friends, and greeting per-sons with a nod or ll. friendly II Good morning," etc.In the Army courtesy is just as necessary, and for the same

reasons. It helps to keep the great machine moving withoutfriction ... Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline;

respect to 8uveriol's will not be confined to obedience on duty,but will be extended on all occasions." (Par. 4, Army Regula-tions, 1913.)

One method of exten<llng this courtesy i3 by saluting. WhenIn ranks the question of what n private should do is simple--he ohe~'s nn~' commnnu that is given. It is when out of ranks

that a private must kuow how and when to salute.

Section 6. Saluting.

In the old days the free men of Europe were all allowed tocarry w('upon8, and when they met ench would hold up hisrl~ht hun(1 to show that he had no wenpon in it and that they1:1et as friends. Slaves or serfs, however, were not allowed to




carry weapons, and slunk past tbefree men without making'any sIgn. In this way the salute came to be the symbol or sI~nby whIch soldiers (free men) might recognize each other. Thelower classes began to Imitate the soldiers in this' respect,although In a clumsy, apolog(>tic way, anll thence crept into clvU

life the custom of rnlsIn,(},"he hand or nodllIn:; as one passed anacquaintnnc(>. 'fho f:oll\iC'r8. Ilo\n'ver, kept their Individualsalntf', awl purposely Illade it Illtrkate nnd (}Wkult to learn inor(}er that It could he ae'qnlrell on1r hy the ('On!)t~lUttrainIng allreal soldier!{ r(>('cin'l1. To this (lay tll'mIes have preserved theh"snlute, ':tIllI when ('olTectly done it i~ at once reco:;nlzed andneyer mIstaken for tha t of tlle civilian. All RoldIcrs should hecareful to execute the salute ('xnetly ns prescribed. -The civl11anor the imitation soldier who trIes to imitate the military saInte,

invariably makes SOme mIstake which shows that he is not nreal soldier; he ~iYes it In an apolo;;etic mnunel"', he falls tostntlll or mnrch at attention, his ('O:lt I~;untmttoned or hnt onuwry, or he falls to look the I)(\rson salut<.'(l In the eo,re. Thereis a wide <UfTer'cuce In the n1('(ho,l of rendering and meanIng'betwN'll the clvi1i:1!1salute n~ use(l b~' fl'j('UU:; in pussing'. or by~ervnnts to thclr ('mplo~'er:;. and the l\lILITAHY SALU'l'B, thes~'mbol nwl si~n of the military llrofes8ion.I To salute with the hand, fh'st nssume the position ot n soldlc1"

or' march at nttentlon. Look the. officer' rou nre to. ~nlutestrnlg-ht in the e~'('. Then, whell the proper distance separates~'on, rnI~e the right han(l ~martly till the tip of the forefingertoueh<>s the lower pnrt of the he:Hl<11'('~~or forehend above therI~ht cy£'. thumh an(l finr;0rs f'xtendpd atHl joined, pnlm to theleft, forearm Inclined at ahout 4;:;°, han,} Hnl! wrl::lt stmight.Continue to look the officcr ~'()u al'e:'lall1tln~ strnight in theere :111<1e<'ll ~'our hnnd in tIll' vositlon of. snlute until theofficer ncknowlel1g-es the salute or until he }1l1:'J llllsscd. Then

(h'op the 1ll1nd smartly to the sille. The snlute is given with therlg-ht hawl only.To salute ,,;ith the rille, brillg' the rifle to right shoulder nrms

if not alrea<.lr there. CalTy the left hand smartly to tIle smallof the stock, forearm horl7.ontal, valm of the hnnll <.lown, thumband fin~('l's extc>ndc(l un,l .1oltw<1.for{'tin~er touchin~ the en<.lorthe, ~~~~dllg piece. Look the ofIlcer saluted In the eye. When

'




the officer hlis acknowledged the salute or has passed, drop theleft hand smartly to the side and turn the head and e~'es to thefront. The ritle salute may also be executed from the order ortrull. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drlll Hegulations, and para-graph 111, Cuvalry Drill He~ulations, 191G.

. To salute with the saber, bring the saber to order saber it notalready .there, raise anti carry the saber to the front, base ottIle IJilt as high us the chin fiLlli G inches in front of the neck.,ell~e to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than thehilt, thumb extended on the left of the' grip, all fingers gruspingthe grip. Look the oflicer saluted in the eye. When the oftlcerhas aclmowledgcd the salute or hus passed, lower the saber,point in prolongation of the ri~ht foot and near the ground,et]ge to the left, hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm

extended; and return to the order saber. If mounted, the handIs held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front ofthe stirrup. .

(POl' Cavalry.) To salute with the saber, bring the saber tocarry saber if not already there, carry the saber to the frontwith arm half extended until the thumb is about 6 inches Infront of the chin, the blade vertical, guard to the left, all fourfingers grasping the grip, the thumb extending along the buckin the groove, the fillg'<.>rspressing the baek of the grip against

the heel of the hand. Look the ofticer saluted in the eye. 'Vhenthe ofllcer hns oeknowleded the salute or has possed, brin~ thesnber down with the blade ngalnst the hollow of the right ~houl-del', guard to the front, right IWlHl at the hip, the third andfourth tinier on the buek of the grIp nnd the elbo)\" buck. .'l'he pistol is not carried in the hund but in the holster,

therefore \....en armed with the pistol salute with the hanu..Always stand or Inllrch at attention before and during the

snlut('. '1'he hat shouitl be on straight, coat completely but-

toned up, anu handii out of the pockets.

Section 7. Rules Governing Saluting.

u 382. (1) Salutes shull be exchanged between officers nndenlisted men not 1n n military formation, nor at drill, work,games, or mess, on en'ry oceus-ioll of their meeting, passing near,



14 MANUAL-FOR:FIELD ARTILLERY.

or being addressed, the uflicer junior in rank or the 'enlisted lllansaluting first."(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several

enlistcII men, the word ." attention tt is given by some one whopercei n~s him. when all rise, uncover,' nnd remain standing at

attention '11Itil the officer leaves the room or directs othel'w~e.Enlisted men at meals stop eating and remain seated at atten.tlon. ."(3) An enlisted man. if seated, rises on the approach of nn

officer, faces toward him, stands nt nttention, and salutes.Stanuin~, he faces nn oUker for the same purpose. If the partlesremain in the same place or on the same ground, such compli.ments need not be repeated. S01l11ers actually at work do notcease work to salute an officer unless a(1Ilressed by him.

, "( 4) Before addressing an oflicer, an enlisted man makes theprescri1>ed salute with the wenpon with which he is armed, or,if unarmed, with the right hand. ,lie also makes the same s~luteafter receivin~ a reply. ."383. (1 ) In uniform covered or uncoverel.l, but not in formn.

tlon, oflicers and enlisted men salute military pel'sons as follows:With arms in han(~ the salute pre!'cribeu for tllflt arm (s.entinelson interior guaru duty excepted) ; without arms, the right-handsalute. .

. "( 2) In ch'i1ian dress covered or uncovered, officers and en.listell men salute miIitalT persons with the right-hand salute."( 3) Officers a nd enlisted men will render the prescribed

salutes In n military manner, the ofllcer junior in rank or. theenlistell man ~alut1ng first. \VhC'n severnl o1Ueers III companyare !mluted, nil entitled to the 8ulute shull return It."( 4)' Except In the fiehl \lillIeI' carnll:l Igll or simulatNl cum.

pnl~n con<1itiom:, n 1l1:)untel1of!lcer (01' Holdil.\r) tllsmounts beforeaddressing n 8UI)erlor oHieer not moullted.

"(5) .A mun in formation shall not salute when directly all.(]n'ssl'(l, but slwll come to attentlon If nt rest 01' at ease."384. (1) Saluting (]istances 1:-.1 that within .which recog-

nition i~ eas~. In ;:::,enernl,it does not e~ceetl 30 paces."(2) \\'IWll [In oflicer entitlC'(] 10 tile salute Ilnsses in rear of n

body of troops It Is hroug-ht to attention while he Is opposite thepost of the commander.

'




"(3) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and streetcars, and In public places, such as theaters, honors and personalsalutes may be omitted "'heu palpably Inappropriate or apt todisturb or annoy civilians present.

392! .. Soldiers at all times nnd in all situations pay the sume

ComplIments to oll1cers of the Army, Knvy, Marine Corps, andVolunt(~ers, and to ofIlc('rs of the Kational Guard in uniform asto otlicers 6f their own regiment, corps, or arm of service."386. Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform

to the foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms whenarmed with the ritle. '1'hey will not salute if it interferes withthe p1'oper performance of their duties. Troops under arms will

salute as prescribed in drill regulations."387. (1) COlllmanders of detachments or other commands

will salute ofIicers of grades higher than the person commandingthe unit b~1first bringing the unit to attention and then salutingas required in subparn~raph 1 of paragraph 383. If the personsaluted Is of a junior or equal grade the unit need not be atattention in the e:I:chnn~e of salutes ... (2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their com-

tnanders will exchange salutes, both commands being at atten-tion."388. Salutes and honors as a rule are not pahl by troops

actually engaged In drill, on the march, or in the fiel<l undercampaign or simulated cnm]mign conditions. Troops on theservice of security pay no compliments whatever."389. If the commullll Is In line at a hult (not In the l1eld)

nnd armed with the rifle. or with sauers drawn, it shall uebrought to present arms" or J)l'(lsent sauers" uefore its com-tnander salutes In the folowin:: cusps: When the nuUonalantbem Is played, or when .. '1'0 the Color" or .. To the Stand-nrd" is soundt>d during reremonles, or wben a person is saluted

Who Is Its immediate or 111::11ercommander or n ~eneral officer,or when the national or regimental color Is saluted."390. At pnrn<les nnd oth('r ceremonies, under nrms, the com-

lllUlld shall render the prescribed salute and shall remain in theposition of salute while the naUonal anthem Is ueln~ pla~'ed;nlso at retrent nnd dnrlng ceremonies when" '1'0 the Color tt isV\nyed if no band is present. If not under nrms, the organlza-

"

" "



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 17

PrIvates (10 not salute noncommissioned officers. Prisoner::;are not permitted to salute; they merely come to attention Ifnot fietnnllr at \Vorl;:. 'l'lll' Vl:lyill~ of the national anthem as\. part of U lUl'<.UeyIs prohibited in the militar~' service.

Section 8. Courtesies in Conversation.

Jtl speakiug to fin offieer, always stand at attention amI usethewol'd "~ir." E~nl1lpl('s:",Jr, Private Bl'o\\"ll, COlllpan:,' n, rt'ports as ord0rly."~ir, tlll' 1irst f;(,l'~eant dil'cd('II me to 1'('port to the cnptain."(QJestion by an otlicer:) "'1'0 what (,0ll1pan~' <10 rou belong?"(AiSWCI':) "Company I I, sir."(Q1est!oll by nn of!ieer:) "I Ins first call for drill sounded?"

(An;w(,!r:) "l\o, sir;" or "Yes, sir; it sounded about fiveminute: 11.0." .(Qul':tion by an oflic('r:) "Cnn J'OU tell m0, please, where

l\In.l(lr ~IJith's tC'llt is?" ,(All~\X'r:) "1'<.'s, Sil'; I'll tak(' J'on to it."Use tl\l Utii'll person in sIX'aldn~ to an oflicer. Examples:"Does he Lkutell:.lllt wish," etc.Did tL~Captain sPIlll for me?"

In l1elh'\ring tl ll1t'ssage from one office-I' to another, always

use the fOlln similar to the followin~: Lieutenant A presentshis C(llllplil!<.'nts to Captain B un(l ~tates," etc. This form isnot used w};m the per80n seuding or receiYing the messnge isun cnllstC'l] Unn.In nIl omenl conn'rsntion refer to other solJiers b~' their

titles, thus: ~rg('nnt n, l'riyute C.

"

"




tlon for the piece itself without altering the position of the car-liai:c, th~ incna:dng the range; (d) means for changing theO1re<;:tiQuQf the gun, within certain limits, without shifting theWhole ~nrrlo.lD, t11\lS cnallling a quick change from one targetto au.ther to be matle; (c) fixed ammunition, similar in form totl,l(. fw:.niliar smull-~lrms cartridge.A tie).u ~un Vi' llQwHzc:r lllU~' 1)e considered ns being composed

of tie follo\\'lnl: L,riudval vurts: 'The gun, the ure~ch lllech:llli,sm,nndlhe curl'ln;e.rl"ll~ gun cou~lsts rO\l:;hly of: Menns for attndling tIle breech

Incclll\ulsm; the chUlUlwr or seat for the pO\Hler charge andprojoc\ile; means of ('onnnin; the po\vder gases nnd forcingthem to a~t in the prover oircction as they expand, amI of forc-Ing the vrojectilc, as it leuves the bore, to take the <lirection

desired.The b~'eech m~chanism COlllIH'ises roughly the breech block,operating lever, 1iring mechanbm, extractor, and safety device.It proV!llt;>smenns for openiug uIHl closing the chumber; for

firing the lJiece; for preYentin~ the viece from bein~ fired unlessthe I,m~ech\)lock is locked; for contluin~ the powoer char~e and}IroJectile H~uiust movement to the n'nr when the piece Is oig-charged; fil).l for ejecting the empty cuse ufter firing-.The carrhge consists, in a general wa~', of the cralllc, the

rocker, the s.gbting arrangement, the trail, the shields, and theWheels nud u~le.It provides mean>; for rendering the carriage stable b~' con-

trolIln;; the re<oll aUll foreill.~ the piece buck into flrin~ positionlifter tlist'lI:Il'g(.: for elevating and tran>rsing the piece; forsighting find laying the pipce: for protecting the canr.onccrsagninst ritle fin.} shrapnel lmllets; and for trnnsV8rting the}Ii ('ee. .In addition to 'lhe '! guns or howitzers in a batteQ' there nre

12 eHissons, JG LllllJers, H hattery wagon, a store wagon,' aforge limber, Hnl.! l. ston' llm1)l.'I'. The caissons 1I11l1 limbers aretwo-wheeleu vebicl~~ IH'ovideli with {'!lests tli\-illet! into com-Jlnrtmeuts for cnrl',lug HlUJUUI1!tion. In the 4.7-inC.'h gun. undG-iueh lH,lwlt"cr 1>atb,.'ries tIJe llll'e(' lImbl'rs :m.' not providellWith clil'sts, lJut urc ll)(;,llsul\..!J-for el\lT~'iu~ purt of t'le weightf the g\I1I, wh1<:h, for tl':\H'ling', is r(>tl'aeteu to such a positionthut n cOlls!th'l'ahh> lli<.lllllrtion of its weight is :-1U;)p~l1.tedy



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

its limber. The wagons and forge and store limbers are pro-vided with chests for carrying accessories, equipment, and sparJPMts. ;Field guns llre distinguished from howitzers hy their grellt~r

range, greater muzzle velocit~r, tlatter trajectory, and Romewlillt

greater rate of fire. The flat trajectory of the tiell] gun ren(1ers,It very eft'ective agaInst targets not protected by overhead c~veror relatively steep masks. But for the latter class of tlll;;ets.which can be reached onl~' fl'OI11above, how!tz0rs are nece~Hr~' •.Howitzers are distinguished from f1elll ~uns hy their Indi-

. vidual characteristics of cun'ell and zone fire. By tiring n pro-jectlle at II relatively high an~le of elevation, a greater rulgle oftall Is obtained as it strikes the intenlled objeet; anll th;'s char-acteristic makes the howitzer especially valuable in peretratlng

overhead cover or other targets which can b(' reaclwd onlyfrom above. By Yar)'ing the amount of the powder cmrge an(,l.the angles of elevation at which howItzers are fired, .:Ibjects atvar}'lng ranges may be reached at such nn angle of fall as toproduce the desired effect,Howitzers are further <listinguishe(l from fielt.l gms by two

distinctive features of design:(l) In the howitzer, on account of the short tnll and high

angles of elevation, the gun is plu('('(l ullllprnel1U the cradle,

with the object of reducing the o'\7('rturning tendclx'y at the end,of the trail and rendering the e:H'I'lnge l'itnlJle urder all condi-tions of londlng and elevation; while In the field gun the gun Isplaced above the cradle.(2) In the howitzer the amonnt of recoil vanes for ditrerent

eJevntlons and is automatically regulated, so th(lt the higherthe elevution the shOl"ter the l'pcoll will be; 'Ii"hlle In the Heldgun the length of recoil Is pml'tiC'nlly the same for nIl ele:vutlons .

.. ..... ,.

(C) AMMUNITIOr\',

The projectlles supplie(l for fielll nrtJllen nre of two g-CIlern:Iclasses, shrapnel nud shell. The ,weight Jf ea('h projectile Isthe same for each caliber, and Is a~ sho:vn In (A.) above. A':ompJete round of ammunition cons18ts .:It the cartridge case,the primer. the powder (propellin~) ehu'ge, und the projectile.The propelling charge Is of' smokeless pflwder.

~

' "

'




\ The shrapnel ('onsist~ roughly of a hollow ~teel case with asolid base, fitteu with n base bursting charge of black powder, ,n 11Ilin:: of shrapnel balls held in place by a smoke-producing('(Imposition, find. closed b~' a combination fus('. The fuse muybe so set as to cnuse the shrapnel to hurst in the air at any

d.(\sIred (Ilstance from the gun or on impnct. When the shrnp-tlpl bursts ill uil' tile.> lJul'stlllg' chnrgc strips off the ]JCad of the('l\se and S('IHI8 the sllruj)nd bulls out of the cuse with un added"l'lodtv nUt1 ::l<'HUei',.,!W!il to thl' fl'ont. :-;(l1n'~\\":I::tn the samelllnllIlej, that shot i:; e:,pellc'J from a ~hot;.::un (';\I'lrhl;.::c, The

Sllloke-lH'ouul'ing ('olUl'o~itioll is i:;:1!tCI1 \'d!l'll tI:e shrapnelbur.ts UUtlprodu('es u ",l1it(~ ball of ~;nlOke"'hieh ai(18 in.obser-Vation,' 'l'he velol'ity of thl' fo;hrap:wl halls is suflicil'nt to dis-nble man or benst at rlln;('s from the point of burst varying'

from ~OO ~'lll'd:.;for the longer ranges to GOO ~.llrds for mid and(;l1ort rnu::es, 'rhe pro])('r height of hurst above the linejoinin~ gun and tllr~('t i~ HSSU!Iled to he such as wiII give fitIE'nst Olle baJJ for e,'pr~' square' yar(l of a Yertl(,~ll tllrgct, \Vhenn ~hrnpJlel burf'ti'; 011 imV.let the erCpd is sOlt!~'what f'imilar tothat of n ~1l('1J. ~ll1'aDn('1 Is u~ed in generlll n1;ain~t animatetnl'~ets, such m; nwn l\nd llors('s,'rhe shell consh:ts of tl s'.)l1(lh('ad ~teel rllse, hollowed out for

n hurstiu~ d\nl'~'(' :111(1Ute(l nt the h:1se with n detonntlng fuse,

r.I'he bursting ('harge is of high ('xplof'iYe. The fuse detonateson imvact, eXlllodiilg' till' Imrsting charge, which in turn lJreaksthe Cfise into piP('l'S whieh art' thl'own in ('verr direction, ShelllJuy be also title(l with (lelnY-:lC'tion fuses which l)ermit the1t(:11 to venctrate the,obJe('t to n certain extellt before explod-

~llt'll is geuel':llIy lU:l'll against innnim~~tl' tar;;C't~. such asltrendllucnts, o\'<.'l'head co\'er, mate-riel, de.AI.mHwltion lIIa~' 1)(' fUl't IJ(~l' (')assifil'(l as fi::!cd and semifixed,,'ixc'l! l1mmunition is that in which the proj('di1e is ass<.'mhlc(ltlw eartl'hlgl' ('U:-;;l' COJlt~\luillg the vrolwlling' (')w.l'ge all(I

lrlmer, 'l'he familiar eOllllll('I'eial smull-arms cartrid;;e is anxmnplc of li:wd Il111UHlIlitlo:l,

SellIl1lxed UlllllIuuitioll i:-) thut in wldeh the cal'trid~c case'ontaluill~ the p1"oJ)eIllnl; ('har;!l' nn(l prinH'r i<:: ('nr1'i('11 sepa-'ute!y from th(l )ll"o.lcetllf' it:-)~..lf, s('parat(' COlllnnrtlll('nt~ h('in~

n the all1lI1Ullition l'Il('sts fOI' (':tell. T!lj~ i:~IH'e('~snrror howitzers on account of the va1')"in~ 110\\,(1('1"har6l' used

A.t9 3:>~

' '



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY:

tor the different zones. The powder charge is assembled in the'cartrldga case in three parts, each in a raw-silk bag. Forouter zone ranges the full powder charge is used. l~'or theml<ldle zone the top bag is removed and discurded' before. thecartridge case is Inserte<1 in the chmnher; while for the Inner

zone the top and middle bags are removed.. All field guns, except the very hen vy t~.pes, use fixed ammunl.tJon, wllHe howitzers use semitixed ammunition.

(D) TRANSPORTATION OF :MATl:mEL AND :PERSONNEL.

. Light field artillery in general Is horsed with teams of threepairs each, and the cannoneeers are mounted on the carriages.Horse artllJery is armed with the 3-inch fiel<1gun, but secures

increased mobility by mounting the cannoneers on slH.l<1lehorsesInstead ot on the 'carriages.Heavy field nrtmer~' Is drawn by teams of four. pairs or

by tractors. Cannoneers of henvy butteries, except when.movIng o,er level groun<1 and smooth ronds or urawll by motortraction, are <1ismounted and march 011 foot. Noncommis-sioned officers, except gunners, an<1 certain specialists are in-dividually mounted on saddle horses in all horse-drawn artil-IE-ry. In trnctor-drawn artillery nIl the personnel are trans-

ported ou motor-propelled ,ehicles or on the carriages.

Section 2. The Pistol.

'.rhe !Jl1all arm used by the 11~ieldArtillery l:i the automnticpl~tol. caliber ,4;:), mouel of 1911. The magazine mny be chargedwith any number ot cartritlg'es from one to Revell. For a tIe-talletl uescription of the pistol, see Ordnunce D('Illlrtment Pub-lication :\0. lSGG.

IMPORTANT }'OINTS.

(1) Never place the trigger finger within the trigger guarduntil it 1s intended to fire and the pistol is pointed toward thetargeL •(2) Do not carry the pistol in the holster with the hammer

cocked and safety lock on, except in an emergency.It the pistol Is so cnrrh.'d In the holster, co<'lwd ntHl safety

lock on, the but* of the pIstol shoul<1 be rotnted u \\'n~' from the

'




body when withdrawing the pistol from the holster, in order toavoid d.iJtpladng the safety lock.

(3) 'l'he tri"er should be pulled with the forefinger. If thetrigger Is 11\ll1e<1 with the second tingl'r, the forefinger extendingalong the side of the receiver is npt to press against the pro-

jecting pin of the slide stop and cause a jam when the slide re-oils.

(4) Car{' must be exerdscd in inserting the magazine to in-Its ('n':;:I;;i1l;::\';ith the magazine catch.

(i;» l'n:~:;;\lI'e must be entirely rellcvell from the trig-gel' afterU<-hshot 1n 01'(1(:1' that the trigger lllay reengage with the sear.(G) To remove cartridl:es not fired disengage the magazine

HIllI the11 extract tl1e cartridge in the barrel by draWingack the slide.

(7) 1.'l.1epistol must be kept dean, free from rust. and prop-rly oiled. Exclt"~Jive oil left in the mechanism will cause the:.tl'ts to gum antI work stlttly.

(S) Cure must be exerclsl'd to insure that the <1i8connectors Ill'overly as;sembled to the sear.(9) The hnmluel' flihould Hot be snaplJcd when the pistol Is

arti ally tllsl.1ssem1Jlcd.

(10) The stoeks n('('t! neV0r be removed, us the pistol can beismounted and asse111bled without r0lllovin;; tl1('111.

(11) Use no hammer either in assembling or dismounting the

(l~) l\lugazine: Hellsonuhle cure should be taken to see thatlIla~n.zlne i., not dente(l or ot herwls0 (lnrJl:.lg"et!.

Never insert the ma,azillc und strll.e it smartly with the hando force it home, ns this Illay s}lrin:; the bnse 01 ' tlle inturninr;

at the top. It should be insertl'll hy a qnkI\: ('ontinuous

}lISCELLA!';EOl;S J>.\TA CO!';CEI:!';!XG PISTOL.

'WeIght, 2 pounds 7 Ollllces.1'rigg0r pull, (j to i!JIOllIHls.~.l'otul length, 8.lJD3 111<:1Ics.

Barrel :. Length, lJ.02G inches.

Diameter of bore, O.4.j.j inch •



!f MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTI.LLERY.

Ri1ling: I

Grooves-Number, 6.Width, 0.1522 inch.Depth, 0.003 inch.

Lands, width, 0.072 iuch.TWist, one turn in 16 inches, left-handel!.}i'ront sight above axis ot bore, 0.55D7 inch.

AMMUNITION--DAT,L CARTRlVGE.

The components of the bull cartridge consist of cartrhlge case,l>rimer, powder, anll/lmUet.

CARTRIDGE CASE.

The cnrtrillge case is cylinllricul nnd is mnde of brass. It isprovi<1ell with a cnnnelure to vrevent the bullet being to reeddown on the powder.

rllHrER.

The primer consists of a cup which contains the primer com.pOf'ltlon, a puper disk, and un unvil whieh resists the hlow ofthe firing pin. The anvil is providell with two vents by whiClhthe llnme is communicated to the dw.rge. Ignition is pro(]ucedby crushing the composition uctween the cup nnd anvil by a

blow of the firing pin.POWDER.

. The powder is a ~mokeless l)o\nl<>r. The ('harge varies withthe kind amI lot, but it is gmemlly about 5 grains.

DULI.ET.

The body of the bullet is a cylinder. The bullet has a core oflend anll tin composition inclosed in u jacket of gUlling metal or

cupro-nickel. It weighs 230:t:2 grnins.Inches.

u-ngth ot hulleLr

O. 602

Diameter of cJ'llndrlcal part ot bulleL______________ .4G015Total length ot cartridgc 1. 201

To render the cnrtrillge waterproof the Inside of the neck ofthe case and the outside of the pl'lmer nre Shellacked.




Section 3. Care and Maintenance of Equipment.

[Paragrnph numbers refer to Drlll and Sel'Vice Regulations tor FieldArtillery.]

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

653. The comlllnlJ(ling officer of on organization Is responsibletllnt tIll' ('qlliVllIcnt isstiecl to him is kept complete and in gooderviceable conditIon, 111)(1hat his ofli<'ers and men are properly1strncte(1 in the use of the tools and'supplies issued for theUre ancl presel'Yution or ])ubJic pro])ertr. .654. The orgnnization commander will require that as soonpossihle after hC'ing lIsed all articles of equipment shall be

X:tmiIH,tI antI, if IJ('('('ssnr~', l'('paire(}; find that the articles Wheneft shall be in rpUI!iness for illlmediu te lIse. .

CARE OF THE BATTERY EQUIPMENT.

m:SPC)NSIl.lIUTY.

655. The captain is responsihle for the care and maintenancethe hattery equipmcnt. lIe will constantly supervise theork of lieutenants :111<1ther sn1>orrtinntes {~harg:edwith respon-ibility for the cOIHlition of part:'! of this equipment.

'l.'Iw lieutenant assigned to Department A (32) has direct01.' Hnl! is l'f'sponsiblo to tIle cnptnin for the good ordernll em('ff'ne,v of nil Jlart~ of the wlll"'£'led mat(-riel; the onersig-nerlto Depnrtl1l('nt H, of the horses, harne8s, nnd horseullHllf>nt; the 0111' Hssigneu to DepartmC'nt C, of the personllll]l1ipnwnt. .

'l.'he supply sergeant Is responsihle to the captain for theneral eare :IntI ll1ainteuul1(,C of the Go\,('rnl11('nt propertyslJ('(1 to the haUpry.

The chief mechanic is r(,8po118i1>leo tll(~ lielltennnt In charget. the good ol'del' 1I111} l'f'pnir of the mat('riel in actual u~e b:\'batterr; for thIs Plll'!108(! h(' has generol supen"lslon of nil

lttery l1lf'e]llInics, CX(;Ppt tll()se Hssigne<l to horseshoeing, andUt'iug cleaning- }l('rio(}s, of nil cOl'pornls an(l privates engagedWork In tile mnt('riel.

The chiefs of section are res])ol1sible to the lieutenant Inarge for the good or(]f'r of nil mat('riel anll eqUipment ISSUe(}

'

-




to their section!;. They are directly responsible for the service-able condition of their tenms, harl10ks, anl1 hOi'M Nluipment,, The gunners are r{'spon~i[)le to th('fr chll'ls of s~ction for thegood order of their piec0s nl1ll en I!':MI1S. Th~y are direetly responsible for the good ord~r of the piec~s.

The Nos. 4 are directly respon~ible to their gunners in gunsections, to their chiefs of se{'tiol1 or the Ct\isson ('orporll} Icharge of caissons In caisson seetfons, for the good order otheir caissons ..The drivers are directly r<>sponsihle to thcir chiefs of section

for the gooll order of their hor!'0s, hnrne~s, nnd hor~c equipmct1t.The instrument sergeant Is responsible to the captnill for the

good order of the rnnge-findlng, fire--control, nnd signal equip.ment.

The telephone corporal is responsible to the instrument 861geant for the good (mlcr of nIl the signal equipment of thebnttcrr.Members of the special details are re!'pon~ihle to the tele-

phone corpornl for the gooll order of nrticles of sIgnal equip-ment, to the instrun1<'nt sergeant for the good order of othernrtIcles of the range-finding U1lll1ire-control equipment issued tothem.Indlvil1ualf; are dil'ectly respon~ible for the good order of nI

articles of personal c-qu!pmcnt Is~mcd to them. Men asslgneelto sections arc respom;lblc to theIr chIefs of section for thegood order of such articles.It 1~ the duty of all n1('n to report nt once tn the noncom-

missIoned ofIicer, or officer to ,,-hom they nre re~ponsib)e, anyinjury to the materIel or any deticiency in the cquil)1l1cnt.

IN STHUCTJON.

656. Field Artillery mnt('riel requires IntC'llIgent. systemntIc.

and constuut care. .Correct Instruction nnd fl'Plluent prnctice In thi~ ~mh.lect fi

the personnel to I,cep the matcl'lel In serViceable condition nndto effed repairs promptly nnd satlsfactorllr,Materiel, all part!'! of which are clean, correctly surfnced, anli

In good repair, functions properly with the least pOHslble wenrand permits the making of re!lllirs without unnecessary delays.




Detailed descriptions of t11e materiel in use, with full In-structions for disassemhlin.!:!:" nsscmhling-, cleaning, and caringfOr the same, are fountl in the Handbook of that mat~riellssuedby the Ordnance Department. The noncommissioned officers otthe higher grades nnd a11o1liecrs should be thoroughly familiarWith the contents of the Handbook

657. Instruction in the care of matC'riel Is practicnl. It Isarried on under the direct supervision of fin officer in the parkuring the regular cleaning periods or at other times.The instruction of cannoneers includes the following:1. Nomenclature of the principal parts of the piece and

2, Uses and care of tools and accessories;3. Uses of the different materials issue~] for cleaning and

4. Cleaning of carriages, of leathC'r cases and straps, and ofVllS covers;

5. Principles of lubrication, and the lUbricating of all partsit;

. G. Disassembling an(l assembling those l)urts of the mnt~rielhich l)eriodlcally require cleaning- find rrpair;7. l\laking of minor repairs nnd adjustments;8. Special ('lenning require<1 after tiring;D. Painting of carring-es.

The instruction of <.lrivers and indiVidually mounted men in-u(les the car<~of harness fln(l hOl'se equipment.The instruction of ll1rlllhers of the hattery commander's de-il includes tIle cnre of the rnnge-llnding and fire-control nndgnnl equipment.

658, Tlw stlllly of nomenclature may well he continued to In-

IUllo }H'lleticnlly ull parts of the piece and cnisson If time

'l'lw pllrp()S(~ of this instrllctlon is not so much to memorizee exnct llllllles of the many lJarts as to call attention to theirist(,llec anll to th(>ir relations with other pnrts; facts whicherwise easily escape notice. The knOWledge gained stimu-es interest llnd develops resoul'<.'l'fulness in making repairs .



.MANUAL FOR. FIELD ARTILLERY. 29

Special wrenches, spanners antI other tools and accessories'W1Ilhe used only for the purposes for which intended.:Bolos fire usetl only ,...hen in the field. The blades will be

kept hright, sharp antI well oiled; the scabbards clean.rn~truetion will he g:ivcn in diITerent methods of using the

tackle blocks flntI rope, fln(] in making the common knots andhitches.

C:1rring-es in ll.-:ewill be equipped habitually with all articlesof tlleil' vr('I'w)'ilwtl equiIllllt'llt. The hattery wagon and store''''ng-on fire hnbitunlly }.;eI,t pneke(l. When eonvenient, however,tlw various cllest:o; containC'll t11crcin may be kel)t outside the\Vagons for cOl1venienre in getting at their contents.

MATEltL\LS 1'01: CI"EANING AND rnESERVATION.

'l'he proper uses of the sUPl1lics furnished for the clean-ing fin(l 1))'('st'l'\"ation of the battery equil1ment are set forth In1etnil in the II:Ult1i)()ok of the materiel and In Ordnance Palll-

)lll~,t No, ]OG;').

In general these mnterinls are issue(l for the following pur-

Oils and greases.-Luhri('llting oil, sperm oil, clock 011, and01' v:lspliIH" 1'01' luhricatioll;

Llgllt slushing oil :llll] cO~lIlie :1S rust preventives;Coal Ol' IwroselJe oil for the clc:lIling of metal parts and fornlltt'rns; .

J:oiletl linseI'll oil, r:1W linseed oil, antI turpentine fiS Ingredi-nts of 11l'C'}1arl'dpaint;:,'\('nt's-foot oil for s()ftl'nin.~ nnd I1n'sprving ]I:'ather;lIydroline oil for tllling recoil ('slinders. This oil should be

lsC'd for no oUI!'r lnll'post',

Oll1cers llllllm('1l should he' ahl(' to llistin.~uish the different oils

gol'enses hy the color, ~l1lell. or viscosity.:1raterial for painting,-S('('OI111 eoat Ulltl third coat olive drablliint for the wh('('INI materiel.

Brown enlllllel prlUl(,l' for painting' horse collars, trace chaIns,

Huhherine pnint for sl>nling' !llnnk charges.~111Roda for r(,ll1ovln.~ tlirt :111t1grease before paInting.l'owdered ]se for rellloving' old vuInt.



30 .:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

Sandpaper for smoothin~ surfaces before pnintin/;. ,Japan drier as nn in~rediel1t for hnstel1in~ the dryin:;.Boiled linseed oil as nn ingredient f()r h:1~teniJ1g tho drying

nnd for making the paint more suittl.ble for interior work.Haw'linseed oil as an ingredient for nl1\1\.ing the p:1int more

suitable for outside work.Turpentine for thinning paint.Sash and varnish brushes for pnintlng.Miscellaneous materials.-Borax as a flux: in welding;Camel's hair brushes for removIng dust nnd lint from optical

instruments;Castile soap for cleanin~ lenther ;Chamois sldn ns a wiping cloth for instruments except on the

lenses;

Crocus cloth for polishing metal:Emery cloth for cleaning metal by abrasion or wooring away

of the surface;II. nnd II. or Pnco soap for dcnning cloth nnd web equip-

ment; .. Lavaline for polishing metal, such as bearing surfnccs ot

collars, etc. ; ,Russet leather dr('ssin~ for pollshln~ leather nfter clenning;Saddle !;oap as a <lrei-"Sin~for If'ather:

Soap polish as a substitute for lnvaline;Sponges: Large size for 'washing carriages, small size for

cleaning leather:'Yaste as a wiper for ~eneral cleaning:'Vax: for rubbing on thread before sewing.

<':U:.\NING OF CAnRIAGES, ETC•

. 6G1. Frequent wipin~ or wMhlng of nIl parts of the cnrriar;cs

Is desirahle not onIs- for tr.e purpo~e of k('('pin~ them dean, bu,nlso to aill in the detection of mi:o;~in~hoIt~. nuts, nnd spIlt 1)lnsnnd of pnrts brol;;:(,I1,cracl~c(l. or ont of ndjustm0nt., Buckets nnd f:pongcs are hnhitnnlly U8£,(} f"r wnshing mr-rlages. The use of a hose thron~h which 'Wtlter Is thrownforcibly ngainst the carriage tends to wet pnrt~ which nre noteasily nccessible for dr~'ing. WhC'n convenient, cnrringcs maybe hauled into shallow water for washing.

" '




After wushing, the carriages ure dried' with sponges or cloths.Leather cnses and strnps nre cleaned in a manner slmllar to

hat prescrihed for lwrness (678-680).

C:mvns covers ar~ cleaned with water and II. and H. or'aco SOUl)(689). Leather llllrts fastened to the covers shouldot be immerseu in the water.

LUllRICATION.

662. It is of great importance that tho materiel be kept prop-rly lubricated. By that is meant the constant maintenance ofthin film of the prover lubricant b<>tween all working and

earing- surfnccs and the surfaces on which they work or bear.his 111mof lubricant is requircu in order that the parts maynction easily llnu without unnecessary wear.

l'he frequency with which the vnrious n1f'chanisms and partshoulu be lubricated and the amount of lubricant that shoulde nppJicd in each case can not ue definitely prescribed; theseevend uvon the conditions under which the materiel is being

It should be horne in mind, howenr, that too little oilauses far more waste unll damage than too much. .Oil holes are provi(led at various places where the surfaceshe lubricated are not directly ac('(~ssiule. These holes should

e deaned out frequently. Bxcppt during- oiling, they should belly closed hy tIle means provided. Defore oilin~ at fin oilole wipe off carefully any dirt or grit neur the opening thatIi~'ht ue carried down into it uy the oil.Before npplylng fresh lubricant the old should, If practicable,Wiped from the surf,H'l~S and the surfaces should be clean and

'(~e from grit. While npplying luhrieatin;; oil the mechanIsmopernte(l OJ" the part is moved to insure the formatIon of aomplete oil 111mhetween the surfaces, and care must he taken,

pecially ''''')I('n lubrieutin~ through an oil hole in cold weather,see that su!l1l'ient oil actually reaches the pro[)cr surfaces.hen oiling, cotton wa~te should he at hand and any oil thatills or runs upon surfal'es \\"))(-re it is not requIred should beiped up at once in order to pren'nt the acculllulation of du~td dIrt.

The llJen fire pl'acti('etl in luhricnting the vnrious mechanIsmsd parts, and lire thus taught the location of the oil holes HmI




CLEANING AFTER FIRING.

33

665, As ~oon as possible after firing, the bores of the gunsshoulU be cle~lllcd with n solution of ingredients in the follow-tnl proportion: One-half pound of sal sodn to one gallon of

boilln~ water. TIleY are then (Iried carefull,r and oiled.Also, the e1'ploded primers should be remoyed from the car-

trId~e cases nnd the cuses washed b~T Immersing them completelytn U hot but somewhat weaker solution of sal soda; they arethen drieu carefully. Neither adds nor solutions of acids willbe used for cleaning cartrIdge cases.

PAINTING.

66G. Instructions with reference to the painting of the ma-teriel are contained In the lInlldbook.

The object of painting the materiel is to aId In its preserva-tion and to render it less vIsible wheu in the field.Surfaces that become marred should be Iminted over without

waiting for an opportunity to paint the entire carriage.1'he number of coats of paint that should be applied In any

period depends upon the ~ouditions under which the mat~riel Isbeing used.

THE WHEELED l!ATERIEL.

667. In order to maIntain the wheeled materiel In service-ble ('ondition and to practice the men in Its carp, all parts areerIodIcally disassembled, eXllmined, cletl.ued, and asspmbled.~'or this purpose n sche<lule of systemutic cleuning will be fol-owed. . .

668. The cleaning schedule should be, simple In operation:hOUld set forth brietl~. the routine work to be (Jone each dayhut the lllllteripi 18 us('(l, and the spPciul work to be done fromime to time; llnd the Items of wOl'k in<:luded thel'ein should beuch that t()~et1lt'r ther constitute n thorough on'rhauling ofh(~ rarringC's. '1'he operations llt whIcll the vresence of n COIll-

l1ili~iolleuotllccr is required by the provisions of the Handbookre usually omitted from n schedule arrunged for the use of en-st(\(} men, such work being performed when specially ordered.

10G281°-voL. 1-17--2




669, "'.ork on the chfriages during cleaning periods is per-formel1 under the immediate supervision of the lieutenant as-signed to Department A (32).The ('hief mechanic is in direct chnrge of the work. lIe Is

responsible that the requirements of the clennlng schel1ule are

complied with; that the parts broken, cracked, worn, or outof adjustment are detectt'dand IH'Om[ltly repnired; t.hat thenecessary material,; nwl spare parts are obtninel1 from the qunr-termaster sergeant; that tIH>. tools find cleaning materials areproperly u~ell, and that th~ carriages nre left nlways in rendi-ness for immediate use.670. On each clay that tlw carriages are used, two periods will

habituall:r he designated for their cure; one hefore the cnrriages

leave park while the drivers are harnessing, the other duringthe first stabl{'s held after the return of the curringos to park.671. At the first period, the gunners amI the Nos. 4, assisted

by other members of the gun squad, If present, look over theirpieces and caissons, oil wheels, ('tc" and see that the cnrriagesnre In ever~' way preparell for use.672. At the commenc{'ment of the period heltl during stables

(603) the gunn{'rs, the Nos. 4, nncl such other cannoneers asmay be ne(>l1{'lrfor the work at hanll, nssemJ)le at the pnrl.:

where the chief mechanic notifies them of nny. special work re-quired for the l1a~'. They then proceed with the regular clean-in~ and with the ~peclal work ol'lh'!'ed,The chIef mechanic moves frml\ carriage to carringe inspect-

ing the work and assisting wherever neec1e<1.At the close of the period he accompanies the lieutenant in n

careful inspection of the ('arria~e~, and when so directed, seesthat the park Is put in ol'ller awl that the men are dismissed .. At this work an ab~ent gunn0r is replaced by the caisson cor-

poral of the same section, In CUISSOIlsections, one caissoncorporal is placed in charg'e of the cal~sons of his section forcleanIng. Other caisson corporals, not required elsewhere, arepresent and assist at the cleaning of the carrIages of theirsections.673. If it Is impracticable to care for the carrIages <luring

stables, other periods will he l1eslgnated at which times thecleaning will be carried on in a manner sImilar to thnt tlescribedabove.




HARNESS AND HORSE EQUIPlIENTS.

35

674:. Constant care is required to keep the harnes8 and horseequipment clean, 8(~rvieeuble, and in good repair, the leatherPurt~ Soft and pliabl<.', the metal parts frpe from ru~t and dirtnnd properly })tlJlltel1. .Drivers and illdividually mounted men will be carefully in-

structed in the cure of harness and horse equipment.675. Harness und horse equipment will habitua1l3' be cleaned

immediately after use. This obllgation. like the cnre of 'thehorse, iFj to be regarded as a part of the mounted duty, andexercises will 110tbe considered as complf'ted until horses, har-ness, and equiplll(lnt huve been eured for antI put in order.

The defining is perfornwd under the immediate supervisionof the lieuteuaut assigned to Department n (32).

. 'l'lle chiefs of section are in dirf'ct charge of the work per-tainin~ to their sf'etions and are responsible that th<>cleaningIs carried out as ordered, that the materials issue<1 are properlyexpended, ant1 that the harness is left in good order.Ordinarily about 30 minutes should be allowed for a driver

to unharness his pair and properly cure for and uispose of hisharnes8.

, To do this the drivE'r ,vipes and cleans with a <l:lmp cloththe bits. the bearing surfates of the collar!'l, nnd the l('ntherParts of the harness, pnying particular attention to the place~Wll(.'rc the leather is wet from perspiration; (l1'h~s the bits nndrUbs them with 11 cloth damp with oil. aud puts the harness Inorder. If the saddle blank(,t is wet, he l('llves it uncovered todry. At this time, nlso, parts that should he repaired or replacedare ~lvell to the chief of section, who is responsible that theyare promptly taken to and returned from the saddler or that

the neCCf)sary new parts are procured from the quo.rtermaster8ergeant. .

676. Curc should be ex('rc!sed in hnndlin,~ all nrtlcl('s of har-nQSs nnd horse equipnwnt. Saddles must not he (ll'oPPll<1orthrown about, as fraetureu arches or broken sid~ burs mayresult; collars must not be subjected to rou;;h treatment, or theyInny be bent out of shape and rendered untit for use.

'

'




Such parts as stirrup straps, quarter strnps, etc., should occa-sionallr be exchanged or be altm'ed in length so as to bringfresh holes at the buckles or fresh surfaces into wear. . 1

677. The saddle blanket should be kept clean, soft, and free from

wrinkles. Occasionally it should be hung in the sun and wind,and then beaten and brushed. When neeessary it is thoroughlycleaned uy repeated immersions in tepid soap suds and then,without wringing or pressing, is hung over a pole or line to dry.678. At intervals of from one to four weeks, depending upon

climatic conditions amI the use to which it has been subjected,the harness shoultl be completely taken apart and thoroughlyoverhauled, cleaned, and dressed.'Vhen necessary the collars, trace chains, etc., should be

painted.To clean and dress the harness: Take the harness completely

apart, unbuckling straps, removing buckles, loops, etc., whereverpossible. .

With a sponge tlnmpened but not wet with water' Wipe offall surface dust and mud. Hinse out the sponge, moisten it inclear water, squeeze it until nearly dry, rub it vigorously uponcastile soap, and work it about in the hand until n thick, creamyla ther is formed. Clean each leather piece thoroughly in this

lather, each strap being tlrawn its entire length through thelathered sponge so as actually to remove therefrom the salt,sweat, and dirt.Again rinse out the sponge and make n thick lather as de-

scribed above except that saddle soap is used. Go over eachpiece as before, working the lather well into every part .. Placethe parts in the shade to dry.While these parts are drying, clean the buckles and other

metal parts of the harness.After the leather parts have become partially dry, they are

rubhed vigorously with n soft cloth.The harness is then assembled.679. As long as the saddle soap dressing maintains the

leather soft antI pliable nothing further is required, but fromtime to time it wlll be necessllry to npply u little neut's-footoil. Fr<'Quent li~ht applications are of more vulue than in-frequent heavy ones.



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY; 37

To oil the harness: Clenn the leather parts in the luther 'ofc~lst\ll> sonp as dcscribcu above.

While tlw parts are still dam)) nppl~' the oil to .the flesh sideof tl.le l('athe1' with H cloth or eotton waste Illoist('ued but not

Soakeu with oil, using long, light strokes. A light e\'en dis-tribution of the oil should be sought. The tendency is to usetoo much oil; the Ulnoullt necessarr for eneh set of harnesst;hould rurely exce(>d two ounees. After oiling, the purts should,it practIcuble, be allowed to stand for ~4 hours in n warm, dr:r,~hndy plncE', und' should then be rubbed with n dry cloth .. Theharness is then assembled.

680, D(>taill'(l instructions for ('h~:lning. dressing, and oilingleather equipment lire contaiIwd in Ordnance Pamphlet No.19G~.

RANGE-FINDING AND FIRE-CONTROL AND SIGNAL EQiJIPlfENT.

681. The instructIons contained in the Handbook, in Ord-nance l'n.mphlet No. 1790, and In Signal Corps Manual No.3,.for the core nnd disassembling 01' th(' rnnge-finding and fire-Control and signal eqUipment will be followed. . .

. 682, The equipml'nt w1l1 be cal'cd for as soon ns possible

fter being used, the work on eneh Instrument heIng pel'formedlnb1tuull~' by the indivIdual asslg'N'd to its serv!ee.

In caring for the instruments chmnois skin hJ ordinarily useds n Wiper. on parts other than optical l;urfaces. '1'0 clean suchllrfuces, remove with a eumel's hair brush all particles thatll1~ht scratch the 8urfuee, moisten the surfl\ce with the breath,'Ipe it cnrefully with the slH'cinl lens pnp(>r that can be pro-Ur(>d from the Ordnance Department or with n piece of oldOft linen, and remove an~' rell111lning lint with the bl'Ush.

Water is hurmful to optIelll smfuees eXcl'pt In vel'~' smallJunntltJes, as fl'om tht> ('(?nd('lIsntlon of the bl'(':\tl1. 1'11(' per-})lration of the hod~' contains flU 11(:1(1 tllat deefl:nposes opticalloss. and for that rpl\SOU drops of p(ll'splrntioll and fingernrks should not ue pprmitted to remain tller(,>on. Under noreUlllstnnces w1l1 dirty dotl:, ('hnmols skin. <,otton waste, ormUur materIals be used fOI' ('](lunin; optical surfuces, and oil

never be allowed to reach them.



38 :MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

It is important that optical parts of instruments be kept .inwarm, dry places when nor in use.683. Both before starting out for drill or exercise nndafter

returning from the same, all service buzzers will be tested to

insure their being In working order.During the tests described below the switch lever of the

service buzzer, Model 1914, should remain on the side marked T.

TELEPHONE TESTS.

(a) See that the plug Is firmly seated In the jack, thnt theline connections are good, nnd that ground connection is good

(In moist earth).(b) Attach wire connector to ground rod, blow into transmlt~

tel', and at the same time, by pressin~ and releasing the switchin the transmitter, the blowing should he clearly heard In thereceiver. If It Is, this establishes the fact that the telephoneand plu~s are in good order.

(0) Connect the line binding post, nnd them make the test asin No.2. If this test worl{s, the telephone is in order.

(d) Examine buzzer key contact; see that the upper contactis made when key is up, and that It Is broken when key is down ..See that both lower contacts are made when key is down an<1both are broken when key Is up.

(e) Test the battery amI receiver by connecting the terminalsRand T with the telephone tool. If a distinct click is heard,battery and receiver are In order.

(1) Test the transmitter by connecting the line-binding postsas In test No.3; then short circuit the trnnsmitter termInalswith the telephone tool.. If this makes the primary circuit nloud click will be heard in the receiver, and the trouble is

located In the transmitter or its cords. The rear cover over theswitch and connections can be remove(l in the event of n faultbeing locn1ize<.lthere. rfhe transmitter r>rollel. must never beopened under uny circumstances, as this will invariably resultin its complete <.lestructlon.

(u) To test the secondary circuit: With the plug Inserted inthe telephone touch the gl'OUIl(}od to one pole of n A'oodbatteryand the line connector to the other. If a dlstlnct click is hellr<1In the receiver, the secondary circuit Is in order.

I

'

'




(h) To test the line: Operate the switch' button on the trans-nlltt<:.>r,nnll if a click is heard in the reeeivl?r the line is prob-ably ~rounueu, as a click indicates a complete circuit. If noclick is 11earll the circuit is open, which lllay be cuusell by very1'>001' connections or u severed line.It ~round connections are good, the signal corporal should

Jmmediately hasten over the line, repairing nny damage to insu-lation, or Bpllcing any breaks in the line that can be located.

(i) Faults in the line are most surely discovered by cuttingin at several places with an el:trn instrument. This can be doneWith a receiver only. They are llue to grounlls or breaks.A bad ground of the line near the instrument is indicated by a

Weakening of the buzzer note when the instrument is connectedto the line, and frequently by a noisy receiver. A. partial groundOf the line is indicated by weakness or complete failure of tele-1>hone transmission, nlthough buzzer transmission may still bePossible. An opening or break in the line is indicated by com-lete failure of trnnsmission by telephone, although buzzer truns-llssion may st111be possible.

Elimination 8cfted/llc.

r"st N' 2 (h a'd I) jFans; make te~t Ko. 3.o. pone n pugs ••••• Works; phooeisO.K.

F!lils; make test Ko. 4.est No.3 (phone)..... ••••••••••• \'Ii or~s; plug or cords out of order; replace or r&

pllir.Buzzer contart O. K.; make test No .. ~.

rest No.4 (buzzer contact)....... Ullzzcr COoturt not O. K.; adjust bllzzercontact;make test Ko. 2; if this fails, make test No.3.

Falls: (1) Repair or replare rert.'lver or receiverends; (2) clean and briRhten carbon terminals

est No 5 (battery and receiver) and zino bottom 9n battl.'ry; (3 ) replace bat-

, . "Itery; make test No.2; if this fails, make testNo.3.

Works; make test !'o. 6.r Works; r~pl,ir or ~eplare transmi.tter; make testest No. (j (trnnsmit ter) ••••••••.•• J o. 2; If this fllll;~,make test :\ o. 3.

1F!uls: make test :\0. 7.

est No 7 (secondllry c1rrult). {W~rks; primary coi,' or wi,ndln~ out of order.. .... FIlIls; secondary COilor wmding Ollt 01 order.

685. Flash lights are issued for use during night firing .....08e with hoods are for issue to the instrument sergeant find

o the gunners i those 'vithout hoods to the batter~' commander,

"

' ~

"



40 MANUAL- FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

the re<:onnalssance officer, the executive and his officer assistant,and in each gun section to the chief of section, No.1 and No.3.686. Field glasses and such other articles of this equipment

ItS the captain may desire wlll be issued to inulvlduals before

each <lrlll or exercise involving their lIse. Imme<liately there-after they will be turne<l in an<l store<l in sucll place as thecaptain may <lirect.

INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT.

687. The articles of In<lividual equipment w111 be kept Inserviceable con<lition ('[thel' by allowing the men to care forthem at their own time or by designating special perio<ls for

this work. .In either case the work Is under the supervision of the lieu-tenant in charge (32), anll the chiefs of section are responsiblethat it is properly carried on an,i that the necessary deaningmaterials are on hand, avallnble for use and properly expended.688. All men will be instructed in the care nnll repair of this

equipment, in accordance with the instructions contained InOr<lnance Pamphlet No. 1965.689. Articles of cloth l~qulpment shouhl be frequently well

brushe<l with a stiff bristle or u <lry scrub brush.They should be washe<l only when necessary and then ,vith

a solution made hy using ing-I'cdients in the following propor-tlons: One cake of II. and II. or l'llco soap dissolve<l in ninecups of hot water.To wllsh an article of cloth equipment: nemove all <lust and

muu by brushing; sprea<l the article on n clenn board or rock;apply the soap solution with a sCl'uh brush; when a gool1latherapp<'urs wash it off with clean wnter anu place the article inthe shade to dry.690. Leather equipment iF! clennell in a muuner similar to

that prescribed for harness (678-680).691. Cante{'ns and compolll'nts of the meSR outfit should he

kept clean, and water nUll food kf>pt in them no longer thannecessary. Articles made of alumInum shoultl be cleaned withwater and a neutral or sllg-htly alkaline Ronp, such aR II. andII. In cleaning canteens u little sllud may be used to advantage.

692. A pistol-clellnln::t kit is Issued to each battery, and themen will be inst.ructed in 1ts use.




The pistol will be kept clean, free from rust, and properlyoiled. It should be well oiled at all times in order to lubricatethe working parts and to prevent the formation of rust; butexcessive oil left in the mechanism causes the parts to gum andWork stiffly. The pistol will be cleaned always immediately

after firing.A detailed description of the pistol and Instructions for itslsflssembllng, nssembling, and care are found in Ordnance)amphlet No. 18GG.693. 'rhe individual E'quipments will be frequently examinednd parts needing r<:>palrwill he repaired either by the respon-ible individual Qr by a mechanic.694. It is important thut both officers and enlisted men havegeneral knowledge of the repair of equipment. In active

ervice when the r<:>plnclngof equipment may be difficult andncertain, the repair thereof may he of great importance. Inime of peace opportune rE'pairs prolong the life of the equip-nent and reduce the cost of maintenance of the orga~ization.

ARE OF BATTALION AND REGIMENTAL HEADQUARTERS EQUIPMENTS.

695. The several parts of the battalion and regimental head-uarters equipments are cured for as prescribed for the corre-

ponding parts of the battery equipment with necessary modifi-ations; the adjutant. sergeant major, llIld signal corporal beingharged with responsibilities corresponding to those of the <'Up-

ain, instrument sergeant" and telephone corporal, respectively.The signal corporal is responsible to the sergeant major for

he good order of the reel cart, its team, harness, and horse

696. Compasses" field glasse~, watches, and such other ar-Icles of the range-finding and tire-eontrol, si~nal, and en~Ineer

quipment as the adjutant may desIre will be issued to indi-Iduals before each drill or exercise involving their use. Imme-iately thereafter they will be turned in and stored in such plnces the adjutant may direct.

Section 4. Uniforms.

Uniforms and clothing 'Issued to enlisted men must not beOld, pawned, loaned. given awa~', lust or damaged through



42 XANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

neglect or carelessness. Any soldier who violates this. rulemay be tried by a military court nnd punished ..All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men,

whether or not charged on their clothing allowance, remain theproperty of the United Stutes and do not become the property

. of the soldier either before or after discharge from the service.

Under the law n soldier honorably discharged from the Army ofthe United States is nuthorized to wear his uniform fro111 theplace of his discharge to his home within three months afterthe date of such llischarge. To wear the uniform after threemonths from the date of such discharge renders such personliable to 1ine or imprison1l10nt, or both.The dress uniform (the blue uniform) consists of the dress

cap, dress coat, dress trousers, nnd russet-leather ShOOll. Thestraight, standing, lllilitar~', white linen collar, showing no

opening in front, is nlways worn with this uniform, with not toexceed one-half Inch showing nbove the collar of the coat.Turndown, piccadilly, or roll collm's are not authorized.'Yhen undf'r arms, white glovl~s nnll the garrison belt (or

russet-leather helt and cartrillge box) are worn.The full-dress .uniform is the same as the dress uniform, with

the breast cord added. .The service uniform is either cotton (summer) or woolen

(winter) olive drub.For duty In the field it consists of the service hat, with cordsewed on, Rer'\'"icecoat or swenter, service breeches, <'live-drabflannel shirt, l('~gin~s, russet-leather shoe~, and. idcntiflcatlollta~. In ('old weather olive-drab woolen ~loves are worn; ntoth('r times. no gloves,When not In the field, the service enp Ir; worn instend of the

cnmpal~n hat. Under nrms, white gloves nnd the ~arrlMn belt(or russet-lealh('r belt and cartridge box) are worn.

Wear thf' exact uniform prescribed by ~'our commandingoftic('r, whether ~'ou are on duty or orr duty. .Never wear a mixed uniform, fiS, for instance, a pnrt of the

service uniform with the blue uniform.NeYer wellr nn~' part of the uniform with civilian clothes.

It is ver~' unsoldierly, tor example, to wear a civlllan overcoat




Over the, uniform or to wear the uniform overcoat over acivilian suit. -_Keep the uniform clean and neat and in good repair.(h'ense spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon as

Do~sible.Hips and tenrs should be promptly mended.Missing buttons and cap and collar ornaments should beroll1vtly replaced.There is hut one correct and soldierly way to wear the cap.

-Never wear it on the back or side of tIre head.'l'he service hat should be worn in the regulation shape,

penked, with four indentations, and with hat cord sewed on.Do not cover it with pen or pencil marks.Never upvear outside your room or tent with your coat or

Olive-drab shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhooked. Chev-rons, service stripes, and campaign medals and badges are aPart of the uniform and must be worn as prescribed.When coats are not worn with the service uniform olive-

drab shirts ure prescribed.Suspenders must never be worn exposed to view.Never appear in breeches without le~gings.Leather leggings should be kept polished. Canvas leggings

should be scrubbed when dirty.Russet-leather (tan) shoes should be kept clean and polished.The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout and

the collar hooked. When the belt is worn it w111be worn out-side the overcoat.

Section 5. The Service Kit.

The service ldt is composed of two parts-(a) the field kit,'Which includes ever~.thill~ the soldier wears or carries withhim in the field, an(l (b) the surpl us kit. •The field kit consists of the arms, personal nnd horse equip-

lUcnts and clothing, additional to that worn on the person, re-qU!l'ed by and prescribe(! for the soldier In the field.The articles comvri~ing the ldt vary with the dUtil>S of the

lnen and are furnished by the Ordnance Depurtment. the Quar-termaster Corps, and the l\Iedica! Department.

_ ---

_

-

_




The !ield kit for individually mounted men consists of nnd iscarried as shown below.

ORDNANCE PROPERTY.

(A) PERSONAL EQUIPMENT.

ArtIcles. Where carried.

1 can, bacon ••.••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Nenr snddlo pocket.

t {On left side, on pistol belt bctwl1en first.

, canteen................................ aid pouch and magnzln~ pocl,ct.1 canteen cover ••••••••••••••••.•••••••••. On canteen.I cup ) jon canteen, undl1rcover.I fork • . !'lear saddlo pocket. .I knife Yess kit ••••••••••••••••••••• Ncar sn<ldlepocket.t spoon !'lear sl\ddle pocket. .

I meat can Nenr !laddiepock!'.t.1 ~istol ~It holster ma~a7.lnepockets Ion person, belt outside 'lll CI,othinlt,Pl.,sto, , 1 . on right hip, first-Rid packet 0:1 lert at

extra m~a7.ines, ~l cart.ridges........ alld townrd front of helt., m~gallneI pouch for first-aid packet............... pocket in front of first-aid packet.

I spurs, palr ••....•••.•.•••••.•••••••••. '}on person, buckles outside.1 spur straps, pair..... •••• •••••••••••••. .

(B) nORsE EQUlfMENT.

1 bridle ••••.•••...•••••••••••••••••••••••. On horse.I halter headstall. On horse.

I halter tie rope••••••••••••••••••••••••••• On hnller, free and socmen in nrnr pom.rolllring.IUnk .•••.•••...••••••••••••••••.••••••••. On hridle, frco end snapped up.I saddle blankct ••.••••••••••••••••••.•••• On horse. .I saddle .•••••.•.••••••••••••••.•••••••••. On horsll.I sBddlebags, palr ••••••••••••••••••••••••. On saddlo, the saddlr,bag straps passed

. throllJ,:h the clncha rings nnd drawn. tight ht\fore fa~tenin~.

I surcingle .•••••••••••••••••••••••••. Onr saddlr, buckled on Deorsido.

~~~~cb~~h~room[ng kit ••••••••••••••. orr sarldlo pocket.I feed bag ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. On sadelle.

1 grain bag •••••••• : •••••••••••••••••••••• In (ced bag.

QUARTERMASTER PROPERTY.

(c) EQUlrMENT.

1 identification tng .••••••••••••••••••••••• Slunl: around neck by tape.IIpin~, tent, Shelter} I 1>1 k .t 11I poll', trnt,lIhelter n nn e ro .1 tent, shelter, half, mounted •••••••••••.• Around nnd (orming pnrt of blanket roll.

- "

~



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY • 45

. (D) CLOTHING COMPONENT.

1hlanket •.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. Jn blanket roll. .1slicker •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. Rol!cd and strapped t~ pommel of.s~dle.1tOwl)l.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. Off saddle pocket, outside canvas lining.1comb } .} :g~g;~~~~eh..••••••••••••••••••••••••••. Wrapped in towel.

1 drawers, pair } .2 stockings, pBlrs •••••••••••••••••••••••. In blanket roll.1 undershirt

(E) RATIONS.

2 reserve rations, each cons!sUngor-12ounces bacon •••..•.•.•.•.•.•••.••• In bacon can.16ounces hard bread ••••••••••••••••. Dividcd between saddle pockets.1.12ouncos eotree, U. & G•••••••••.•. In coffl'cbag ofsaddlobags, in near pocket.2.4 ounces sugar •••••••••••••••••••.•. In sugar bag ofSaddlebags{in near pocket.0.16ounce salt ••.••••••••••••••••••... ln salt bag of saddlebags, n near pocket.

(F) FORJ.GE.

1 foed, 4 pounds of grain.: •.•.••.•••.•••.. In grain bag.

(0). MEDICAL l'ROPERTY.

1 first.aid paekot ••••••••••••••••.••••••••• In pouch on belt.

The coat and the overcoat form part of the equipment to becarried with the men in the field only when climatic conditionsrequire them. When they are pot ordered carried they are made

up in bundles, secured and marked so that they may be for-warded whenever necessary.When the coat is carried nnd is not worn on the person it is

placed in the blanket roll. When the overcoat is carried and isnot worn it is rolled and strapped on the pommel of the saddle.To roll the overcoat or slicker.-Spread the overcoat on the

ground, inside down, skirt buttoned throu~hout, sleeves parallelto the middle seam, collar turned over on the shoulders.Turn the tails of the coat under about 9 inches, the folded edge

perpendicular to thebnck seam. Fold over the sides to form nrectangle not more than 34 inches across, nccording to the sizeOf the coat. nolI tightly from the collar with the hands andknees, nnd bring over the whole roll that part of the skirt whichWns turned under, thus bjndlng the roll.The slicker is rolled in a similar mann('r.To make the blanket roll for mounted men.-Spread the shel-

ter half (model 1004) on the ground, roll straps underneath,




nnd folll oy('r the triangular part on the rectangular part. Turnunder the roll strap edge of the shelter half so that the widthof the fold will be 8 inches. Fold the blanket once acrol'S thelonger e<lj.;esand lay the blanket on the shelter half, folded edgewithin 1 inch of the roll strap e<lgc of the shelter half. Fold

the sides of the blanket nntl of the shelter half Inward, wIdthof folds nbout 11 Inchel'l. The shcltpr tent pole und pins are nowlaid on the blanket at the edge farthe~t from the roll strap edge,pole on one side of the- center line, pins on the other, 80 as toallow the roll when completed to bend at the center. Place theunderclothing on the blanket. If the sweater Is to go in the roll,spread it smoothly over the blanket.. Holl tightly toward the roll strap edge, using hands and knees,nnd bring oYer the entire roll the part of the 8helt0r half which

was turned under, thus binding the roll. Buckle the two avail-able roll straps about the roll, passing them nround twice. Theroll tlm8 formed shoulrl be ahout 44 inche~ long.To pack the feed bag for indiVidually mounted men.-The

grain is placed in the grnln sad\: and equally divided hetween thetwo halves. The elongated j.;rain sack is then placed inside thefeed bag anll the whole lashed tightly to the blanket roll by theweb straps at ('ach en II of the feed bag, so that the open part ofthe feed bag is closed against the blanket roll. If empty,. thefeed bag, with grain ~acl\: Inclosed and nIl web straps buried 1nthe bag, Is lashed to the blank<'t roll hy the coat 8traps.To pack the blanket roll with the attached feell baA', three

coat straps are us('(l, one to fa~t('n the middle of the roll to themiddle of the cantle of the saddle, ani} one at each end to fnetenthe end of the roll to the saddlehll~ strap ring. The blanket rollis plnced on the cantle so that the f('('(l haA' will he uppermost.The coat strups are passf><ltwice around the roll and huckled.

The equipment of euch driver is the same as for Indlvidunllymounted men with the exception of horse equlpm('nt and grain.The <1rlver's horse equipment consists of 1 hor~e brush, 1

currycomb, 2 f('("(1bugs, 2 grain bngs, an<1 2 surcingles. Eachdriver carries a feed of grain for ('ach horse. Halters, saddle-bags. sadille hlankets. etc., are incllHled In the harness.The <1rl,.er'8 cant('('n i!'l snaplwll In the near pommel ring of

the ofT saddle. Ills /';a(lillchng8, hlnnk('t roll, fced bags, slIcker,




etc.; are likewise packed on the off saddle. After attaching hisfllicker the driver turns the top of the roll over the pommeldown into the saddle so as to avoid any interference with therein roller on the off saddle.To pack the driver's blanket roll and feed bags.-The grain is

placed in the grain sacks and each sack placed in its feed bag.The two feed bags ure tied securely together at theirOl)en ends,Using the" nose llnd head" weh strups, the two bags being tiedas closely as possible to prevent the l()'\ver ends chafing againstthe traces. 'rhe two f('(\II hags are then ~mspelHled across theseat of the saddle of the off horse tlIHI laslled in place by theGO-inch.coat strap~ on eneh side, as follows:. Pass the coat strap undf'r the rf'ar quarter strap and take oneturn around the nose bag, if necessary punching a throat" into

the bug near the lower el1(1to prevent the cout strap slipping.The blanket roll being lashed to the center of the cantIe, bringthe free end of the roll forward so as to hind over the feed bagand take two turns around the end of the blanket roll with thecoat strap. Then pass the frpc end of this strap over the strapsthus in place and buckle tightly. Do the snme on the otherside.

If more thnnone fce(I is to he ('nrri('d, place the ~rnin for thefirst feed in the dosct! pnt! of tile fccd hag awl lash the feed bag

tightly with the rawhide thong. Put the rel1lai))(I('r of the grainIn the grain snck, and pIlle£' llw ~rnln sllck in the feell bag;secure the two feed l)/\~:'>o the off saddle as abm"e. ,The surcingles are curried one on cHeh hOI'~('1buckled over

the saddle.With the excepUon~ not('(I, all artide8 of the driver's equip-

ment are pncl~etl und ('Hl'l'h'{l in. n IllHnnpl' similar to thnt de-Scribed for individually lIIoUlltt\(}111011., In addition to the kits abo\'e pn'scribed, each corporal is pro-

Vided with n housewife whieh he will cllrrr in his hllyer:o-ackororr 8add](~pocket.The members of the specIal details and of the headquarters

company are provitlell with ynrious equipllwllt which the~" carryon their persons. The t\el<l glns:o-eswill be ('arrie(l on the rightSide, the Hag ]dt on the bllcl~, tIle strap in each case passIngover the left shoulder.

"



48 MANUAl. FOR FIELD 'ARTILLERY.

An agent while on duty fiS ~uch will wear on the right :forearm a red brnssard. Brassards are furnished by the Quarter-master Corps.

The field kit for cannoneers and all men not mounted consistsof and is carried as shown below:

ORDNANCE PROPERTY.

(A) PERSONAL EQUIPMENT.

Articles. Where carried.I can, bacon } 'r h kI can, condiment ••••••.••••..••.••••••.••••••••••••••• n avors(\c .

I canteen ..•... .•••••••.•••••••.••••..••.••••.••••••••. On rij!;ht rear 01 pistol belt.I canteen cover •.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,••••••.••. On C!lnt~en.

~~r~

IIPnn~:~::s~~~.nder cover.

I knife Yess kit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. In haversack..I spoon In haversack.1 mea t can In ha verso.ck .

'On por~on, belt ont~ido all

• 1 b I hIt . k t 2 t} 1 do thing on right hipI Plst,O e t, 0 s cr, magazme poc e, ex ra fir~t.ald packet t!ln left ofma~azme~ 21 cartridges. .••••. and toward front of belt

I pouch for nrst aid packet. mngnr.lne pocket In front

of flrst.ald p8cket.I haversack ••••••••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• On person.

QUARTERMASTER 1>noPERTY.

(c) EQUIPMENT.

Iidentincation ta~ .•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Sll1ng around neck by tape.5 pins, tont, Shelter} . I bl k t III pole, tent, sheltor .•.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. n nn e ro .

I tent, shelter half, mounted •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Around !lnd forming part ofthe blanket roll.

I blanket ..•••••••.•••••••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••••. In hlanket roll.I sheker •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~'oldl'ld Bnd placlld between

folds of one 01 pllulln!l ofcarringo on whIch soldierrides.

I towel In haversack.I comb }I soap, cake •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ; ••••••••• Wrappod in towel.1 toothbrushI drawers, pair }2 stoeklnl(s, pair~r •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• In blanl<ot roll.I undershirt

-

~

"



::MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 49

(E) RATIOKS.

2reserve rations, each consisting of- .12ounces bacon •••••••••..••••••••••••••••••••••••. 1n bacon can.16ounces hard bread In haversack.1.12ounces coffee, R. do: G.}2.4ounces Sll~~r •••••••••••••••••••••••• 1n condiment can.0.16ounce salt ,

(G) MEDICAL PROPEItTY.

1 first-aid packet In pouch on belt.

The remarks lllade with reference to the coat and the overcoatIn the case of mounted men apply to cannoneers except that whenthe overcoat is carried, and not worn by the cannoneer, it IsfOlded and placed between the folds of a paulin on a carriage ofthe section to which the cannoneer is assigned.

When the old model haversack and canteen are issued the per-Sonal equipment of lllen not mounted Is Increased by two canteenhaversack straps. Such haversacks are slung from the rIghtshoulder to, the left side. The canteen is slung from the leftshoulder to the right side, the strap passing over that of thehaversack. Both ends of the haversack strap and the rear endof the canteen strap pass under the pistol belt.When the old model canteen and cup are issued the cup is

carried in the near saddle pocket by mounted men and in thehaversack by men not mounted. .To make the blanket roll for men not mounted.-Lay the shel-

ter half on the ground and fold over the triangular part.Hold the blanket up by two corners, the shorter edges vertical;

bring the two corners together, thus folding the blanket In thelUlddle; take the folded corner between the thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, thumb pointing to the left; slip the lefthand down the folded edge two-thirds of Its length and seize it

with the thumb and secoJHI finger; raise the hands to the heightor the shoulder, the blanket extending between them; bring thehands together, the double fold falling outward; pass the foldedcorner from the right hand into the left. hand, between thethumb aI).d forefinger; slip. the second finger ot the right handbetween the folds, seIze the double folded corner; turn the left




(disengaged) corner In, and seize It with the thumb and fore-finger of the rIght hand. the secon(I finger of the rIght handstretchIng and evening the fo1<1s. The blanket Is now foldedin sIx thicknesses.Lay the folded blanket on the shelter half so that. one of ~ts

shorter sides will be ahout 8 inches from the edge of the shelterhalf farthest from the trIangular part. Place the underclothIngon the hlanket. If the sweater is to go In the roll fold it mdplace it on the blanket with the folded edge of the sweater evenwith that of the folded e(ige of the blanket .. Aeross the othershort side of the blanket place the ~helter tent pole and pins.l'~oldover the sI(Ies amI ends of the shelter half whleh lie out-

side of the hlunket, causIng the ropes and straps to be includedwithin the folds.

Commencing at the end where the pole and pIns are placedroll the pack, using the hands and lowes to insure the rollbeIng made as tight as possible. Just before the roll Is com-pleted open out slightly wIth the hands the pocket formed bythe 8-inch fold of the shelter half, and then draw the pocketover the roll, thus binding it. Care should be taken to drawthe canvas over the ends of the roll so as to prevent raIn anddust from entering the inner portion of the roll. The roll thusformed should be about 22 incbes long. .

The roll is secured to the limber chest of the cnrria~e to whichthe sol(lier is assigned, hy means of the straps provided for thepurpose. The rolls carried on anyone limber chest are evenlydisposed on either side of the door lock.: ! It is frequently desirahle, especially in 11 strong Wind, forthe men to work in pairs in mnking their rolls.

Section 6. The Surplus Kit.

The surplus kit contains articles of clothing neeessary Inrnmps of Hevernl weeks' duration and to permit the replace-ment of clothing worn out in active operations. Iror these pur-poses the surplus kits are forwarded to troops when serving InInstruction, maneuver, mobilization, and concentration camps,



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 61,or when in active service temporary suspensions of operation,or other conditions, permit the troops to refit. In certain casesin time of peace the surplus kits may, when transportation 1sa"ailable, accompnny the troops on the march.The surplus kit of ench Irian consists of-

1breeches, pail'. 2 stockings, pairs.1drnwers, pair. 1-shoe laces. extra pair.1shirt, olive-drnb. 1 undershirt.1shoes, russet leather, pair.

The kit of each man will be packed as follows: ,Stockings, rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe;

shoes placed together, heels' at opposite ends, soles outward,wrapped tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied aroundthe middle by the eI:tra pair of shoe laces, each bundle taggedwith the battery number of the owner.The breeches and olive-drab shirt nre not rolled.Surplus kit bags at the rate of one to each eight men or

major fraction thereof are issued to organizations by theQunrtermaster Corps. ,All bags will be uniformly marked in the center of the front

cover flap. Those pertaining to a battery nre marked with thebattery stencil and with the designation of the squad to whichthe bag pertnins; for example, the bag belonging to the driversof the 11r[o;tsection wllI be marked below the stencil, FIRSTSEC., nnd below that, DRIVERS.Bngs pertaining to the hendquarters company and to the sup.

ply company arc marked with the headquarters company andthe supply company stencil and the serial number of the bag.The shoes, underwear, etc., ot each squad ure packed in the

surplus kit bag in two I:l~.ers of four kits each; the breechesnnel olive-drah shirts nre nently folded and packed on the topnnd sIdes of the In~'ers.




Section 7. Assembling Infantry Equipment.1

TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.

WITH RATIONS.

Plnce the assembled equipment on the grouna, suspender sideof haversack <lown, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversackspread out, inside flap and pack carrier ex ten dl-"tl their full

length to the rear.Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haver-

sack body, the lower one on the line of attachment of the insidefiap; lay the remaining cnrton of hard bread, the condimentcan nnd the bucon cun on the top of these, the condiment can

nnd the bacon cnn nt the bottom, top of the hacon can to thefront; the socks nnd toIlet artIcles nre rolled, towel on the out-side, into n bundle of the Slime approximate dimensions as ncartoll of hard bread, and are placed in front of the two rows

thus forme<1.The Inside flap of the haversack Is folded over these articles,

the end of the fiap being turned in so that the flap, thus short-ened, extends about 2 inches heyond the top of the. upper row;the sides of the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows;

the upper binding straps are passed through the loops on theoutside of the inside flap, each strap through the loop oppositethe point of Its attachment to the haversack body, and fastenedby means of the buckle on the opposite side, the strap beingpassed through the opening in the huckle next to Its attach-ment, over the center bar, and bac1\: through tIle opening ofthe buc1de away from its attachment; the strap is pulled tight.to make the fastening secure; the outer finp of the haversack,is folded over and fastened by means of. the lower: haversacl\:

1 Since thf'!lp. fnlltruct!onll wrrp. wrlttp.n 1 drnwcrll and 1 undp.rllhlrthave been IHldrd to the flrld kit. Place them In pack whl'n carrlr<1otherwise In bavrrllark. \Vh"n rllllll\otmted enlllltcrl men of FIeld Artil-lery are equipped with the modd 1910 havcl'HRck, the equlpmrnt will bassembled a8 described above tor Infantry, with necessury modifications.




TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIFMENT.

WITHOUT RATIONS.

Place the assembled equipment on the ground ns heretoforedescribed; fold up the inside Hap of the haversack so that its

end will be on a line .with the top of the haversack body; toluup the lower haversack strap in the same manner.To make up the pack: Fold the poncho, blanket, nnd shelter

half, and make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except thntthe condiment nnd bacon can (the former inside the latter)and the toilet articles and socks are rolled in the pack. In thiscase the pack is rolled, begInnIng on either of the long sidesinstead of the short sides, as heretofore described.. To assemble the pack: Place the pack on the haversnck and

pack cnrrier, its upper end on a llne with the upper edge of thelUlversack body; bInd it to the haversack and carrier by mennsof the haversack nnd pack bInding strops; fold down the outerfinp on the haversack nnd secure it by menns of the free end ofthe middle haversack binding strnp and the buckle provided onthe underside of the finp; engnge the snnp hoops of the packsuspenders In the lower suspensIon rings.The equIpment Is now packed and assembled.To adjust the equipment to the soldier: Put on the equipment,

glipping the arms one at a tIme throngh the pack suspendersas through the sleeves of n coat; by menns of the adjustingbuckles on the belt suspenders raIse or lower ,the belt until itrests well down over the hip bones on the sides and below thepit of the abdomen in front; raise or lower It in rear untll theadjugtIng strap lles smoothly acros~ the small of the back; bymenns of the adjusting buckles on the pack suspenders, raise orlower the load on the back untll the top of the haversack is on

a level with the top of the shoulders, the pack sU!'lpel1ders, fromtheir poInt of attachment to the haversack to the line of tan-gency with the shoulder, being horizontal. The lattcr is abso-lutely essential to thc proper adjustment of the load.The posltlon of the belt is the same whether filled or empty.



66 MANUAL FOR FIELD. ARTILLERY.

opposite side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack bInd.in~ strap through the small buttonhole in the lower ed~e of thehaversack; place the condiment and bacon can (the former in.sIde the latter) and the toilet articles and socks ili the bottomof the pouch thus forme(l; fold the outer finp of the haver.sack

over the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its under-~ide and the lower llUversack binding strap.Pass the haversack suspension ringos through the contlguous

buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack and engage thesnap hooks on the ends of the pack suspenders.To adjust the equipment to the soldier: Put on the equipment

as prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the cartridge beltas prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack sus.penders so that the top of the haversack is on a level with the

top of the shoulders.

'1'0 DISCARD THE FACX WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQtTIFMENTFROM THE BODY.

Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspensIon rings and8nap them Into the e)'elets on top of the belt and in rear orthe rear pockets of the rIght flnd left pocket sections; supportthe bottom of the pack with the left hand and with the right

hand grasp the coupllng strap at Its mIddle and withdraw firstone encl, then the other; press down gently on the pack withboth hands and remove it. When the pack has been removed,lace the coupllng strap into the buttonholes aloI1g the upperedge of the carrIer. Adjust the pael\: suspenders.




In addition to the foregoing, command.ers will requireenchman on the march to carry the unconsumcll portion of the day'sratton issued the night before for the lloond.uy meal. Heserve

rations nre consumed only in case of extreme necessity, whenother supplies are not available. They nre not to be consumed. ,or renewed without an express order from the officer in com-mand of the troops who is responsible for the provision of sup-plies, namely, the division command.er or other independent-detachment command.er. Every otllcer within the limits of hiscommand Is held responsllJle for the enforcement of thIs regula-tion. Ueserve rations consumed. must IJe n'placed. at the first

opportunity.

Section 2. Individual Cooking.

Sometimes rations for several d.ays are issued. to the soldierat one time, nnd. in such caSl~S~'ou shoulu be very careful to souse the rations that they will last ~'ou the entire period. If

you sturt ~'ourself one day, or waste your rations, you will have

to starve later on.Generally the cooking for the company will be uone by the

company cook, but somctiml>s every soillier will have to prepl1.rehis own meals, using only his field mess kit for the purpose.The best tire for inllividual cooking is a small, clear one, or,

better yet, a few br[sk coals. To mnke such n fire, first gathern number ot sticks ulJout 1 Inch in lliumeter. r.rhese shoulll IJe<1ry. Dead limbs nllhering to n tret1 nre dryer tlulll those pickedup from the grounu. Split some of these and shave them upinto kindling. Dig a trench In the grouml, luiu with the wind.

about n foot long, 4 inches wille, andG

inches deep. Start tilefire in this trench gradually, piling 011 the heavlel' wood a~ tilefire ~ows. When the trench is full of burning wood, ullowit a few minutes to burn UOWIl to coals and stop bla.zln:: high.Then rest the ment cun and cup over the trench and startcookinl:. Either lUU~' be supported, If llecessur~', wIth grC(,l1sUck<J. It you cun not scrupe n trench in the solI, bullu oneup out of rocks or with two parulle1 lo~s.The following recipe8 haw been fnrnished from the office of

the Quartermaster General, Unitl'd ~tates Army:




Oojjee.-Fill the cup two-thirds full of water and bringto' n boil. Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well,adding one spoonful of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes Rndthen set it to the side of the fire to simmer for about 10

minutes. Then, to clear the coffee, throw in a spoonful or twoof cold water. This coffee is of medium strength and Is withinthe limit of the ration if made but twice a day.Cocoa.-Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil"

add one benping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved.,Add one spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes.

Ohocolate.-Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring toa boil, 'add n piece of chocolate about the size of a hickory nut,.breaking or cutting it into small pieces and stirring until dis-.

solved. Add one spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for fiveminutes.Tea.-Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil,

add one-half of a level spoonful of tea, and then let it stan(lor "draw" for three minutes. If allowed to stand longer thetea will get bitter, unless separated from the tea leaves.

:MEATS.

l1acon.-Cut slices about five to the Inch, three of whichshould generally be sufliclent for one man for one meal. PlaceIn a meat can with about one-half inch of cold water. Letcome to a boil and then pour the water off.. Fry over n briskfire, turning the bacon once and quickly browning it. Hemovethe bacon to lid of meat can, leaving the grease for fryingllotntoes, onions, rice, llapjacks, etc., according to recipe. .

Fresh meat. (to fry).-'1'0 fr~', a small amount of grease (oneto two spoonfuls) is necessary. Put grease in the meat canand let come to a smoking temperature, then drop in the steakan<1,if about one-half inch thick, let fry for about one minutebefore turning, depen<1ing upon whether it Is desired it shallbe rare, medium, or well <1one. Then turn and fry briskly asbefore. Sal t anll pepper to taste. .Applies to beef, yeal, pork, mutton, venison, etc. .

• Fresh meat (to bro11).-o\1t in slices about one inch thick,nom half as large ajl the hund to four times that size. Sharpena stick or branch of convenient length-say, from two to four




or simmer for 15 or 20 minutes. They are done when easilypenetrated with a sharI) stick. Pour off the water and letdry out for one or two minutes over hot ashes or light coals.

Potatoe8 (baked).-Take two medh)m-sized potatoes (aboutone-half pound) or one large one cut in half. Lay in a bed

of light coals nnd cover With sume and smother with ashes.Do not disturb for 30 or 40 minutes, when they should be done.

Oanned tOl1latoe8.-0ne 2-pound can is generally sufficient forfive men.

Stew.-Pour into the meat can one man's allowance of toma-toes and add about two larg-e hardtacks broken into small piecesand let come to n boll. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add at>inch of salt and one-fourth spoonful of sugar.

Or, haVing fried the bacon, pour the tomatoes Into the meat

can, tIle grease remaining, and add, if desired. two brokenhartltncks. Set over a brisk fire and let come to n boll. .

Or, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, addingwo pinches of snIt and one-half spoonful of suga 1', if desired.

Or, eSIlcclnlly In hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread, theyre very palntable.

Rice.~'l'ake ahout two-thirds of a cupfUl of water, bring to noll, add 4 henping spoonfuls of riel', IInd boil until the grainsre soft enough to he enslly lllnshed between the fing-ers (about0 minutes). Adtl two pinches of salt und, after stirring', pourir the water and empty rice out on meat can. Bacon grease orugar may be added.

Oorn meal, fine hominll, oatmcal.-Take about one-third of aUpful of water, bring to a boll, add 4 heaping sp()onful~ of thenenl or hominy, and boll about 20 minutes. Then add aboutwo pinch"s of salt nnd stir well.

Dried beaus and 1)(W.~.-Put 4 heapin~ f'poonfuls in ahout

wo-thirds of a cupful of water and boil until soft. Thisenernlly takes from t1lre(~ to four hours. Add one pinch ofnIt. About half nn llOur before the beans are done add onelice of bacon.

nOT DREADS •

.' Il'lapjacks.-Take 6 spoonfuls of flour an(] one-third srX>onfulf baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large panefore ls~;u(',ut the rate of 25 pounds of flour nnd 3 half cans ot




baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to maken batter that will drip freely from the r-;poon,nlMing a pinch ofsalt. Pour into the meat cnu, which shoulll contain the greasefrom fried bacon or a spoouful of butter or fnt, null place overmedium hot coals suftkient to bake, so that in from 5 to 7

minutes the flapjack may be turned by a quick toss of the pan.Fry trom 5 to 7 mInutes longer, or until by examination it Isfound to be done.Hoecake.-Hoecake is made exactly the same as flapjacks

by substituting corn meal for flouT.EmcrgenclI rations.-Detnlled instructions as to the manner

of preparing the emergency ration are found on the label ofeach can. Uemember that even a very limltell amount of bnconor hard bread, or both, consumeU with the emergency' rationmakes It far lnore palatable, and generull~' extelllls the periodduring whIch It can be consumed with relish. 1"01' this reasonit would be better to husbanll the supply of harll breall andbacon for use wIth the emergency ratIon when it becomesevident that the latter must be consumed rather than to retaInthe emergency ration to the last extremity and force its ex:-clusive use for a longer period than two or three days.

Section 3. The Forage Ration.

"1071, Army Regulations.-The forage ration for a horse Is14 pounds of hay and 12 pounlIs of oats, corn, or barley, and 3&pounds of straw (or hay) for beddIng; for n If'iald Artilleryhorse of the heavy-draft t~'pe, weighing 1.300 ponnds or over,17 pounds of hay and 14 pounds of olltS, corn, or burley, and 3!pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding; for II mule. 14 poundsof hay and 9 pound~ of onts, ('orn, or barley, Hnd 3~ poundr; of

8tmw (or hay) for bedding. To each animal 3 pounds of branmny be Issued In lieu of that quantity of gornin... The commnndln~ otlicer' may, In his discretiou, Yl1r~' the pro-

portions of the components of the ration (1 POl\llll of gruill, 11pounds of hay, and 2 pounds of straw being tnken ns equiva-lents), nnd in the field may substitute other recognized articlesot fornge obtnined locally, the varIation or the substitution notto exceed the mone:r "ulne of the components of the ration atthe contract rates In effect at the time of change.




"1078, Army Rcgulations.-Where grazing is practicable, orWhen little work is required of the animals, commanding officerswill reduce the foruge ration. When, on the other hand, condi-tions demand it, they are authorized to increase the ration, notin excess, however, of savings made."

In the field the authorized allowances must often be reducedand supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such asgreen forage, beans, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. "'heatand r~'e shoultl be crushed and fed sparingly (about one-fourthof the allowance). For unshelled corn, add about one-quarterWeight.

On the march the grain ration'is the onlJ' forage carried. ItConsists of 12 pounus of grain for each horse and 9 pounus ofgrain for each mule.' Hecourse must be had to grazing if it isnot possible to procure long forage in the country traversed.In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equip-

tnent the following forage:

(a) ~'Ol" each draft animal: On each vehicle a re8erve of oneay's grain ration for its draft animals.

(b) On animals and vehldes: A portion of their grain ra-ion issued the night before, for a noonday feed. .

(c) In the ration section of the field train, for each animal,wo days' groin rations.

(d) In supply. train of an Infantry diVision two days' graInations, and of n Cavalry division one day's grain ration.



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. GtS

(c) Taking certain germs in through the mouth in eating ordrInking. Ds'sentery, cholera, ts'phoid fever, diarrhea, and in-testinal worms may be caught in this manner.

(d) 'Having certain germs injected into the body by the bitesof insects, such as mosquitoes, fleas, and bedbugs. Malaria,yellow fever, dengue fever, and bubo hie plague mu~' be caught

In this way.(c) Inheriting the ~erm from one's parents.Persons may have these germs sometimes without apparently

being sick with any disease. Such persons and persons who nresick with the diseases are a great source of danger to othersabout them. Germs which multiply in such l)ersons nre foundin their urine and excretions from the bowels; in (llschargesfrom ulcers and abscesses; in the spit or particles coughed orsneezed into the air; in the perspirn tlon or scales from the

skin; and in the blood sucked up by biting insects.Those who have taken cnre of their health and who llUve not

become weakened by bad habits, exposure, and fatigue are notonly less Hable to catch disease, but are more apt to recoverwhen taken sick.

Knowing all these things, the soldier can understanll the rea-sons for the following rules and how important it is that theyshould be carried out by each and ever~r person:Stay away from persons having" catching" diseases.If ~'ou have any disease, don't try to cure it ~'oUl'selt, but go

to the surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise.TS'plloid fever is one of the most dangerous llnd COIllmoncamp

diseases. Modern medicine has, however, di:":covered nn etrec-tive preventative for this disease in the typhoid prophylactic,which renders the person immune from typhoid feyer. 'I'hetreatment COlIslfo;tsn injecting into the arm n preventativeS(>l'um. '1'he injection Iii glyen three times nt 10-llny internlls.

'.As<;oc!atioll with lewd women is dall~CI'Ou8.It mil)"

resultin disabling you for life. It is the cause of a disease (sn lhil1s)which may be transmitted by a parent to his children. Soldierswith venereal dlsenses should not use basins or toilet articlesused by others, as the germs of these diseas('s If gotten into the~'e very often cause blindness. Likewise, if they use the snmerinking cup used by others they 1110Y give others the disease.

105281.~VOL.1--17----3




They should pr~mptly report their trouble to the surgeon, thatthey may recehe the best medical advice and attentiDn. ",'Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having inter-

course with an unknown woman, he should report as ,soon' aspossible afterwards to the regimental infirmary. for prophy-

lactic treatment, whleh, if taken .within n few,' hours afterintercourse, w111 prevent to a large degree the, liability ,ofcontracting any disease. ,Cooked germs are dead and therefore harmless. 'Water,

even when clear, may be alIve with deadly germs. Therefore,when the conditIons are such that the commanding ofilcerorders all drinking water to be boiled, be careful to live up tothIs order. .Use the latrInes Hnd don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself.

In open latrInes cover :)'our deposit 'withdirt, as it breeds fliesand may also be full of germs. .FIles carry germs from one place to another, Therefore .see

that your food and mess kit fire protected from them.,' .All slops and scraps of food scnttered about camp SOo11

produce bad odors amI dl'aw 1lles. 'Therefore do ~'our parttoward keeping the camp free from disease by carefully de-positing such refuse In the pits or cans used for this purpose.Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cnns set out for this

purpose, never on the groun<l around camp, because it not onlycau~e~ bad smells but urine sometimes contains the germs ofU catching" diseases. I ;

Soapy water thrown on the ground soon produces bad odors.Therefore In cumps of several days' durntion this water shouldbe thrown in coyered plts or In cans used for this pUfl1ose. : ..As certain mo!'quitoes can transmit malaria and yellow fever,

use your mosquito bar for this reason as well as for personal

comfort.Keep ~'our mouth clenn by brushlng your teeth once or twicen (13)'. It helps to prevent the teeth from decnying. Decayedteeth cause toothnche. 'l'hey IlIRO lead one to swallow foodwithout properly chewing It. nnd this leads to stomach troublesof various kinds. l"ood left around and between the teeth isbn~ for the teeth nnd forms J{oo<1breeding plnces for germs.

Keep the skin clean. Throug-h the pores of the sltln the bodygels rid of mueh wnsle nnd [l<JIsonousmnller. Therefore re-

"




move this and keep the pores open by bathing.once every day,if possible: If water is scarce, rub the body over \\i.t:l a wettowel. If no \vater is at hand, take a dry fub. Wash care-fUlly the armpits, between the legs, and under the foreskin,as this wlll prevent chating. .The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from injury

and helps to keep out germs. Therefore when blisters areformed don't tear off the skIn. Insert a needle under the skIna little dIstance bacl.: from the blister and push It through tothe opposIte side. Press out the liquid through the holes thusformed. Heat the needle red hot first, with a match or candle,to klll the germs.When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the open-

ing covered with a bandage to kc('p out germs and dirt; other-WIse the sore may fester. Pus Is always caused by germs.Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard In the

field generally means a dIrty head and a dirty face and favorsskin diseases, lIce, and dandruff.Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very

Often 1s the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonia,rheumatism, and other diseases.Wet clothes may be worn while marching or exercising with.

out bad results, but thero is great danger if one rests in wet

clothing, as the body mny become chilled.Don't sit or lIe or sleep directly on damp ground, as this IsSure to chill the body.When hot or per~piring or when wearing damp clothes, don't

remain where a breeze can strIke you. You are sure to be-COme chilled.Every day, if possible, hang your blanket and clothing out to

nil- In the sun; shake or bent them with a small sUck. Germsnnd v('rmin don't like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing

suits them very well. Wush your shirts, underwear, anll socksfrequently. The dan~er of blood poisoning from a wound Isgreatly increased if the bullet passes through dirty clothes.Ditch your tent n~ soon as you can, particularly. a shelter

tent, even it you camp for one night only. OtherwIse a HttleraIn may ruIn a whole nIght's rest., Always prepare your bed betora dark. Level of! the groundand scrape out a lIttle hollow for your hips. Get some straw




or dry grass if possible. Green grass or brunches from treesare better than noth1n~. Sleep on your poncho. This keepsthe dampness from comin~ up from the ground and chilling thebody. Every minute spent in making a good bed means aboutan hour's good rest later on. 1

Avoid the food and drinl\: found for sale in the cheap standsabout camp. The quality Is generally bad, and it is often pre-pared in filthy plnces hy very dirty persons. ., I The use of intoxIcntlng liquor is partlculnrly <1nngerous Inthe field. Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks downone's sy~tem. Drinking men are 1110reupt to get sick and lessliable to get well than are their more soher comrades. If

alcohol Is tal~en at fill, It is hest nfter the work of the duy is

over. It should never he taken wh(>n the hody is exposed tosevere cold, as it diminishes the r0.slstnnce of the houy. lIottea or coffee is much prefernble under these ch'cumstnnces.

Care of the Feet.I •

A soldier can not march with sore feet, and mnrchin~ is themain part of an Infantr~'man's dnily duty' in the field. 'Ansoldiers should be fnm1llnr with the proper methods of cnring

for the feet. Sore feet fire ~wn(,l'lllly (lue to cnrelessness, neg-lect, or Ignorance on the part of the soldier. .The most important factor in the cnrc of the feet and the

marching nbllity of the soldier Is the ,shoe. Civilian 'shoes,pnrtlcularly light, pntent lenther, or low shoes, are 'Rure toCfiU8e injury and In time will ruin n man's foot. Only themarching shoe issu('u by the Quartermnst<'r Corps should heworn, nnd the~' must be properly tltted to tho Infllvldual. , Itwill not suffice to order n marchin~ shoe of the same Rize asone's ordlnnr~' clylllan shoes, for it mllst be rem0.mbcred that nsoldier mny hnve to march man~r miles daily over rough ronds:.n<1 cnrr)'ing a heavy pack. The pack It~elt cnuses the foot tospread out to a largel' sIze, nnd the rough roads give so muchexerct~e to the muscles of the feet that they swellgrentlythrough the Increased hloo<l supply. (For dIrections fiS' tomeastirin~ the foot for tlw marching shoe SC(l General' 'Orde~~o. ~G, War Department, l!>l2, a copy of which should be on

hnnd in each company.) , ", . ,

•

'




,Do not start out on n march wearing new shoes. This is nfre('juPllt cnuse of sore feet. Kew shoes should be Ilrollerlybroken in beforp be,c;inning n march by wearing them forseveral hours daily for n weelt before the march, and theyshould be adapted to the contonrs of the feet by stretching them

with shoe stretchers with adjustable knobs to take the pres-sure off painful corns nnd bunions. Such stretchers are issuedby the Quartermaster Corps, and there should be one or morepnir in every company of inf:lIlt,IT. Should this be impracti-cable, then t.he following is suggested:The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 2!. inches of

water for about five minut('s until the leather is thoroughly,Nlable and moist; he should then wall{ for about an hour ona level surface, letting thp. 8hoes dr~r on his feet, to the irregu-

larities of which the leather is thus molded in the same wayas it wns T1revJously molder! over the shoe last. On takIngthe shoes otr n Y('ry lIttle neat's-foot oil should be rubbed intothe lOllthoI' to prevent its hnrdening nnd crncking.If it is desired to wnterproof shoes at any time, n considerable

nmount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather.'Vaterproof h~athE'r caupes the feet of some men to perspireUnduly a:1<1},eeps them constantly soft.Light woolen 01' heavy woolen socks wIll habitually be worn

for marching. CottOIl socks wIll not be worn lI:lless r-pecificnllyordered by the surgeon. The socks wIll he large enough to per.JnIt free movezncnt of the toes, but not so loose ns to permit ofWrinklfn~. Darned socks, or socl{s wIth holes in them, wIll notbe worn in marching.Unt11 the feet hnve hardened they should be dusted with foot

POWder, which can be obtaIned at the regimental fnfirmar:r,oefore each duy's march. Clean socks should be worn <lail~..As soon IlS possihle after reaching camp aft0r a day of march.

In~ the feet shoulll be wfishell with r-;oal) find wfiter, and the'floldlel' should put on ndry pall' of so('ks and his extra p:llr of~hoes fl:om his surplus kit. If the skin is telHlcr, or the fpctPerspire, wnsh with wnrm salt water or alum wllter, but <10 lIotBoak the feet a long time. as this, although wry comforting atthe time, tends to keep them soft. Should hlIsters appear onthe feet, prick nnd evacuate them by pricking at the lower edgeWith n pin which hns been passed through the 11:1meof n mntch




and cover them with zInc oxIde plaster npplied hot. Thisplaster can be obtained on request at the regimental Infirmary.If serIous nbrnsions appear on the feet, or corns, bunIons, andingrowIng nulls cnuse trouble, have your nnme placed on sickreport and apply to the surg-eon for treatment. Cut the toenails square (fairly close in the mIddle, but leavIng the sides

somewhnt longer), as this prevents ingrowing naUs.



CHAPTER v.EXTRACTS FROM:PROVISIONAL DRILL AND SERVICE

REGULATIONS FOR FIELD ARTILLERY (HORSEAND LIGHT), 1916.

[Paragraph numbers rcfcr to Drill and Service HcO"uJatlons for FIcldArtillcry. ]

Section 1. Definitions.

58. Alignment: A straight line upon which sewral men,teams, cnrringe!=l, or ,hodies of troops are forme<l or nre to beformed; or tho formntion of :::uch line; or the drc!=lsingof 8('Ycrale]('m('nt~ upon n stTnlght lin(\.'

Base: '1'h(' (']enwnt on \\"hkh n moYement i~ rl'gnlntl'(l or onwhich n formation is 111:1(1('.Center: The mill(]le point or elt"ll}(>ntof n eoll1m:llHl.

Column: A formntion in \\"hi('h the plem('nts are placed oneb(\hlnd nnother.Conduct of fire: The emplo~'ll1ent of the technicnl means lleces-

ROry to cnU!=lefire of the (1esir('l} nature to be brou;ht to b('nr11]XlI1 the tnrget.Depth: The f:pnce from head to rear of nny formation, includ-

ing the ]E'nding nnd re:11' (\]ements. 'I.'he (]('pth of n m<lll dis-1110l1llt(\(ls 12 Inches.Dhposition: Th(\ nrrllllgpment of the elements In n forlll:ltion.Distance: Open SlIlH'P between elements in the dire('tlon of

depth. .

Element: One of the eomponent pnrts of n larger unit-ns nfilE', gun squad, t('nm, cnJ'l'lage, section, platooll, bntter~', etc.Facing distance: About 14 l11ehes, 1. e., the difference between

71

-




the front of a man in ranks, including his interval, and hisdepth.File: Two men-the front-rank man and the correspondin~

man o~ the rear rank. The front-rank mnn is the :file leader ...\. file which has no rt'ar-rank man is a blank file. '.rhe term

files applies also to individual men in sing-Ie-rank formation.A sin:;le mounted man in ranks iR also called a me.File closers: The men who, in <Usmounteu formations, are

posted 2 ~'nr<ls in renr of the renr runk in line.Fire direction: The tactical direction of 011e or more fire units

with a view of bringing their flre to bear at the right place atthe right time.Fire discipline: That condition resultln~ from training and

practice which Insures un orderly und cfIidcnt working of the

personnel in the delivery of fire.Flank: The ri~ht or left of a COI1llllnI1l1 in line or column;also the clement on the right or left of n line.Hy the enemy's right (left) llank is meunt the flunk which the

enemy himself woulll so designate.Formation: Arran~ement of the elements of a command in

their order in line, in column, or for battle.Front: The spuce in width oecupie(l hy an element either in

line or column. The term front denotes tlw direction of the

enemy. The front of n man dlsmounte(l is 2~ inches.The front of a gun unlimbered is the din'etlon in which themuzzle points; of n limber or of u carriage limbered, the direc-tion in which the pole points.Guide: An oflicer, nOlH'ommissloned of!icC', or vrivate upon

whom n command or an eleuwnt thereof regulates its march.Head: The le:u!ing ('lement of a column, in whatever direction

the column iR facin~.Interval: Open f;pace 1>0twC'('nC'$'mcnts nhl'C'llst of each other.

Laying: The PI'O(,(,SS of pol n ti ng- a gu n for range fUHI tHrec-tlons. so fiS to cause the trajectory to pass through the target.Left: The left extremIty or element of a body of troops.Line: A formatloll In which the different elements are abreast

of eaeh other. Whell the elements arc in c$lumn the formationIs ('alled a line of columns.Maneuver: A lIlovenwnt ('xe('ut('(l hy 11 battery or largt'r unit

1'01' the purpose of changing from one fonnatlon to another.

________




Pace: Thirty inches; the length of the full step In quick time.Rank: A line of men, horses, teams, or carriages abreast of

eaeh other. • :lUg;ht: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.Salvo: A single discharge from each of the guns of n buttery

or other unit fired in regular order from. one flank to the other,with intervals of about two seconds .. Tail: The renr element of n column, in whatever directionthe column is facing.Volley: The rapid dischnrge of a. certain indicnted number of

rounds, b~rench gun of a battery or other unit, each gun firingWithout regard to the others.

Section 2. General

OnJECT OF THE INSTRUCTION.

1. The reason for the existence of Field Artiller~' is its abilityto nssist the other arms, especially the Infantry, upon the fieldof battle.The (legree to which the Field Artillery prepares itself to

render this assh,;tullce is, then, the measure of its training. Norefinements of drlll-ground instructions or other minor detalls:must be allowed to obscure this definit~ object or to impede

progress toward its attainment .. 2. ~'o enable it to render effective assistance upon the buttle-field artillery must be able, first, to march rnpidly and in goodorder and to establish itself, promptly and without confusion,in such positions as wlll bestutillze the llvailable te~rain;second, to deliver an eft'ectlve and overpowering fire upon any<1esignated part of the enem~"s position.~'hol'ol1gh training In. marching, camping, reconnaissance nnd

CommunicatIon service, 11re dIscipline, conduct of fire and fire<1Ireetion, carried out over varied country, h essential to theattainment of these qualifications. .3. An additional object of instruction is to develop resource-

fUlness, initiative, and self-reliance on the part of 11eldartillery-:men of all grades. .4. These regulations pref;criue n. method of trainIng in the

ordinary duties pertaining to the service of Field Artlllel'r .. ~'hePersonnel must ue so thoroughly drllled that In the excltement

r



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

f a~tion the duties will be performed as a matter of second

The regulations also outline general principles according tohich Field Artillery is' to be hnntlletl antl fought. A guiue ishus furnished as to the best way of (lel111ngwith the usual prob-

ems which arise. But .every problem which arises in servicehas Its own best solution, and thi~ solution must be evolvedy the o1lieer on the spot. His success wIll depond upon the ex-ent to wl:kh he hns pn'pnre<1 himself by previom~ thOllg-htan(l stmly awl b~' previous pructice In the ~olutIon of slmllnr

problems.5. Instruction in pence must therefore be conuucted with n

view, 1irst, of drillin~ the personnel thoroughly in their habitualduties; 8ecoo<l, of affording- omcers nnll' men practice amI ex-

perience in dealing with the situations HIlII tlitllcultIes apt toarise in campaign.

SEQl"EXCE AND ~mTIIoDS OF INSTItUCTION.

8. A progT(>sslve ord('l' will he followed in all Field Artilleryinstruction. The annulli course of instruction should commencewith the smallest unit and procped to the !tn'ger ones in suc-cession, culminating in the field maneuvers.9. The efliciency of nn instructor is n)('a8\11'8<1not only by

his knowledge of his subject hut hy his ability to holll the atten-tion of those whom he 1~ ('ndenvoring to instruct. When theDl('n lose Int('rest nnd their attention wfindel's, contlnuntlon ofthe <:>x('rc!seis usel<:>Hs. lIence, short and fl'l'quent drllls orebetter than 10n~ ones, and effort must be mntle so to vary theext>rds('s as to aYoiu monotony.10. 'rho instructor will nlwa~'s mnintnin n military heuring

nnd, h~' a quiet, firlll tl(.'111('nnor,8et n prover example to the men.!.'nultli shoul<l he corr('('ted grndulllly, without nagging or

shouting.12. Thorough training of the individual soldier is the basis of

efficiency. Great precision and attention to detail are essentialin this instruction in order that the soldier may acquire thathabit of implicit obedience to orders and of accurate perform-ance of his individual duties which is indispensable in combined

training.



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY~

. f dutyappointment as corporals and of corporals to fit them or iOOas 'sergcants. 'In each battery a special course of instr~~t bewill be given by one ()f the lieutenants. This course WI oedconsidered the equivalent of the course in the noncommlsslO .officers' school. '. ted21. 'rhe corllornls and privates selected wIll be Instl ueder

nceordln!: to a schedule submitted by each battery comman lornnd approved uJ' the re~imental comman<.ler or by the senPh-hI Al'tiller;r of!icC'l'present with the command. Or"

22. TIw ('O\ll'S<.' for' both selected privates nnt! selected CiOnporals should i:}ciu<1esuch subjects as: Dismounted instruct

dSto inclm1e ull of Part II-Swimming; Drill in firing comman all:The cannoneer; Care of materiel; .Equitation; Care and FrY"

agement of horses; The <11'iver; Care of harness' and sad<1 e iO~Custrametation ;' First ai<1; Personal h~'giene; Care of coUb.alSand t><}uipment. In a<1<.1ition,the Course for selected corpO\be

will include such subjects as: Duties of chiefs of secti0t,l op ioemarch; in camp; in the firing battery; with respect to dlSClpl,

and property responsibility.

TRAINIXG AXD IXSPECTION OF RECltUITS.

23. All instruction of recruits will be by battery. When d~:Is possiule to do so, recruits will be assigne<1 to batteries in. tacllments of not less than 30 men. del'

24. Every phase of the instruction of recruits will be ugtlV'ethe immediate supervision of an officer. After the recruits tbebeen 1111<lernstruction a sufficient length of time to enabletbeYbattery commander to form an idea as to their cnpabilitY driV'~will he temporarily divided into classes of cannoneers lln<1 opders. This division will be made permanent prior to the sec,,,n

1inspection. In mnking this <1ivision the battery commander bill~eOllsider the rCCluirements of the service as ,vell ns the capnties of the Individual men. . will25. Except in active operations or emergencies, recruit~i(l'ue,

not be placed on rosters for daily duties such as guard, fn t topolice, etc., until they are qualified for permanent assignwenwillduties in the sections. But such duties as guard, police, etc." .be made SUbjects of instruction.

'



78MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

11. Shelter-tent Pitching. , ,

12. IndIvIdual Instruction as cannoneers, to include sufficientInstruction to enable them to QUll.l1fyas second-clmls gunners.13. Dr1ll of the gun squads in all the exercises preliminary to

the servIce of the piece, to include the execution of each move-ment described.14. Care of horses: ,

(a) Questions on the general rules and principles of feed-ing, waterIng, care, and grooming of horses .

. (b) Grooming by detail of one horse by each recruit.15. Equitation, to InclUde the" Soldier mounted."1G. Care of l(~at'her equipment as demonstrated by actually

cleaning a saddle and brIdle.

17. Fitting a saddle and bridle to a horse. .

29. The second. inspection wlll be held not less than fivemonths nor more than six months after the recruits have joinedthe battery, on a date to be designated by the regimental com-mander or senior Artillery officer present with the command, andwlll inch:de:

(A) FOR ALL RECRUITS.

1. Dismounted inspection under arms.

2. SettIng-up exercIses, to InclUde all exercises descrIbed in

the Manual of Physical Training.3. Customs and courtesies of the service.

4. Dismounted drill, to inclUde the execution of each move-ment descrIbed for the squad and for the battery dIsmounted.5. Guard dut:r, to determine Whether the recruit understandshis duties as a sentinel.

G. FIrst nld; lIyglene; Care of the person.

7. Care and use of the pistOl, to inclUde the firing of twoScores, slow fire, at 2;) yards.

8. Pitching, striking, and packing battery tentage.O. Inspection of clothing and l'quipment.

10. IndIvIdual COokIng, to inclUde the preparation of coffee,bacon, and potatoes.

(8) FOR CANNONEERs ONLY.

1. Care, cleaning, nnd nomenclature of materiel.2. ItollIng cannoneer's rolls and packIng them for transpor-ation.

'




3. Elementary gunnery, to include determining whether therecruits thoroughly understand the prinicples, mechanisms,ethods o~fire, etc.,. given in firing instruction.4. One battery problem involving the fire of service ammuni-

tion by gun squads the principal positions in which are filled

by the recruits. If ammunition be not available, or if firing beimpracticable, this subject ,vill be replaced by drill in simulated

5. Individual instruction as cannoneers. to include sufficientinstruction to enable ~hem to quuUf~' as first-class gunners.

(C) FOl~ DRIVERS ONLY •1

1. Nomenclature, cleaning, and fitting of harness.2. Harnessing and unharnessing. .

, 3. Rolling driver's rolls and pucking equipment on the saddle.4. Handling a single pair at the walk and trot in turns andabout; increusing the gait;. decreasing the gait; halts; andmovements to the front from the baIt.5. Handling a pair in a team hitched, to include the (>xecutlon

at the walk and trot of all movements described in the" Battery

mounted.". 6. Questions on the care of horses on the march and in camp,with especial reference to shoulders and backs, feeding and

Watering. .30. If. the. results of either of these inspections are unsatis-

factory, the inspecting officer will require a further period oftrain~ng at the termination of which another inspection will be

held.MISCELLANEOUS TRAINING.

31. 'Vhile first place must be giYen to purely Artillery in-struction, the personnel must also he thOl'oughly trained in nll

other duties ,,-hich may be required of Field Artillery. Amongthe l110st important are' those incident to the march and thecnmp. In beginning training In these duties it should be bornein mind that the principal object Is instruction, not distancemarched, The (>arlier l11urehes should, therefore, be very.shortin order that the personnel may be In condition to profit byinstruction In the care of anln1:118and materiel, establlshin~cump, Imlividual cooking, etc. Similarly, instruction in each ofthe severul subjects should be deliberate in the beginning.

•

' "




ainstaking instruction until the men thoroughly understandhat they are to do an<1are accurate in doing it is the only safeundation upon which to develop speed, which then becomes aatter of practice.

Section 3. General Rules for Formations.

DISMOUNTED INSTRUCTION.

57. I-'ormations are habitually in <1oublerank; tIle men alwaysll in at nttention.

58. The interval between men in ranks is 4 inches and be-een ranks In finnl\: column Is 30 Inches, measured from elbow

eluow. The dlstnnce between ranks is 40 Inches, measuredom the buck of the man In front to the breast of the man in

The fl'ont of a mun Is assumed to be 22 inches, or, includinge int~I'Ynl, 2G inches; hIs depth, about 12 inches.59. To f;('cure uniformity of Interyul between flles when fall-~ In nnd In the alI~nments, each man places the palm of theft hanll upon the hIp, fingers PoInting downward. thumb toe front. In falling in, the hand Is dropped by the side as

oon as tbe lUan next on the left has his interyal; In the align-l('nt8, at the command front.'

60. enless otherWise announced, the guide of a battery orhdlyIslon of a hatter~' in line is right.

In succ('ssIve formations into line, the guide Is toward theoint of l'('st.

To JlHl.r<.'11ith the guide other than as prescribed above, or<'llll.ll~e till' gUllle: Guide right (left).

Tlw nllllc)llUeCllwlltof the gUide, When given in connection with

1I10\"('III('lIt,follows the command of execution for that move-

61. \\"h011 mnr('hlng by the finnk from line, the leading manf the f,'ont rnnk is, without indication the O'uide of the column.I>urln~ the obllque march the leadIng man'='of the leading rank, withullt Indication. the guide.

Wh~fl, l1lm'chlnl; in line, the front-rank man on the designatedank ili tlll~ gUide.



, MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

:MOUNTED INSTRUCTION.

81

33. Movements that may be executed toward either flankre explained as toward but one flank, It being necessary toUbstitute left for right, or the reverse, to have the command

lnd explanation of the corresponding movement tm....rd thether flank., 34. Any 1l10Yement may be executed either from the hult orhen marching. unless othen ....se prescribed.35. If the mOYemcnt on foot be from the halt, or \yllen march.g in quick time, the command double time precedes the com-and march; if marching in double time, the command double

ime is omitted .36. All. mounted mo ....ments not specially excepted may be

xecuted at the trot or gallop. The gallop is an exceptional gaitor light art1llery and should be used only for short distm,lces.37. The gait should habitually be increased or <1ecreasedrogressively, the trot being executed from the walk and theallop from the trot. If marching at the gallop the gait will beecreased to the trot, then to the walk, before halting; if march-g at the trot, the same rule applies.38. To execute a movement at the trot or gallop, the com-and trot or gallop precedes the command march, unless march.g at the gait desiro<1. •39. Movements or procedures explained for the smaller unitsre, in general, applicable to the larger ones when under in-truction of the same character, the commands being modifiedas to be adapted to the particular unit.40. The intervals and distances prescribed in the text are ineneral such, that, if marche<1 by the flanl\: from line, the ele-ents w111be in column at proper distances; or if marched by

e flanl\:'from column, they \vill be in line at proper intervals.imllarly, if marching obliqnely, a second oblique will place thelements in line or column, as the case may be, at proper inter-1fils or distances. If, however, (lue to differences of length oflements, these conditions do not accurately obtain, the propertervals or distances are gradually sec,ured by appropriateodificat1ons of the gflit.

'



8~:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

41. If, in forming eleme~ts abreast of each other, th.e c~~n;mands: 1. Battery (Platoon, etc.), 2. HALT, be given durmg .\movement, only those elements halt which have reached the~new positions; the others continue the march and halt on reac •ing their positions. .

42. For the purpose of correcting errors while marching, 1t~~instructor may command: 1. In place, 2. HALT; when alland stand fast. To resume the march, he commands: 1. e-sume, 2. MAR CR.

43. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt,to begin anew a movement improperly begun, the instructorcommands: AS YOU WERE, at which the movement ceasesaudthe fOl'Dwr position is resumed.

U. If a change of formation requires a change of post ofoffIcers and noncommissioned officers, they proceed by .theShortest routes to their posts in the new formation.

45. While the posts of officers and noncommissioned officersnre ~peclfied in the text, DS instructors they go whereYe~ theirpresence is llecessury.

46. Officers and noncommissioned officers commanding or-~aniz:ltlons or Hub<.liYisionsthereof, When absent, are ordinarilY

l'elll:l<:~d by the next in rank in their orO"anization or sub-(}ivision.

47. I<'or administrative purposes each unit of }i'ield Artilleryhas its J>ermanent designation, thus: . .

The I"Irst, Second, Third, Fourth, etc., Regiment of FieldArtll1el'~' ; . .

The Plrst Battalion, Fifth Regiment of Field Artillery;l~l\ttery D, Sixth FIeld Artillery; ".

1,he first, sec(Jild, third, etc., platoon of a battery; .l.he tjl'st, second, third, fourth, etc., section of a battery.}o or Purposes ot drill and maneuver, units will be desIgnate~

by their tempOrary relative POsition in line or column, thus:'l'hf> right batter~ .. left battalion.The lending platoon, center batt~ry.'I'he left section, right platoon. •

~

'"




The permanent numerical designation of units does not changes their relative order in line or column is changed, with theollowing exception:After the pieces of a battery are unlimpered and established

n line, they are designated from right to left as first piece,

econd piece, third piece, and fourth piece, or No.1, NO'.2, No. 3,nd No.4.

Section 4. Orders, Commands, and Signals.

onDERS.

In these regulations an order embraces instructions or direc-ions given orally or in writing in terms suited to the particular

ccasion and not prescribed herein.Orders are employed only when the commands prescribederein do not sufficiently indicate the will of the commanders.

COMMANDS.

38. There are 1\YO kinds of commands:The preparatory command, such as forward, indicates thel:lovement that is to be executed.The command of execution, such as MARCH, HALT, causes

he execution. .Preparatory commands are distinguished by italics, those ofltecution by CAPITALS. .

49. The commands prescribed in the' text are given by thellstructor, except when otherwise specified.50. To permit of the preparatory command being understood,well-defined pause should be made between it and the com-l:land of execution. The duration of this pause depends -in aeasure upon the size of the body of troops under command.

rdinarily, in dismounted movements and in mounted move-nents executed from a halt, the pause should be brief and ofiform duration, as otherwise uncertainty is communicated toe ranks, and a ragged execution of the movement results.51. The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loud-ess proportioned to the number of men under command.' Indif-erence in giving commands leads to laxity in execution.




Each vreparatory comm:md is pronounced in an ascendingne of voice, but always in such a munner that the command ofecution may be more energetic nnll elevated. . .On foot the command of execution is pronounced in a firm,ief tone. .' .

In mounted movements the preparatory commands are morer less prolon~ed to insure their being heard; the command ofeeutlon Is filwa~'s lwolonged. .When giving commanus to troops It is usually best to face orole townrd them.52. When I1umlwrs fire announced hy voice as part of a com-and the thousands and hundreds are given separately, but the.ns and units nre combined thus:

2:) Twenty-five.4()(L Four hundred.70;)__________ Seven hundred nnd fiv~8{',0 ..: Eight hundred and sixty.

nO()() 'fhl'ee thousanll.3200 Three, two hundred.32:10 Three, two hundred nnd fifty.40:>0 I!'our thousand and fifty.

53. In trnnsmittln;; numbers by telephone exact hundreus andthousands lire so finnouneed; of other numbers each digit is:;in~n Sl\Ill1r:ltcl~'. Thus-

400 Four hundred.1800 One, el~ht hundred.3000 Three thousand.3~2:> Three, two, two, five.40:>0 Four, zero, five, zero.

54. To secure unlformit~., otncers nuu noncommissioned om-,.eel'S nre practiced in giving commands,55. The bugle cnlls nnd prescribell arm signnls fire frequentlY

\1~e(l In instruction, in oroer tlmt officers and men may reaoi1yreco::nlze them.601. COlUlllunl1s'are ~IYen by the captain either verbally, or

by oI'm. bugle, or whistle signals. When verbal commanus aregl'veu, the~' ma~' be supplementeu by the appropriate signals.

-

'



MANUAL FOR' FIELD ARTILLERY~ 85

502. Chiefs of platoon repeat the commands of the captain,r give appropriate commands to their platoons in time to in-ure the proper execution of the maneuver. The chiefs oflatoon ordinarily give their commands verbally, supplemented,necessary, by the appropriate arm signal, amI see to it thate commands of the captain are understood and correctly ex-cuted by their platoons. If a chief of platoon ooes not. hearcommnnd, he governs himself by what he sees executed bye adjoining platoon.503. Chl<:,f~of S(>C'tiOll rPl't'at the eomill:HH18of the chiefs oflatoon; or gIve arlpl'opriatl' commands to their s~ctions in timeinsure the proper execution of tlw maneun'r. Chiefs of

ction ordinarily give their comm:mds by arm signals, supple-

ented, if necessary, by verbal commands, amI see to it that themmand is understood and that it is correctly executed.

Am.I SIGNALS.

504. sigilfils nre ordinarily made with the rIght arm, butlay he mude with the left when more convenient; when madeith the left arm the reins are taken temporarily in the right

If the saber is in hand, the signals arc made in a. mannermlIar to that prescribed for the nrm.505. Ordinarily, before making n signal for the execution ofmovement, the cuptain places himself where he can be seenthe battery, generally with his horse facing In the same

irection nl'! the team horses, and signals the attention with thehistle or bugle. .'l'he signals prescribed for the different man0nYer~ are pre-nratory signals; for the signal of execution the arm L, extended

ertlcallynnd then lowered quickly to the side. If the move-ent involves n change in the direction of march, the captainlloves his horse in the new direction on making the lll'eparatory

506. :Preparatory signals:Attention.-Extenll the arm vertically anu mo,'c it slowly backUll forth from right to left.



88 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY~

Forward.-Extend the arm vertically and lo,ver it to the front.untll horIzontal. \

By the right (left) flank.-Extend the arm vertically andlower It to the ri~ht (left) until horIzontal. ., Right (Left) about.-Extend the arm vertically and describeslowly a large horizontal circle with the hand; then extend thearm to the left (rIght) and descrIbe a horIzontal arc to frontand rIght (left). .

Countermarch.-Extend the arm vertically and describeqUickly flewral horIzontal circles with the hand. .Right sections forward.-Extend the arm vertically and then

thrust several times to the front.Right (Left) oblique.-Extend the llrm obliquely upward to

the rI~ht (left) and front. and then lower the arm, describinga ~cl'ticnl circle on the right (left) side of the horse.To increase the gait.-Cllrry the hnn<l to the shoulder, forearm

wrtltlll; e-xtelHl the arm Yertically from this position and re-peat severnl times. .

To decrease the gait.-IIold the arm horIzontally above and infront of the fort'heud.

To Imli<'ate an IncreasetI or decreasetI gait for a mllneU"9'er,thenpIII'ol,riute si~nul Is made just after the preparatory signal for

thw maneuver.To halt.-Extend the arm vertically antI hold it there until

tilt> Si~'llfilIs 01le)'ec1.

To change direction to the right (left).-Extend the arm vel'-ti<'nll~'; 10\\"£'1' It to the left (right) until horizontal und de-8('rihc~a horizolltal arc to the front and ri"ht (left).':0 'close intervals.-l'oint to the section ;;n which the intervals

are to be <'1mwd,an(l then signal right (left) oblique, or leftancl rl~ht ohlIque, accoreling as the Intervals are to be closeel onthe rl~ht (left) section or on an interior section.To extend intervals.-Point to the section on which intervals

nre to be extended, nnel then sIgnal left (right) oblique',. orrl;:ht nnll left ohlique, nccordIng as the intervals are to be('Jff'llClc.'cln the.' rl~ht (left) section or on an interior section. :Rtgbt (Left) by section.-Point at the right (left) section antI

51gn.~1forward.




Right (Left) front into line.-Extend the arm vertically andescribe several large vertical circles on the right (left) sidef the horse.

Right (Left) into line.-Signal a change of direction to theight (left), followed by describing small circles with the hand

hile the arm is extended to the right (left).Pieces front.-Extend the arm horizontally to the front anden 1110veIt several times through a small vertical arc.Caissons front.-Extend the arm horizontally to the front anden move it severnl times through a small horizontal arc.Flank column, right (left) oblique.-Extend the arm horizon~lly to the right (left) and then move it several times throughsmall horizontal urc.

Double section, right (left) oblique.-Extend the arm horizon-

lly to the right (left) and then move it several times throughsmull vertical arc.

The signuls for flank column, or double section, right. (left)blique, apply also for the formation of fiank column or doubleect10nto the right (left) after limbering. .Action front (right, left, rear).-Extenll the arm vertically;en lower quickl~' to the front (right, left, rear), and repeatveral times.

Limber.-Extend both arms laterally.

WHISTLE, SIGNALS.

507. Attention.-One long blast.Cease firing.-One long blast. Given only when the batteryin position nnd firing service or subcaliber ammunitiOli.'Special Detail Report.-Three long blasts.Cannoneers Report.-Several short, sharp, and rapid blasts.

Chiefs of Section Report.-One long, followed by one short,st, the "vhole sIgnal repeated once. . .hiefs of Platoon Report.-Two long blasts.t the signals for reporting, the personnel indicated report inersonto the captain.



89ANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

OP (numrrals) ..•. On fourth piece open by (so much).T .•.... Left.L ..•••• Left from tho left.R ....•• Left from tho right.E~(numerals) .... Less (so much).

D Move down.L •..... Move to your left.Move to your right.

U Move up.0 (numerals) .... More (so much)..••.•.... Annnl. Cancel.•••••• ~.\Vbat is the (R. N:, etc.)? Interrogatory. (Ardois :lnd

semaphore only.)__ ee What is the (ll. N., ate.)? Interrogatory. (All meth.

oos but ardois and semaphore.)...••.... Affirmative. Yes.S .....•. Percussion. Shrapnel.R Q .••. Send faster.R S ••.. Send slower.R T ..•. Cease sending....•.••.. Acknowledgment. Received.S•..••.. Regiment:'I.! station.L ••.••. Right from the left.

R Right from the right.N •.•••. Rango.T •••••. Right.••••.••. Subtract.C 1.1 (numer:lls) .... On second piece dose by (so much).OP (numerals) .•.. On second piece open by (so much).H •••..•. Shell.I. Site.S S ••••.. Support nocdea.

•..•.••.. Target. ..eL (numerals) .... On third piCCOdoso by (so much),0 P (numerals) .•.. On third pieco opon by (so much).

L ...•.... Up.(letter) .... Such battery station

(3) The two-arm semaphore code (see illustrations on pag\~s 21Hnd 220).



90 MAmTAL FOR FIELD "ARTILLERY.

Section 5. School of the Soldier.-Dismounted.

65. The instructor explains briefly each movement, first exe-cuting It himself if practicable. lIe requires the recruits totake the proper positions unassisted and does not touch themfor the purpose of correctin~ them, except when they are unableto correct themselves. lIe avohis l{eepin~ them too }on~ at thesame movement, although each shouitl be undel'stootl beforepassln~ to another. IIe exacts by degrees the desired precisionand uniformlt~ .•66. In order that all may a<lvuncc as rupi(lly as their abilltles

permit, the recruits are gronp('<1 n('cordin~ to proficiency as in-struction pro~resses. Those who lack aptitude and quiclmessare 8Pl)aratel1 from the others nnd placed under experiencedc.lrill masters.

Il~STRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.

67. For pr{\}il'llnar~' instruction a number of recruits, usuallynot exceeding three or four, are forme<1 ns II squad in singlerank.

rOSITlo::,. OF A SOI_DIER, OR ATTE:'i'TION.

68. lIl'p}s on thl' "anle line and as near each other as theconformation of the man permits.!<'£'CtUl'lle<1out efInally an<1forming un angle of about 45°.Knepi; stl'al;;ht. without stiffness. .

. Hips lenl and (Irawn back slightly; body erect nnd restin~('Quall~' on hlp~; chest lifted and arched; [.;houlders square andfallin~ ('quall~'.

Arms nn<}hands han;;ing naturally, thumb along the scam of.the tr0\18('r8. .

Hea<l ('r('('t and sf(uarel~' to the front, chin drawn in so thatthe nxl~ of the hea<l anll neck is vertical; e~'es straight to thefront.

Wel;ht or the 1)ql1yresting equally upon the heels and ballSof the feet.

TO ASSEMBLE.

70. To teach the recruits to assemble, the instr\1cto~ requiresthem to place the palm of the left hand upon the hip, below the

"




elt when worn; he then places them on the same line so thathe right arm of each man rests lightly against the elbow of thean next on his right, and then directs the left hand to beeplaced by the side.When the recruits have learned how to take their places, the

nstructor commands : FALL IN. •

. They assemble rapidly as above prescribed, each man drop-ing the left hand as soon as the man next on his left. has his

TO DISMISS THE RECRUITS.

71. Being in line at a halt: DISMISSED.

THE RESTS.

72. Being at a halt, the commands are: FALL OUT; REST;T EASE; and 1. :Parade, 2. REST.At the command fall out, the men ma~' leave the ranks, but

1re required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resumeeir former places, at attention, at the command fall in.At the command rest each man keeps one foot in place, but isot required to preserve silence or immobilit~ ..At the command at ease each man keeps one foot in place

nd is required to preserve silence but not immohIlity.73. 1. :Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 6 inches strnli.{hto the rear, left knee sllghtly bent; clasp the hands, withomonstraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers ,1olm'tl,eft hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and fo)'('-

inger of the right hand; preserve silence and steadinesf of

74. To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.The men take the position of the soldier.

EYES RIGHT OR I,EFT.

75. 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT.At the commllnd right, turn the head to the right obli(!ue,Yes fixed on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to J)(~

, the same runk. At the command front, turn the heau andYes to the front.




The instructor, when necess~ry, indicates the cadence of t~step by calling one, two, three, four, or left, right, the instantthe left and right foot, respectively, should be planted., 81. All steps and marchings and movements involving marchfil'e executed ill quick time unlf>:-;sthe squad. be marching in

dOUble time, or double time he added to the command; in thelatter case double time is nu(le(l to the preparntory cOll1mand.xample: 1. Squad right, double time, 2. MARCH (School of thequad). .

. QUICK TDfE.

83. Being nt a halt, to march forward in qnIck time: 1. For-ard, 2. MARCH.

At the command forward, shift the weight of the body to the

ight leg, left knee strnight.At the command march, move the left foot smartly stl'8ightorward 30 inches fl'om the right, sole near the ground, and'>lnnt it Without shock; next, in like manner, advance the rIghtot and plant it as auove; continue the marcll. 'l'he arJllS

nntu1'l1l1y.

8'. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march inouhle time: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH..If at a hult, at the first command shift the weight of the

O(ly to the' rIght leg. At the comlluln(l march, ral:-;e the fore-fingers closed, to a borlzontul position along the waist

no; take up an easy run with the st<,p and cadence of doubleo, allowing a natural swinging' motion to the armR.If marching In quick time, at the conllllnnd march, given fiS

ther foot strikes the ground, take one stt'l) in quick time, &\nden stell off In double time.85. '1'0 resume the quick time: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH.At the command march, given as either foot strikc8 the

ound, advance nnd plant the other foot in double time;sUlJJe the quick time, dropping the bunds by the sides.

TO lIfARK TIME.

86. Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MARCH.At the command march, given as either foot strikes theund, advunce und plant the other foot; bring up the foot in

'




rear and continue the cadence by alternately raising each footabout 2 inches antI planting it on line with the other.Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the

feet as described above.

THE HALl!' STEP.

87. 1. Half step, 2. MARCH.Take steps of 15 inches in quick tIme, 18 inches in double

time.88. Forward, :tal! step, halt, and mark time may be executed

one from the other in Q.uicl\.or double time.To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. For-

ward, 2. :MARClI.SIDE STEP.

89. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Right (left) step, 2.:MARCH.Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring

the left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadenceof quick time.The side step Is used for short distances only and Is not exe-

cuted In double time.It at order arms, the sIde step Is executed ,at trall without

command.BACK STEP.

90. BeIng at a halt or mark time: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH.Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.The back step is used for short distances only and is not exe

cuted In double time.It at order arms, the back step Is executed at trall without

command. TO HALT.

91. To arrest the march In quick or double tIme: 1. Squad2. HALT.At the command halt, given as either foot strikes the ground

plant the other foot as in mt\rching; raise and place the firsfoot by the 81de of the other. If In double time, drop the handSby the sides.




TO :MARCH BY TIlE FJ.ANK.

96

92. Being in march: 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.At the command march, given as the right foot strikes theround, advance and plant the left foot, then face to the rightmarching and step off in the new direetion with the right

TO MARCH TO THE REAR.

93, Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH.At the command march, given as the right foot strikes theround, advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right aboutn the balls of both feet and immediately step off with the left

H marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking

ur steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off withe left foot.

CHANGE STEP.

94. Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. MARCH.At the command march, given as the right foot strikes theround, advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of theight foot near the heel of the left and step off with the leftoot. .The chan'ge on the right foot is similarly executed, the com-nand march being given as the left foot strikes the grounu.

Section G. Manual of' the Pistol.

'115. Both before and after drill or other exercise with theistol, remove the magazine to see that it Is empty, and drawack the slide and examine the bore to see that the pistol is llot

116, The pIstol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. Raise,PISTOL.At the command raise, unbotton the flap of the holster andrasp the handle with the lust three fingers of the right hnn<1,ack of the hand to the right. At the command, pistol, Hft theistol straight up, closing the thumb on the stock as it clearse holster, and extend the forefinger outside of the trigger



9S MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

guard. Carry the pistol forward and upward to a position (j

inches in front ot the point of the right shoulder, barrel to therear and inclined forward about 30 degrees. .117. Being at raise pistol: 1. Return, 2. FISTOL.It the pistol is loaded, see that the hammer Is down or that

the safety lock is in the locking position. Lower the pistol andraise the flnp of the holster with the right hand. Insert thepIstol In the holster and force it down. Button the fiap withthe right hand.

118. IJcin~ at raise pistol: 1. Inspection, 2. FISTOL.. :Without deranging the position of the han(l, rotate the pistol

80 that the sights move to the left, the barrel pointing to the.right front and upwm',1. .With the thumb and forefinger of theleft hand grasp the slide and pull It toward the body.

It the magazine Is empty, as it should he, the slide stop \\'11lock the slide in the open position. DrOll the left hand by theside. Carry the pistol to a position about G Inches in front ofthe center of the body, barrel pointing upward at an angle ofabout 45 (kgrees and to the left, wrist straight and as high asthe breast. .

'Vhen the inspection Is completed, resume raise pistol, releasethe slide stop with the left thumb, an<1 lower the hammer bypressing the trigger.

119. The pistol being in the holster: Frepare for inspection.At this command the flnp of the magazine pocket is unbut.

tone<1 an<1turnefl bacl, with the left hand. Each man in turllexecutes raise pistol an<1 inspection pistol in time. to be at thelatter posltlon ns the inspection of the man on his right Is com.mence(l h~' the Inspector. .

As ~oon as the inspector passes, the soldier completes inspe'c~tion pistol, (~xecut('s return pistol, nnd with the left hand closes

the mag-azlne pocket.120. Delng nt I'll ise pistol to remove the magazine:Without derntl~Ing the position of the hand, rotate the pistol

so that the sights move to the right, the barrel pointing to theJeft il'ont anfl upward; pres~ the magazine catch with the rightthumb nnd remove the magazIne with the left hand.121. To charge the magazine: Hold the magazine in the left

hand, 0[1('11 end up, rounl1('(1 side to the right. r.rnke the cur.trldge In the right hand, thumb on the rim, bullet eud pointing'




o the rIght; plnce the rIm on the end of the magazine follower;orc(~ <lown the magazine sprIng and slip the mrtridge to theft Into the magazine. The next cartridge is similarly slipped11by placing it on the cartridge just inserted and forcing downe spring., •

The magazine may be charged with any number of cnrtri<1gesom one to seven. ,122. '1'he pistol being In the position for removing the maga-ne, to insert the magazine: . ,. ,With the left hand insert the magazine in the handle and

it home, not by striking it, but with n quick continuousovement, making sure that it engages with the magazinetch. Resume raise pistol.123. Being at raise pistol with at least one cartridge in the

LOAD. .Hotate the pistol as In inspection pistol. 'With the thumb andre1illger of the left hand grasp the slide, nn<1 by pulling it

ward the bo<1yuntil fully back and then qUickly releasing it,11 cartridge to ,enter the chamber of the barrel. If the

stolis to be kept in the hand and Dot fired at once, the safetyck is moved to the locking position with the right thumb. If

e ]oade(1 piston is to be carried in the holster the hammerust be fully 10were<1. Hcsume raise pistol.

124. TIle pistol being loaded, to lower the hammer:The pistol beIng in the position for loading, place the leftnd nroun<l the grip over the right,. spa t the left thumb firmlythe hammer, nn<1insert the right forefinger Insi<1e the trIggerard. Exert sufficient pressure with the left thumb to controlmovement of the hammer, press the trigger and the grip

fely with the rIght hand, and carefully fiD(l slowly lower themmer completely down. Hemove the forefinger from the

1.'0 ngntn cocl>: the p;stol, move the forefinger clear of thegger, place the right tllUmb on' the hammer, an<1 bring themmer back to the position of full cocl>:. .12~. To unload: UNLOAD.

Remove the magazine. I~xecute the motions of load, therebyOWing. the cartridges from the chamber.

10~2S1o--VOL.1--17----4

' ' "

'



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. .,99

Olllmnnds: FALL IN .. The men assemble (70) at double timet nttentlon (68). The rear rank forms \vith a <1ir-:taneeof 40n('lws. ,The instru(.tor then ('OlllllHl.lHI!o;:OUNT OFF. ..A t thIs ('olllm:lIll1 all ('xeept the rIght file execute eyes right,U(>glllning on the right the fi)ps count one, two, three, four;

ach Illan turns hIs head fi11<1 l'~'es to the front fiS he counts.

ALIG N1\fENTS.

98. To nllgn the squad, the base file or files having beenstnLIish(>d: 1. Right (Left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.At the'comlllalld dress all men place the left hand upon theWhether dressIng to the right or I('ft: each man except the

nsl' tile, when on or n0ar the new line eXl'cutes eyes right, and,klng steps of. 2 01',3 inches, places himself so that his rightre~ts' li,Q:htly ngnlnst the eluow of the man on his' right,

ncIso thnt his ey<>sand shoulders nre in line with those of theen on his right; the rear-rank men cover in file,The Instructor verifies the nllgnrnent of both ranks from theIght flank nud orders up or bac'l\: such men as may be in rear,in ndvance, of the Ilne; only the men designated move. .At the commund front, given when the ranks are aligned, each

turns his head am! ('yes to the front an'u drops his left handJIll'! side.' .

In the iil'st (lrlIls thl' bnsig of the alignm('nt is estnb1ished on,parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique

)VhC'neyer the position of the base file. or files necessitatescon~Idernble movement by the squad, such mOYement will be

hy eneh ftlt> llI:lrching to the front or oblique, to thenk or hnckwarll, ll~ the case mny ue, without other command.

99. '1'0 lw('serve the allglllllcnt when marchIng: GUIDE RIGHTEFT). . . ,

'l'II(' men l)}'pscl've their intervals from the side of the guide.('lllllJ~ to 11l'C'ssul'l'from that sIde and resisting pressure fromopposite direction; th('y recover intervals, if lost, by gradu-

y openIng' out or elosin~ in; the~' recover alignment byghtl~. ll'ngthenln~ or shortening the step; the rear-rank men

theIr flle leaders at 40 inches.




TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES; TO ASSEMDLE. '.'

100. Being In .line at a halt: 1. Take interval, 2. To the' right(left), 3. MARCH, 4. Squad, 5. HALT.At the second command the rear-rank men march backword

4 steps and lwlt; at the cOlUmand MARCH all face to. the rightand the leading man of each rank steps off; the other men stepoft In succession, each followIng the preceding man at 4 paces,rear-rank men marching n!'H'eust of their tile lenders,At the command halt, given when all have their intervals, .all

halt and face to the front.101. In taking intervals file closers, at the second commanu,

take a distance of 4 paces frolU the rear rank and, at the com"mand marCh, face to the flank, each stepping off with the file

nell rest him.102. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. Assemble,

to the right (left), 2. MARCH. ,The front-rank mun on the right stands fast, the rear-rank

man on the right closes to 40 in~hes. The other men face. to theright. close by the shorest line, and face to the front.103. Being in line at a halt: 1. Take distance, 2. MARCH,

3. Squad, 4. HALT.

At the command march the man on the right of the front rankmoves straight to the front; the other men of the front rank,In order from right to left, and then those of the rear rank. inthe same order, move strD ight to the front, each stepping off soas to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command haltIs given when all luwe their <1istances.In case more than one squad Is In line, each squad executes

the movement. The guide of each rank is right. ,If it is desired that a less <1istance than 4 paces be taken the

distance desired may be indicated in the preparatory comman<.l.For example: 1. Take 3 paces distance.104, BeIng at distances, the men of each squad may be caused

to cover the mnn on the rIght of Its front rank by the comman<1cover.

105. Being at distances. the Instructor may command: 1.ltlght (Lef~), 2. FACE, 3. COVER. The men face in the direc-tion indIcated nn<1coYer In file.

'

"




n..fl)l'e n~;;;:PI:lhllngfrom the resulting formation the instructor1. Left (Right), 2. FACE.

10S. Hpillg ut (1l8tUll(,~S~o ass('mble: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.rl'he llllln originally on the right of the front rank stands fast;l> others move forwurd to their positions in Illie.It ' more than olle squad is nt disttlllces, ench squad executesle movement.'1'0 assemhle to the rear: 1. About, 2. FACE, 3. Asstlmble,. MARCH. .

I'~xecuted as above, except that the man originally on the leftf the rear rnn1\: stalHls fast.107. In asrembling file ('Iosf'rs conform to the movement and'e~ulIJetheir poSitiOllS In line.

THE OIlUQUE MARCH.

108. For the instruction of recruits, the squad, being inlumn or correctly nllgned, the instructor causes the squad toce hnlf right or half left, points out to the men theIr relative>osltlons, aml explaIns that these are to be maintaIned in thelique mnreh.109. 1. Right (Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.

l<~n('hmun st:P)lS off. in n direction 45° to the right of hisl'j~innl front. He !"Jrcservcs his relative position, keeping hishouiders parallel to those of the guide (61) nnd so regulatess foitepsthnt the ranks remaIn {larallel to their origInal front.At the eommnn(l halt till' men halt faced to the origInal front.Murchlng at the oblique, to resume the origInal direction: 1,rward, 2. MARCH.The men half fnee to the left in lUurchlng and then moveaight to the front.

It nt half step or mark time whIl€' ohliquIng, the oblique marchreRume(1 by tlw cOllllllHlltlS: 1. Oblique, 2. MARCH. :

TO TURN ON :?WVING PIVOT.

110. B€'lng in ]Jne: 1. Right (Left) turn, 2. MARCH.The movement Is ex('cut~<1 by each ranI\: successIvely nnd onsume groun<.1. At the second command the right-flank man

'

'




or the front rank faces to the right in marching anll takes thehalf step; the other men of the rank oblique to the right untilopposite their places in line, then execute u second right obliquennd take the half step on arrlvin~ abreast of the pivot man.All glance toward the marching Hunl\: While at half step andtake the full step without commund as the last man arrives on

the 'Ine., t

Rig1!t (Left) half turn is executed in a slmlIar manner. Thepivot man makes a half change of direction to the right andthe other men mnke quarter changes in obliquing.

TO T{;,R~ o~ FIXED PIVOT.

111. Being in line, to turn an<1murch: 1. Squad right (left),2. MARCH. .

At the second command the right-flank man in the frout ranI'faces to the right in marching and marks time; the other front.rank men ohlique to the right, place themselves abreast of thepivot, and mark time. In the r('ar rank the third mun from theright, followed in column by the second and first, moves straightto the front until in rear of his front-rank man, when all faceto the rlg:ht in marching and mark time: the other number ofthe ren1' rank moves straight to th(~ front 4 paces and places

himself ubr('ast of the mun on his rig-ht. Men on the new lineglance toward the marching Hank whlIe marking time and, asthe lust man arriyps on the line, OOtIl ranks execute forward,march, without command. .

112. Bl'ln~ in line, to turn and halt: 1. Squad right (left),2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.

'l'he thIrd commUT1l1is ~iven immediately nfter the second.The turn is execntpl! as pre:~('rHlell in the preceLling paragraph,('xcept that nli men on nrrlvin;; on the new line mark time until

the fourth ('onllnnnd i~ given, when nIl halt. The fourth com.mnnl1 should 00 g-Iven as the last man nrrin)~ 011 the line.113. Being' in line. to turn about and march: 1. Squad right

(left) about, 2. MARCH.

At the second cOlllmulHI the front rank twice executes squadright, cOlnIl'enc1ng the second squad right when the man on themarching flank has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rearrank the third mun from the right, followed by the second and



MANUAL FOR FIELD 'ARTnLERY. 103

irst ill column,' moves straight to the front llntil on the pro-~ng'atfon of the line to be oceupied by the rear rank; changeslll'('etioll to the right; mores in the new (Urec.tion until in rearf his front-runk mUll, when all face to the right in marching,1111rktime, and glance toward the marching flank. The fourth1anmarches on the left of the third to his new position; tIS llerriv('s on tIle line, both ranks ex('cute forward, march, Without

l 114. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. Squad rightleft) about, 2. :MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.'l'he third comll1an<1ls given immediately after the second. Thern Is executed fiS prescribed In the preceding paragraph, exceptat nil men on arriVing on the new line murk time until theOurth command Is givpn, wlH~n all halt. The fourth commandhould be given as the lust mun nrl'h'cs OU the line. ; ,

Section 8. The Battery Dismounted.

GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND ORGANIZATION.

131. The Instruction prescribed for the buttery dismountedapPlicnble, with obvious modifications, to the instruction ofy number of platoons, sections, or squads dislllounted.

132. POI' technical, tactIcnl, find administrative purposes thelisted personnel of the buttery is assignefl to sections. Act10n dismounted consists of one sergeant, who Is ('hief of sec-n, anll nil tile men fisslgne(l to the I:lervice of fi piece und Itsisson, eullell u. gun section; or to the s(>rvice of two caissons,l)(l(l u caisson section. '1'110leading ('uisson of fi caisson sec-on I~ the first caisson; the renr caisson, the second caisson.

8l'ctlon assigned to the service of the batter~', wagon ande store wl1~on und to Ow service of the tools carried in those

Is cullell the ninth section. The section assigned to thervke of supply is cfilled the supply section. At dismountedr1l1atlons the members of the snpvl~r section, unless llssigne<1sew!J('re, habItually form In the line of file closers of the ninth

133. The first four sections of the battery are gun sections.e l't'1l1aining sections, except the ninth section and the supply

lire caisson sections. Each gun section consists of a

'

'




gun squad and a driver squad. Each caisson section consists on caisson squad and a driver squad. 'l'he ninth section consistsof n mechanic squad and a driver squad.

134. Each section dismounted is formed in line, with the b'1tsquad, caisson Rquad, or mechanic squIlll on the right, the driver

squad on the left. :\len temporarily attached to s('ctlons fuli inin the line of file closers or at such other places as lllay be tIesignated.

135. Each gun squad consists of one of the corporals llndseven of the vrivates assigned to the service of a gun section.The corporal is the gunner and shOUld be selected fol' his quaIl.fications without regard to his rank in the section. '1'he privutesare cannoneers, numbered from l'o. 1 to No.7.

136. Each caisson squad consists of one of the corpol'llls and

seven of the privat('s assigneel to the service of u cnisson s('ct!on.The corporal Is a caisson corporal. 'l'he vrivates are cannoneers,three of whom are assignetl to the 1irst caisson and 'numberedfrom l'o. 4 to No. G, and the remaining four to the second cais.son and numbered from No.4 to No. 7.

Movements prescribed for a gUll squad. apply, with obviousmo<llfications, to a caisson, driver, or mechanic squad.'137. Each driver squad of the gun and caisson sections con.

sists of a caisson corporal, the six <1ri\'('1'8of the carriages of

the section, and an extra cannoneer, No. 8, who is trained as n.spare driver.

138. Eueh gun squad Is formel} in douhle rank as follows:The gunner and !\os. 2, 4, awl G In the front rnnk in O1'(l('rfromright to left; Kos. 1, 3, fI, und 7 in the rear rank, in onlt'r fromright to left; No. 1covering the gunner.

6 4 2G

40 inChes.




141. In the fifth section the driver squad is formed with thetelephone corporal of the battery comlUtUHler's detail as itscorporal; the scout corporals and the sIgnal privates of thatdetail fall in as tile closers of the section.142. The mechanic squad is forme<l in double rank as fol.

lows: In the front ranI>: the chief mechanic is on the right andth1'l'e of the mechanics are on his left; in the rear rank; cover.in~ the mou in the front rank, are the four rel1lainin~ meel1::mics143. In a lJattpry on a ll('a(,t~ j'ootIn~ the ~llnre cannoneers

assj~ne<l to the ninth section constitute It squad, which forms all

the left of the driver squad.144. At dismountetl formations, if n squad contains less than

six men, it is increased to that num))l'r by transfers from othersquads, or is broken up un<l its members assigned to othersquads and post<'d in the line of file closers.When a squafl consists of ~ix 11wn, both of the interior fileS

are blank; when of seven men, one such tHe is blank.145. A platoon dismounted consists of one lieutenaut, ,vho is

chief of platoon. an<1 two sections dismounted.The platoon dismounted is form('<1 in llouble rank, with the

sections arranged from right to left in the order of their per.manent numbers.

146. A battery dismounted comprIses the personnel shown indetail in Tables of Organization I and II.147. The battery dismounted is formed in dOUble rank with

the platoon~ arrangell from right to left in the order of theil'permanent numbers.The senior lieutenant Is, at formations amI exercises of the

battery (lbmounted. assi,~ne<l as chief of the first platoon. Thelieutenant next in runk is assigned as chief of the secondplatoon, and so on.

Chiefs of platoon and section supervise the movements oftheir units.

148. When only a part of the hattery is forme<1 for <lIs-mouIlted instruction, the wor<1 section or platoon, as tIle cusemay be, is suhstituted in the commands for battery. , ,

'




, POSTS OF OFFICERS, NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS, ETC.

IN LINE.

149. The captain: Four yards In front of the center of the

Chiefs of platoon: Two yards in fr6nt of the center of theirlatoons. ,.

1'he fourth l1eutenant, when there are but three platoons: Inhe line of file closers, opposite the ccnter of the battery.The first sergeant: In the front rank, 1 ~'ard from the right ofe Hrst section.

The quartermaster sergeant: In the front rank, 1 J'ard fromhe left of the left section. . .The mess and stable sergeants: In the line of file closers of

e nin th section. . .Chiefs of section: One :yard in front of the center of their

Corporals: The right man ot the front rank ot their squads,xcept the scout corporals, Who are in the lIne of file closers ofe fifth section.

Tho guidon and the musicians: In the line of file closers ofe tlrst section. . .

Other men for whom there is no place in the squads: In the

ne of ftle closers in rear of the section to ,,,hich they belongr are attached.

IN COLU1IN OF SQUADS.

150. The captain: Four yards from the flank, opposite. theentf'r, on the left (right) when the first (ninth) section Is Inont. .

Chiefs of platoon: On the same side as the captain, 2 3'ardsom the flank and opposite the center of theIr platoons.1'hc fourth lIeutenant, When there are but three platoons: One Fllde opposite the captain, 2 3'a1'ds from the flank and oppo-e the center of the column.

Tho first sergeant: Either 40 inches In front of the I{uidln~ot the leading squad or 40 inches in rear of the guiding fileth~ rear squad, according as the column has been formed byecuting squads rJght or squads left from line.

f




The quartermaster sergeant: Either 40 inches in rear of theguiding file of the rear squad or 40 inches in front of the gllid~ing file of the leading squad, according as the Colullln has been,formed by executing squads right or squads left from line.Chiefs of section: On the sallle side as the captain anl14 inches

from the fiank man of the front rank of the rear squall of theirsection.

1.'he tile closers: On the side opposite the captain and abreastof and 4 inches from the flank of the [o;1!ll:HI in rear of whichthey arc posted in line.

TO FORM AND TO DISMISS TlIE BATTERY.

151• .At the sounding of the assembly, the flrst sergennt, facingthe battery nIHI G yards in frollt of Where the center is to be,eommands: 1. FALL IN, 2. CALL ROLLS, 3. RE:PORT.At the conHnand fall in, the gunners, caisson corporals, tele-

phone corporal, and chief mechanic place themselves on theline facing to the front in theh' Pl.oper order, at suftident dis-tance npart for the formation of theil. squads: each squllll formson its corporal: the chic!;..; of section take their posts :t'llcill~their sections. The llssemhly haVing ceased, the 11rst sergeant

causes the scctions to dose to the right, if necessary.At the command call rolls, the chlcfs of section call the rollsnnd then face to the front.

At the cOlUlIJanl1REPORT, the chief of the first section salutesnnd reports: First section, presen t; or First section, Corporal __ and :Private(s) -- are absent. ~'he lirst s(-'r~ennt, haVing rc-ceived an(l veriflell this report. r('tnrn~ the salute. 'I'he chl0f ofthe second section th0n rel~orts in like manner, ana f;o on. Menwho nre known to he ahsent by IH'uper anthority ure not re-

ported uhs(-'nt h~' tile chi0f,.; of seetion. After receivin~ thereports, the first s('r~eant face:; about, saiutes the cnvtain, andreports: Sir, the battery is present or accounted for; or, Sir (somany), noncommissioned officers or privates are absent. 1.'hefirst sergeant tllen takes his post.

The captain plac('s himself 1~ ~'ards in front of the center ofnil' hatter,\', snpel'intenl!s the fonnntion, nnel receivcs the reportof tlte th.st ~ergl':lIlt. Whose salute he returns.



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY • 109

. The lieutenants take their posts as soon as the first sergeantas reported. .During instruction the officers have the saber drawn or In thecabbard, at the discretion of the captain. WIlen the captainraws saber, the lieutenants also draw saber.

TO OPEN RANKS.

152. Being In line at a halt: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH, 3.

At the command march the front rank executes right dress;he rear rank Rnd the file closers march backward four steps,alt, and execute right dress; the fourth lieutenant, when onlyree platoons are present, marches backward 4 steps and halts;

e chiefs of platoon step forward 2 yards, the chiefs of sectionyaru, and all <lress to the right. The captain goes to the rightlank of the battery and aligns the chiefs of platoons, the chiefsf section, the front rank, the rear rank, and the file closers.Defore giving the cOl11manu front the captain places himselffront of the post of the 11rst sergeant and on a line with the

hiefs of platoon and faces to the left. At the commund frontll the men turn their heads and e~'es to the front, and thoseranks drop the left arm. .

After the command front has been executed, the captain placesImself 6 ~'ar<ls in front of the center of the battery, facing toe front.

TO CLOSE RANKS.

1lS3. BeIng at' open ranks: 1. Close ranks, 2. MARCH.At the cOll1l11unumarch, the lieutenants and chiefs of sectionce about ntHl resume their posts in line; the rear rank closes40 inches, each mun covering his file leader; the file closers

ose to 2 yards from the rear rank; the cuptain then takes hisst fn lIne.

ALIGNMENTS.

154. The' aligmnents are executed ns prescribed for thethe hase squad may, if desired, be established instend

the base file. In nllgning the battery, the captain places him-




self in prolongation of the line, 2 yards from and facing theflank towurd which the alignment is made; after commandingfront, he resumes llis post.

TO DISMISS THE BATTERY•

.155. Bf'in.~ in line at a halt:Tlw captain <lir0Cts the first sergeant: Dismiss the battery,

an(l returns the ~alute of the first Berg-cant.The otlieers fall out; the first serge:lnt salutl's. 8tC'I)83 ~'ards

to the front, faces to the left, and commands: DISMISSED.In exeeptional cases the battery may be dismissed from Hny

formation, either fit a halt or marching.

:r,rANEUVERS OF THE BATTERY,

GEXEIUr, rnonsTOXS.

156. The manpU\'C'rs of the hattC'ry dismounted ure liulitc(lto those nccC'ssary for its onlC'rly handlIng. They nre alsonlluable for tlxing the attention of the men and for teachinghahits of discipline find prompt obedience.

157. l'he instruction set forth in detail for the soldier tlis.mounted is arJplicable to the battery dismounted, the facings,steps, marchings, tunings, rests, all being execute(l according tothe ~anw principles, oflieer~, noncommissIoned otncers, amI filo<:losers conforming to the movements.158. In 1I1:H'cIJingin line the guide is the right or left man

of the front rank (60). In m:lr('hln~ in column of Hquads theguide is the tir:.;t sergeant or quarterm:1ster sergeant if in ranks;therwise the guide of the leading squad.

If the ~uide is chan.~ed while marching in column of squads,he cuptain, chief~ of platoon, chiefs of section, and file closershange to the other lI:1nk by darting through the column 01'

assing nroun!l the C'nds of the column, as may 1.>emost con.

159. ,nH:'/1 line is formed from column of squads, the cap.ain. dlll'f ..; o( p1:ltOO!lawl of seNion, tile closC'l's, 1 ho l11'l.;t8('1'.eant, awl the (lllartL'l"IlJa~U>rsprg('ant take theIr vo~t8 in liue in




TO FORM LI~E FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS.

164. Bein;:: In column of squads, to form 11ne to the flank:1. Squads right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (left); or, 1.Squads right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battery, 4. HALT. .

Executed by each squad (112). The chIefs of platoon andsection, file closers, etc., take their posts In line (149) In themost cOI1\"enient manner.165. Bl'in::: in column of squads, to form 11ne on right or

left: 1. On right (left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Battery, 4. HALT,5. :FRONT.At the first comman(} the corporal of the leading squad com.

mands: Right turn. '.rhe corporals of the other squads com.mand: :Forward, If at a halt. At the second command the lead.Ing squad turns to the right on moving pivot. The commandhalt Is given when the leading squad hus advanced the desired<llstance In the new <lircction; it halts; its corporal then com.mands: Right (left) dress.The squads In rear continue to march straight to the front;

each, when opposite the right of Its place In line on the left ofthe preceding squads, executes right turn at the command of itscorporal; each Is halted on the line at the command of Its cor.

pOl'al, who then commands: RIght dress. All dress on the firstsquad In line.H executed In double time, all the squads march In double

time untll halted. .. 166. Being In column of squads to form line to the froilt: 1.Right (left) front into l1ne, 2. MAltCH, 3. Battery, 4. HALT, 5.FRONT.

. At the first command the corporals of the squads In rear ofthe leading one command: Right oblique .. It nt a halt, the cor.

poral of the leading squad commands: :Forward. At tho secondcommand the leading squad moycs straIght forward; tho rear~;quads oblique as indicated. '.rhe command halt Is glyen whenthe leading squad has advanced the desIred distance; It halts;its corporal then commands: Left dress. Each of the rearsquads when opposite its place In line resumes the I orIginal<lirectlon at the command of its corporal; ench Is halted on the

'



MANUAL FOR FIELDARTnLERY. 113

ine at the command of its corporal, who then cOl~mands: Leftiress. All dress on the first squad in line.i If executed' in double time, .all the squads march in doubletme unt1l halted.

TO :FORM FLANI\: COLUMN OF FILES FEO].I LINE.

1,7. Movements in flank column have no disciplinarr 'mlue.T11(lr use F;hould be limited to the rare occasions necessitatinga nUHrowfront of the column. They are executed in quick timeonly. .

168. Bein~ in line at a halt: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE, 3. For-\Vard, t MARCH.At He second command all face to the ri~ht. At the fourthouunam all take the full step. IndividUftls not in the two'anks 1l1')ye so as to preserve the relative positions they hadn llne.

nOUTE ORDER AND AT EASE.

169, Ma~chillg In column of squads: 1. Route order, 2.rtARCHj (!r, 1. At ease, 2. MARCH. .0111cers carry their sabers at will or in the scabbard; theen retain their positions In ranks, but are not required to keep

tep. . .It the command be route order, the men are permitted to talk;f the command be at ease, silence is preserved.~'o resume the cadenced step: 1. Battery, 2. ATTENTION. .It the cOIDm::I.1lUalt be given while murching at route order,

he men remain at rest In fanks; if whUe mnrclltng at ease,hey remain at ense.Houte order anu at ease are not used while marching InOllhie time. . .. ..

l.'1Ie use of Ulsmounted exercises being limited, the marchIngf t1le battery dismounted fit route order Of at ease should be

-

'



114 . MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

•Section 9. Preliminary Exercises of the Gun Squads.'

FORMATION OF THE GUN SQUADS.

TO FORM THE GUN SQUADS.

170. The Instructor indicates the place of formation lndcommands: FALL IN.Each gunner repeats the commantl and hastens to place bim.

flelt, faced to the front, where the right of his squad is to rest.The cannoneers move at double tlme and take their plnce:!.171. The place of formation is indicated and the comnand

given thus, for example: 1. In front (rear) of your piecel (cais.sons) ; or, 1. On the right (left) of your pieces (caissons) faoingthem; or, 1. On the road facing the park, 2. FALL IN.172. In case the front or rear of the carriages is dfslgnated,

. each squad falls In at its post (175-177).173. For the first formation of the gun squads for any <11'1

or exercise the instructor cautions as gun squads before givingthe command.

TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS.

,174. CALL OFF. In each gun squad (138) tbJ cannoneer

,on the right of the rear rank calls off one; the cannoneer onthe left of the gunn0r, two; the cnnnoneer on the left of No. 1,three; and so on. The gunner does not call off. .. In e1\ch caisson squad (139) the cannoneers of the frontrank call off first, thus: four, five, six, in order from right toleft. followed by the cannoneers of the rear rank in the sameordf:r. The caisson corporal does not call off. . ,After having callcel off, if n suh~equent formation is ordered,

the cannoneers fall in at once in their proper order.

~OSTS OF GUN'S,UADS AND CANNONEERS; MOUNTING AND

DIIiiKOUIlTING.

POSTS OF THE GUN SQUADS, CARTIlAGES LurnEnED.

175. In front of the pieces or caissons: I'~nch squad is in linefacing to thE: front, its rear and eentcl' 2 ~'nrds from the end ofthe pole or from the heads of the lead horses.

~




176•. In rear of the pieces or caissons: Each squad is in lineacing to the front, its front and center 2 ;}"ards from the llluzzlefrom the rear of the caisson ..177. If no special place of 'formation is designated, each

when formed at the carriages, is posted in front of theelW'lIngcarrIage of its section.

TO POST THE GUN SQUADS.

17t. The squads are marched to the park, uml, on arrI,nlenr the carrIages, the Instructor commands: Squads in frontrear) of your pieces (caissons).Each gunner marches his squad to.its carriage and posts it in

he indicated posItion. . :

179. The instructor habitually causes the squads to apIH'oachhe front (rear) of the cnrriages which he designates in IllSommand, fro111 the rIght of the parI\: if left in front :111(1 fromhe left if right in front. .

POfiTS Oll" TIlE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES LBInERED •

. 180. The gunner and No.1 opposite the rear of the limber'heels of the pIece.

Nos. 2 and 3 opposite the rear of the gun wheels.NOR.4 and u opposIte the rear of the caisson wheels.Nog. 6 and,. opposite the rear of the limber wheels of the

The gunner nndeven numbers are on the right, the o(ld Hum-eri:! on the left, all 2 feet outsIde the wheels, fllcing the front.

TO !'os'r THE CANNONEERS.

181. .1. Cannoneers, 2. POSTS. Each gunner repents the com-land posts. The cannoneers leave the l'fiuks, if forn1l'll, undove nt.<1ouble time by the short';?st practicahle routes to theIr

182. 11'01'preliminary instruction the squalls, 011 entcrln~ theark, are first posted with their carriages; the cnnnoneer8 llreeu 8'ent to theIr posts by the foregoing COlllllllllH1. The com-

f




mnnd Is general, however, and Is applicablc,when the cannoneers are In or out of rankf,at a halt or marching, and when the cu~.riages are limbered or unlimbered.

TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CAR.

BrACES LIMBERED.

183. In each squad the gunner and No.1mount on the limber chest of the piece.Nos. 2 and 3 mount on the axle seat~.'Nos. 4 aml 5 mount on the caisson chest.Nos. 6 and 7 mount on the limber chest of

the caisson.\Vhen extra cannoneers are present:No.8 mounts between Nos. G and 7.No.9 mounts hetween Nos.' 4 find 5.The gunner and even numbers mount on

the right side of their respective cllrring(~s,odd numbers on the left.184. 1. Cannoneers, prepare to mount,

2. :HOUNT.

At the first Command the cannoneers whomount on the 11mber ('hests or axle seatshasten to the rear of the limber chests oraxle seats: those who mount'on t.he caissonchest hasten to the front of that' chest.Each cannoneer Who mounts on the lImherchest places the foot nearest the wheel' 011

the step, grasps the chest handle with the

hand nearest the Wheel, [\nd with the otherhand grasps the hand of the cunnoneeropposite him. r';ach cannoneer who mounts.on the caisson chest places the foot near.est the wheel on the step, and graspsthe chest handle with the hand nearestthe wheel .. Cannoneers who mount on thoaxle seats place the foot nearest the wheelon the brake beam, and grasp the seat

handle with the hand nearest the wheel.

,''108.

I

tI

I

.1

d".. 1

I

•II

I11

If}'8

I.

,l'~

IIII

III

~.

II

•IIII

IJ

III

rI

II

4 z~4 z • '~.'f

PLATE 40, Par. 180.

~

~ ~




PLATE 41, Par. 188.

r:------r ...

SYC3.

'J. .""

-~.q;'.

At the command mount, all spring up and seat themselves,UlO!oIC on the chests facing to the front, those on the axle seatstQ the rear. Those who mount on the limber chests place thefeot farthe~t from the wheel on the top of the limber chest, andthfln str)) down on the footboard.

185, If the commun(! be: 1. Cannoneers, 2. MOUNT, the can-none'pI's rxecute, at the command mount, all that has been pre-scrl\)(>(1for the ('()lllmands prepare to mount and mount.

1'0 DIS1IIOUNT THE CANN'ONEERS rr.o]\! THE CARRIAGES.

186. 1. Cannoneers, prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT.'l'he cannoneers on the chests stand up on the footboards at

the 1Jrst command; at the second command. all the cannoneersump to the ground and take their

at the d.ouble time.187. If the commnnll be: 1. Can-oneers, 2. DIS1troUNT, they cxe.utf', at the command dismount, allhat' hal'l been prescribed for the

prepare to dismount and

'OSTS OF THE CANNOl'\EERS, CAn.

RIAGES UNLI1I!BEmm BUT NOT I'RE-J>A1U~D I"OR ACTION.

188. In eneh squad t he gunnern1C'(lIntely 'in 1'£'[\1' of the can-

seat, 011 the left side ofhe t 1'1111 of the glIn,:Ko. 1, immediately in rear of the

011 the right sidef the trail of the gun.No.2, 2 feet in n'nr of theunner, covering him.No~. 3, 4, nnl! G,2 feet in rear of the cnisson chest in the ordernmel1 from rir;ht to left.Nos, G nnd 7, abreast nnd in order fr0111right to left, 5 rnrds

n 1'('n1'of the trail spade. I . , .

. JIlghC'r-llum!wrell cl\nnoneC'r~, If pr'C':';f'nt. UC'('OllJOOm- thPl'1Im_

Thp Cal1n011P('r8stUI1tl nt nU0ntlol1 nt thc>lr posts, faclngo tIle ft'ont.

'




direction. This formation of the carriages is called a doublesection. The interval of 2 :rards should not be materially(~hnnged, otherwise the amount of movement of the carriages byhun<! Is greatly IncrenRcd.194. If it is int0n<le<1 to fire to the front, the caissons should

be placed on the left of their pleees hefore the command forl1l1lJmbering' Is gin'n j If it is intendc<1 to fire to the rear, thecai~sons should he on the right of their pieces j if to the flank,on either side of their pieces. In ('merg,cncies the earriagl>s mal'be unlimberel! from any forml1Hon. Dispositiom; to met't vari-OU:i situations should be practiced.195. When not horsed the carriages are drawn b~. the cun-

noneers antI the instructor gives the necessary instructions for1l10vlng the carriages by the shortest routes into the prescribedPositions.196. After unlimbering: The adjacent wheels of the gUll amI

caisson are about 1 foot apart, tho gun muzzle and the cnissontrail pointing to the front, the gun on the right :lnd slightl;r inadvance of the caisson.,The gun is placed slightly in advance to allow for recoil at

the l1rst shot, which on ordinnr~' ground is about 10 in('11e8.'I'he interval of 1 foot may be increased to permit wide l110ye~

mCllts of the trail If they are anticIpated, but elIort should beilll1de to preserve the protection nfforded by the shIelds.,J 11 emergencIes the caIssons mllY be placed tell1poraril~' on the

rIght of their pieces. ,As this position is not favorable to theserrlce of ammunItion, the cals~ons should be place<l on the leftof t 11('11'ieces as soon as practicable. ,197. In active service an<l in instruction simulatill;:: ~el'Vice

COl1(lltlons, the lImbers nre plac('ll lindeI' cover in the Yicinity ofthe }losition; If no cover if! obtaInable in the vicillit~., thl"Y are

Vlu('c<l in lIne in rel1r of either finnk nt such place ns the in-t:;tructor may designate.

TO UNLumER-GEXER.\L lluLES,

198. 1. In unlimberIng to fire to the front euch caIsson estub-lslH'f4 the position.2. III unllmherlng to fire to the rear, ('u('h picce estahlIshes

the position.

'




and places himself so as to be ready to turn the top of. hisWheel toward the muzzle. The gunner unlatches the pintle,and, assisted by No.1, raises the trail from the pintle. Thegunner, by raising his arm, signals for the drivers to drive on.'l'he gunm'r and No. 1 carry the trail away from tbe caisson

and all of the cannoneers working together turn the piecearound 180°. The gunner causes the piece to be placed by theside of the cal:-:son (196). The gunner Hnd No. 1 lower thetrail to the ground, and all the cannoneers at the piece take theirposts.Limbers: At the signal drive on, the limbers take their pre-

scrihed positions (197). To take posts In rear of the carriages~ach caisson limber executes a left about, illoves straight to therear, executes another left about, and halts, 80 that the heads of

the lead hor8(>8or the ('nd of the pole wlll be 25 yards from therear of the caisson. Each piece limber follows the caissonlimher, passes around in rear of it, and halts so as to be abreastof it and 2 ~'ards to its right.In horse batteries, Nos. Gand 7 do not assist at the caisson ..

TO FIRE TO TIlE REAR.

200. The cnrringps being in double section, the caissons onhe right: ACTION REAR. If marching, the carriages halt athe COll1maIH.lr signal. The caunoneers, if mounted, dismountft('r the carriages have halted.The Caisson: Nos. 4 antI lj jump to the trail handles. :\08. Gnd 7, If present, run to the right and left caisson wheel'i, re-])('ctlvely. No. G stands ready to turn the top of his wheelwuy from the trail, whlle No.7 stands read~r to turn his toward.he trail. No.4 unlatches the plntle: NOH. 4 aud 5 raise therull from the pintlo and No.4, by rnising his arm, signals for.he drivers to drive on: Nos. 4 and 5 curry the truil away frowhe pIece and u)) the cunnoneers working to~ether turn thenlsson arou!1tl ]80° and place it lJy the side of the piece (196) ;

ol'l.4 and 5 low('r the tmll to the ground. No.4 sets the brakend all of the cunnoneers working on the caisson take their

The :Piece: The gunner Rnd No.1 jump to the trail handles.o.2 runs around the muzzle of the gun to the wheel that is to



122 MANUAL FOR FIELD .ARTILLERY.

become the right ",11(>e1of the piece unlimbered, and standRread~' to assist In such l110wments of the carriage as may benecessarr. No.3 runs around the muzzle of the gun to the wheelthat Iq to hecome the left wheel of the piece llllllmbered, unustaruls ready to assist In such movements of the carriage as may

be necessarr. The gunner unlatches the l)intle and, assisted bYNo.1, rnises the trail from the plntle. The gunner, hy raisinghis arIll; sl~nals for the drivers to drive 011. The gunner andNo.1 lower the trail to the ground and all the cannoneers at thepiece take their posts. .Limbers: To take post in rear of the carrIages, each caIsson

lIm1.>erInclines well to the rlg-ht, moves to the rear, executes nleft a1.>out,and halts so that the heads of the lead horses or theend of the pole wlll be 2:> yards from the rear of the caisson.'Each piece limber follows the caisson llm1.>er,passes around Inrear of It, and halts so as to 1.>ea1.>reast of It and 2 yards to Itsright.In horse batteries, or when Nos. 0 nnu 7 are not present, Nos.

2 and 3 perform the duties prescri1.>ed for Nos. G and 7, respec-tively, as soon as the piece trail is lo\vered to the ground.

TO FIRE TO THE FI.ANK.

201. The caisson 1.>elDgon either side of the pIece, 2 yardstrom and abreast of It: ACTION RIGIIT (LEFT).]~xecuted according to the prInciples of action front amI action

rear, with the follOWing modifications: After the carrIages areunllmberec1 the muzzle of the gun and the trail of the caissonare tltrned In the direction of tire, and the carrlnge In re(\r iiirun up to Its proper position on the line. The carrIage on theside toward which fire Is to be del1Yered Is 11rst esta1.>lIshed in

position, and then all the cannoneers assist in bringing up thecarrIage In rear to Its proper plac('.LImbers: To take po~t In rear of their carringef;, the limber

farthest from the flank toward which tire Is to he delivere(l moveout first, wheel nway from the direction of 1il'l\ nnll after hav-ing gained st.:tlicient dIstance to the rear execute an about nndhalt at the prescrIbed posItion. The other limbers follow andtake position in n simUar manner.




DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING.., j

202. The carriages being in position unlimbered and In marchto limber to the front and rear: 1. Limber, 2. FRONT AND

EAR.. •. . •

In each squad the gunner awl No.1 face to the rear at theirosts. No.2 plnees himself on the right of the gunner, facingo the rear. No.3 jumps across the trail of the piece and placesiml:lclf on the left of No.1, facing to the rear. Nos: 4 and 5asten to the front of the caisson; No.4 releases the brake, andoth place themselves with their backs toward the chest, closep against the footboards, No.4 on the right, No.5 on the leftthe trail.' No. 6 passes around the right of the piece and

luces himself on the right of No.4. No.7 runs around the left

f the caisson and places himself on the left of No.5.. .The Umbers are brought up so llS to move squarely across theirection of the trails and so that the wheel nearest the trail w1l1

about a foot outside of the lunette.When the axle of the piece limber is nearly in Une with the

rUll, the gunner commands: 1. Limber, 2. HALT. The limberalh and is then swung around and again halted so that theole is pointing in the direction of the trail and so that theintle is almost over the lunette. As soon as the limber has

altf'd in this position, the gunner and No.1 spring to the trailandles amI raise the trail. Nos. 2 and 3 jump to the gun wheelsnd prepare to assist in any movements of the carrIage thatay he necessary. The gunner and 1"0. 1 place the lunette overhe ptntIe; the gunner latches the pintle.'I'he caisson is 11mbered in the same manner, No.4 giving theommands for halting the 11mber; Nos. 4 and 5 handling therail; No.4 latching the pintIe; Nos. G and 7 assIsting by work-ng on the wheels In (lny movements of the carriage.

All the cannoneers take their posts nt the carriages limbered.203. To the rear: 1. Limber, 2. REAR.No.4 releases the brake. The caisson Is turned around 180. ;os. 4 and 5 carrying the' trail away from the piece. Nos. 1nlI 6 turn the top of theIr wheel toward the trail: Nos. 3nd 7 turn the top of their wheel away from the trail; theunner and No.2 assist by pulling and pushing on the chest.he caisson having been turned, all the cannoneers working




together run the caisson 20 ~rnrds straight to the ren r (If theline of guns. 1\08. 4 and 5 lower the trail find nil the ('alllit)llL'('r~

take their posts for lImhering. The lillll.wrs nre brollg:ht up amIthe Umbering is completed us descrIbed In ll:ll'l1grnph 202.

TO LEAVE THE PARK,

204. At the conclusIon of the instruction in. the l)urk theInstructor sees that the carrIages are properly cared for am!then causes the squads to form in front or rear of theil' car.riages. The squad~ may th£'11 be closed by the cOllunullll: 1,Squads right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Close, 4. MARCH. At the lastCOmml1nl!the leading squad hnlts antI the rpar SqUflds ('Jose 011 itin quick time and halt. If eXl'cuted in double time, the leadIng.squad resumes or continues the quIel>:time I1t the last commandand the other squads 'take the quIel>:time when they me closed.Or, the squalls may be faced to the right or left. At the com.

mand: 1.. Close, 2. MARCH, the leading squad stands fast andthe others close on it.

Atter forming the squad column the men are marched off.

Section 10. Battery Inspection, Dismounted.,

733. The battery being in line, the captain causes the ranks'to be Ol)(>nedand commands: l'repare for inspection (119), Atthl1t command the lieutenants carry saber.734, The' captain returns saber, inspects the chiefs of pIn.

toon, the front rank. the rear rank, and the file closers, begin.nlng on the right of each and returning by the left and rear.During the inspection of the rnnks the lieutenants face aboutanll stand at ease; they may be directed to accompnny thecaptaIn or to n~slst in the Inspection. Upon the completion ofthe inspection the lieutenant~ face to the fl'Ont nnll )'('snme theattention; tlle captain cl.oses the ranks nnll dIsmIsses tlte battery.735. Should the inspector be other than the captaIn, the lutter

opens runks and, When the inspector approaches, brln.1!8 the bat.tery to atteI.ltloll, faces to the front, and salntes. ~'he snlnteacknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces ubout, commands:Prepare for inspection, and again faces to the frol1t~




The inspection proceeds. as before; the captain returns. sabernd accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter has inspectedim. ,At inspection of quarters the inspector is accompanied by theaptain emd follo\ve<l by the other officers, or by such of them

s he may designate; the men, without accouterments, standncovered near their respective bunks; in camp they stand cov-rell, without accouterments, in front of their tents; upon theppJ'OIH:hof the inspector the first sergeant commands: ATTEN-

salutes, if covered, and leads the way through theuartl'rs or camp.

Section 11. The Soldier Mounted.

PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTION.

HORSE EQUIPJ,IENT.

, 225. The Instructor Indicates the different articles of horseUipment, instructs the men In the nomenclature of the '\'"nrlou~arts, as given in the Handbook, and explains the uses of these

TO FOLD THE BLANKET.

226. The blanket, after being- well shaken, will be folde<lA/X thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up b~' two fil1jncentrners, the longer edges vertical; double it lengthwise, so theld wlll come between the It U " and" S," the folded corner ine J(>ft hanl}; take the folded corner between the thumb nndreflnJ::er of the right hand, thumb pointing to the left; t'llpe h.'ft hand down the folded edge two-thirds of 1t~ length GnuIze It with the thumb and second finger; rnlRe tbe hands toe height of the shoulders, the blanket extended betw('('n th('m;

in~ the hands together, the double fold falling outwUl'lI; 1':;69e folded corner from the right hand Into the left haud, betw(:'ene thumb and forefInger, slip the second finger of the rightnd IJetwecn the folds, seize the double folded corner; turn thet, dlseng-aged corner In and seize It with the thumb nnd fore-ger of the right hand, the second finger of the right handetching and evening the folds; after evening the folds. grnspe corners and shake the blanket well In order to smooth the




folds; raise the blanket and ho1<1the 11pper edge between thechin and brenst; slip the hands down halfwn~', the first two fingers outside, the other fingers and thumb of ench hnntl inside;seize thE' blanket with the thumbs and first two fingers, let thepart under the chin fall forward; hold the blanket up, arms l;'X

tE'uded, even the lower edges; retake the middle points betweenthe thumb and forefinger and 111rt the outside part. over therl~ht arm; the bl:tnket is thus 11el<1before placing it on thehorse.

TO peT o~ THE DLA~KET AND SURCI!'\GLE.

227. Thf> instructor commands: BLANKET. Approach thehorse 011 the netlr sidl" with the blanket fo1<le<1antI held as just

deserilwd; plnce It well forward on his back by tossing the partof the blanket over the right arm to the off side of the horse,stlll keeping hohl of the mIddle points; slide the blanket once 01

twice fl'om front to rear to smooth the hair, being careful toraise the blanket in bringing it forwar<1; place the blanket withthe forefinger of the left hand on the withers an<1 the forefingerof the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; it shouldtht'll be w('ll forwaru ";ith the edges on the left side; removetht> lotks of mane thnt may be under it; pass the buckle end of

the surdngle OWl' the middle of the blanket and buckle It on thenear side, u little below the edge of the blanket.

TO SADDLE.

228. POI' instruction, the saddle may be plnced '1 :rards inrear 01' In front of the horse. The f;tlrrups are crossed overthe S('ut, the right stirrup uppermost; then the clnchll. and clnchastl't1}l are crossed above the stirrups, the strop uppermost. . ~'he

bluukt>t, without the f:urelnglc, haVing heen plnted as previouslyexp!n Ined (227), the instrul'tor COllllllll.n<.1~J:ADDLE.

~('(7.P the IlOlllnwl of the sadllle with the left haud amI thecfilltle with th(o right; Hl'lll'Ol1th the horse on the IlPnr side fl'omthe tllredion of the ('roup and [Ilace the c('ntN. of the ~lId111e onthe middle of the horse's back, the front emls of the side barsabout three finger widths \)('hln<l the lloint~ of. tlH~ shoulderblades; letdown the c1r.chn strnl) nnll c1nchn; pass to the Of'f

i




saddle; pass to tlle near side, cross the cInch a strap over thesaddle; grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cuntle withthe riJ:"ht, remove the saddle over the croup and plnce it in frontor in the rear of the horse as may be directed, pommel to thefront; it in the stable, place the saddle 011 Its peg; grasp the

blanket at the withers with the left hand and at the loIn withthe rl~ht; remove it In the ulrectlon of the croup, the eugeSfalllng together, wet slue In, anu place it across the saddle,folueu euge on the pommel.

TO rUT ON THE DOUDLE DRIDLE.

231. BRIDLE: Take the double reIns In the rIght lumd, thecrownplece in the left; approach the horse on the near sIde; sUp

the reins OWl' hIs heau, letting them rest on his neck; take thecrownplece in the rIght han<1 and the lower left branch of thecurb bit in the left, the forefinger ngalnst the mouthpiece; bringthe crownpiece in front of nnd slightly below Its proper posltlon;insert the left thumb into the left sIde of the mouth nbove thetush; press upon the lower jaw, insert both bits by raising thecrownplece, then wIth the left hand drllw the ears gently undel'the crownpiece, beginnIng with the left ear; nrrnnge the fore.lock, 8('eure the throat latch nnd the curb clmin, takIng care to

ndjust them properly. .The brIdle with ~mame bit only, use<1 on team horses, Is puton in n sImIlar manner.A brIdle with curb bIt only Is not permitted to be used on the

horses of in<1IVidually mount('(l men, because the curb when usedalone Is a pow(>rful In~trull1ent reqUirIng such dexterity In its usethat only an expert horseman on a perfectly traIned horso Iscnpable of usIng It with sufIlclent dellcacy nn<1 dIscretion toohtaln perfeet ('ontrol without injuring the horse .

. A horse qUickly re~ent~ nnd Is easIly fl'Ightplll'd by abrnpt Msmlllpn mOH'llH'nt nhout his head, Bridling shouhl therefore betlone III a IIIO~t tlt'lilwrate awl car('ful manller. TIw ellrs aree~peclallr ~ellsltl,"e, an(l extreme care must be usetl in dmwlng'them under the crownpiece and into their Illace. A relIahle testthnt a horse lws not been mistrenteu in brIdllng Is that he per.mlts, without sign ot fear or resentment, the gentle stroking othIs ears.




bit pInches the lips, while a wIde one works nbout and bruiseSthe lips and the bars. The mouthpiece Is best examined fowIdth by fnspectin~ It from the undel'side of the lower jaw .. 0'

(r:) The cheek straps are ndjusl('(1 so thnt the mouthpiece othe bIt rests as near as possible opposite the chin groove, hu

touching neither the tushes nor the C()I'lI(ll'~ of th(~ mouth. Generall~' speaking', the bit should rest nhollt 1 Inch nhove the tusheSof horses and ahout 2 Inches above the corner teeth of mares. IrIdes below the snaffle.

(d) The curb chain is fastened outside Hnd below the snnme.It must be twi8t('(1 to the rlg-ht until it !iesllut, llnd it shouldrest In the' chin gToove opposite the moutllpicce of the bit. Inot properly adjusted, it wIll have a tendcncy to ride up nhfpress upon the sharp hones of thC' lower .1aw. The curb chainshould be loose enough to admit the flnt of two fing-PI's betweeIlIt and the chin groove when the branches of the bit are in linewIth the cheek strnps, "'hC'1l hrought to hear the brnnchesof the curb hit shoul(1 make nn angle of ubout 4;:;0 with the Hueof the horse's mouth.

(e) The throatlatch and brow band are fitted fiS dIrected inparagraph 233.

TO RE:\IOVE THE BurnT,E.

235. UNBRIDLE: t:"nhuckle the throatlatch. Gru~pthe mId"dIe of tlte rein~ with the crownplec(' in tIle rlg-ht hand. ~J.'akhol.l of the bit or hits with the left hnnd. Curefully and gentlY'sllp the (,I'ownpiece over tht~ ears, at the sume time stt"Cldying thebit~ with the left hn n(] ~o thf'Y will not roug-hly st!'lke agaInst thetu!o;he~ or teeth. StrH.I~hten the rein~ out tOf,:'pt!l<.'rllnd fold themover the crownplece. Hang' the bridle on Its !,C'g.

TO STAND TO IIF:EL.

236. STAND TO HEEL: Eu('h mun stands at nttentloll 1 :y:m]in rear of and facing hIs h('('1 post. At till' picket line he is 1~:anl in rear of un(1 facing his horse.

TO STAND TO nORAE.

237. STAND TO HORSE: Each man places hlnu-ielf, facIng tothe front, on thc.near sitle of his horse, e~'ps on a line with the




front of the horse's }}('n(l,so that he ('an see alon~ the frout, anutnk('!'l rhe position or nHf-ntion, except that the right Ila:l'J, had,lIPI)('l'lllost, grnsps both l'(~lnf-l,foretingel' hetwepn them, aboutGInc~he:,;rom the bit. The l'pins fire on the hors(~'s neck.The ]eft ant} right sides of the horse, facing to his front, are

called the near UIll} off bleIl's, rcspectiYe]y.

TO I.EAD OUT.

238. The men being nt stnnd to horse in the stable or at the))ie!;:C't line, nnd the horsC'~ <:'quIppNl with snnflle bridles, thehh;f"lH'fol' Inc1!C'ntes the pInel' of formation and comm:.ll1fl:'):tEAD OUT.

glH'h man, ho](1In;: hl8 hand well liP nnd firm. )cn(18 his horse,\vlthollt looking nt him, to the place desl~natc<1 l)~'t1wlnstrnctor.If the horHe shows n. cllsposltlon to rnsh or to resist being leu,the HoldIeI' takes the sname reIns from the. horse's neck, takesthe end of the reins In the left hand anu wIth the right handho)cllng the reins near the bIt leads the horse as before. Whenlending through °a low or narrow doorway, the horse should beC'J.ulf'l(>c}y the, voice or caresses nnd not allowed to pass throughh\11'1' 1(>(11. To preYe'nt the hOl"Sefrom rl1shin~ through a narrow

l\ooJ'\\'a~' the Instructor)]Jn~r

dIrect the solcller to fnee toward theJ10I'/o;(', holding on(' l'C'In In ene!l hnn(l dos/~ to the bit, and lendl1l11lby Rter)pln~ backwnr(I; ufter paRsing the (}oorwny the 801-

ip\, leads the horse fiS before'.Upon nrrI\In~ at the place designated for tlw formation, the

nstrllctor c1IRpo8es the men upon a line at. InterYals of onehorH(' length, men nt stand to horse and horse'S correctly dIg-

nnd perpen(}kl1lar to the line of men.A Ilorsc 18 eOl'l'e'dly disposed WhC'1lhe stands squ:'l!'C'ly Oil all

our feet, hnYln~ hf:;~hC'fUl,neck, ancl hody In1ll1e.

ALIGN)'lEl"TS.

239. The men he-lng in line nt n halt nt stnIHl to horse, thenstl'Uctor sees that the men on the flank town]'(l which thelignment is to he' made nre in the de'slred position nnd com-llnnds: 1. Right (Left), 2. DRESS,.3. FRONT. Executed us .1n

'




The SoldIer Dismounted, except that the left hand is not placed.on the hip, and each man moves his horse forward or backward,as may be necessary, to align him. The instructor may plachimself on either flank amI give a general alignment by. orderingIndividual men to move their horses backward or forward .

. TO ],fOUNT.

240. With saddle.-The soldier bein~ at stand to horse: 1. :Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT. At the command prepare to mount,face to the right, take a step to the ri1!ht to be opposite theshoulder of. the horse: at the same time seize the end of thereIns in the rI~ht hand and pull them taut enough to givegentle, even bearIng on the horse's mouth; cross the reins tla

on the crest and grasp them with the left hand, which also holdsa lock ot the mane. Place the left foot in the stirrup, assistedby the right hand if necessary, bring the left knee against thesaddle, and place the right hand Upon the cantle. .At the command MOUNT rise by an. efi'ort of the right leg

aIded by the arms, the left knee bent and pressed against the sad.dIe, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward toprevent the saddie from turning: bring the right foot by the side

of the left. Change the right hand to the pommel, pass thoright leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it, Qnd sItdown lightly in the saddle. Put the right foot in the stirrup,assisted by the right hand if necessary: take the reins as llcrc.after prescribed. .The instructor takes care that the rider in adjustIn~ the reinS

provokes no movement and deranges in no manner the posltionof the horse's head.

The instructor cautions the rider to nvoid touching the horso

with the left toe in mounting. This fnult begets nearly all theresistance of the horse to standing quietly while being mounted.241. Without saddle.-Similarly executed (240) except that

the rIght hand is placed on the bacl\: near the withers. At thecommand mount, the soldier sprIngs upward and forward, benr.Jng the weight upon the hands and wrists. lIe remains for a.moment In this position, then throws tbe right leg, Imce bent,over the croup without touching it and £Ilts flown lightly on thohorse's back.




242. With saddle having stirrups crossed or detached.-Exe-CUtf'l}as prf'scrihed for mounting without saddle, except that thel'IA'ht hund i8 plac('l} on the pommel of the saddle..' .243. To mount from the off side.-Executed as in mounting

frolll the near side but by inverse means.244. If the command be mount the men execute all that basbeen prescribr<I for prepare to mount and mount.

TO DISMOUNT.

245. With saddle.-l. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT. Attilt' ('olllmnnd prepare to di5mount, pass the right rein into theJeft hand un<I g'J'a~p wIth thIs hand a lock of the mane; remove'

the right foot from the stirrup nnd place the rIght hanti onthe pommel. .. .At the command dismount, rIse upon the left stirrup, pass therIght leg, knee hent, ov('r the croup without touching the horse,find brIng the right foot by the side of the left, the left kneeagainst the saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightlyforwnrd. Descend lightly to the ground anti take the positionOf stand to horse. . . ..246. Without saddle.-Slmllnrly execute<} (245) except that

the I'/ght hand is }lla('(~<lon the bacl\: nenr the withers. At theCOllllllan<Idismount, rIse upon the hands nnll wrbts; puss theight leg, bent, over the croup without touching it, carry it to

81<10 of the left; remain n moment ill this position nnti comeIghtly to the ground, the heels joined, the knees bent. Take theosItion of stand to horse. .With saddle having stirrups crossed or detached.-Exccuted asreserlbed for dismounting without f;fiudle, exc<,pt that the right.nnl}Is placed on the pommel of the ~lH1I11e.247. To dismount on the off side.-l. To the right. 2. Prepare

o dismount. 3. DISMOUNT. Ex('cute(l liS in dbmountlng fromhe Ilf'nr sIde but by inverse menns. .248. 'l'he men fire fr('quentI~. vrllctiee<1 in mounting and dIs-

nountin~ on the off side.249. If the command bo dismount, the men ('.xecute all thatas Leen prescrIbed for prepare to dismount and dismount.



13t MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

HOLDING THE REINS.

. 250. In both hands.-The snaffle reins' are' held one "In ~acbhand, the rein coming into the hand under the little finger nndpassing out over the second joint of the forefinger, on whIch

the thumb, slightly bent, presses and holds It. The. bIght othe reIns fnlIs to the front and right. The reIns bellringequally should 'be so held that the rider feels lightly the horse'Smouth, the forearms horIzontal, angle between arm and fore.arm approxImating 90

0

; elbows sllghtly to the rear, with thefleshY' part of the forearm resting llghtly against the bodY'the hands closed, backs outward and Yertical; wrIst, and bacl\. of hand straIght and In continuation of the forearm; handSapprOXimately {) inches apart and carrIed about one hand'S

breadth above the wIthers.The double bridle reins are held two in each hand, llS eX

plained for the single reins above, except that the bIt reIn'comes into the hand above the lIttle. finger, whIch separateSthe two reIns.In one hand.-The snaffle reins are held os explnlne<'t for two

'hands, except that the rIght (left) reIn comes Into the left(right) hand above the llttle fInger, which separate the tworeins.

In the left hand the double bridle reins are held as explainedtor both hands, except that the right reins come into the hand,one on each sIde of the second finger, the snaffle rein uppermost,aU four reins bein~ pressed upon the second joint of the fore.fin~er by the thumb. .In the right hand they are so held that there is one rein above

each nnger, left snaffle reIn uppermost, and that four reins come. out under the little finger.

TO TAKE THE REINS IN ONE lUND •.251. 1. In left (right) hand, 2. TAKE REINS.The snaftle refns.-Place the left hand opposIte the middle of

the body nnel place in it the right rein, bolding, tbe reins as'explnine<! (250). .'J 1,., ,'.; :"

The double reins.-Place the left hand opposIte the middle ofthe body; turn the right wrIst to the left until the back is up;

~



136. :MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

. The stirrups should benr only the weight of the leg: about one.third of the foot should be Insf'rted In the stirrup, so that theball of the foot rests on the trend, the heel lower thn n the toe.The toe Is Inserted In the stirrup so us to cause the fiut o~ the

stirrup 8trnp to rest against the leg.

Placing too much weight on the stirrup disturbs the sent nndcontracts the leg, hindering Its freedom of action.If the toe Is not Inserted far enough the rIder rIsks losIng hIS

stirrup; if Inserted too far suppleness Is diminished.For the extended gallop, for the use of wenpons, and for

lenplng obstacles the foot Is inserted fUlly In the stirrup.The Instructor teaches the soldier how to adjust hls.stlrrupS

by usIng his arm to measure the proper lmgth of strap.

POSITIO:S- OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED.

256. The posltlondeseribed below should be considered nstandard toward which all riders should gradually approx:!.mate ..

ELEMENTARY TRAINING IN HORSEMANSHIP.

1. TEACHI~G THE AIDS A~D THEIR CORRECT ApPLICATION IN

CONTROLUNG THE HORSE.

288. Tht' means at the disposal of the riller for cont"olllngthe movements nnd gaits cf hIs horse are his legs, reins, andweight. These are termed the aids. On sultahle .occasions theaids are assisted or emphasized by n proper use of the spurs,the Whip, and the voice. According to their very natur(~, the legsare the driving whIle the reins are the restraining aids. Both'are etTectlvely assisted by the weight of the rider. Of the two.aid~, the driving and restraining, the former are overwhelm.

In~ly prE'(lomlnat!ng. As the training of n horse or rIder pro.gresses. the aids must become morc refincd and less noticeableuntIl the horse, without perceptible effort on the part of therider, seems to obey the latter's thoughts alone.

LEG AIDS.

289. The legs should be free from all Involuntary movementand very steady in .their action. A swinging leg confuses the

o •



MANUAL FOR FIELD. ARTILLERY. 187

horse., The legs act by the pressure of the calves with heelswell shoved down.' They are applied gradually, according toth~ ';c!lsibil1ty of the 1101'1';(1,o that the latter w111not be sur-llrli;('d unt} give a sudllen start. If pressllre alone is insutIictentthe rider increases the uction uy taps with the c~lves, incrensingIn s~verity until ouedience is obtained, when the ucHon shouldcenfH\ ,

The position of the 10\\'01' leg determines the nature of itseffpct. Thus, if both leA'S81'e applied near the rear edge of tIlegirth the effect 8hould 1Je to drin> the horse forward or to in-crpuse his gait. while if one leg is drawn nnd applied a littlefurther to the rear its effect, according to the' intensity of itsaction, should he either to induce or to oppose a lateral displace-.n1ellt of the haunclles. Wh(;'n the leg is thus drawn to the rearits }losition llnd uction are referred to as either sideward driving

or supporting,REIN AIDS •

• i 290. The reins serve to prepnre the horse to move, to permitan extension of his gnU, to reduce his gait, or to change tHree-tlon. I~'or effects to be exuct the reins must mnintuin contact,that Is, a soft elastic bearing of the bit on the bars of the mouth.A mnn who. rides with this soft elastic bearing-that Is, with

Contact-is said to hnve a li~ht hand. It is obtained by main-taining n smooth andstendy seat, by keeping thE' muscles orthe shoulders untl arllls relaxed, and by keeping those of the:tingpr8 ,and wrists 80ft und springlike in their action. Thehun(ls should be lwrfectly stendy, to insure which there shouldbe no motion of the :-;houhlers or elbows. . .A few men in seeking' light hands riue with lom~e reins, This

Is no hand, and should 1Jeayolded because the rider, haTing lostcommunication with the horse's lllc>uth. uoes not have his mount

11l1lh~rinstant or prompt control. With the l:eins loose and1iallplng the indications of the hand will not reach the horse,or if they do they will nrrive confused or in the form of brutalnncl nwkwurtl jerks.A heavy hand Is one which maintains such strong anu constant

llrc8sure 011 the horse's mouth as soon to deaden it nnd destroyIts ijensibilit~T. A heavy hnnd soon gives a horse a hard mouth.'




In producing these various effects the reins act by n tensIonor n ~'iel<1lng. With a well-tralneu horse n sutticient increaseof tension cun usurill~' be pro<luced by a mere closing of thefingt'l's and hy an inward ben<llng of the wrist. In doing thiSthe mld<lle joints of the fingers approach the body and the littlefinger moyes upward. 'Vhen a stronger effect is necessary thearm must take part in the moyement. The increased action ofthe reins must cease as soon as the horse obeJ's the indication.

Till" rein is ~'Ield(ld when the little finger nppronches thellOr:,e's mouth while the hand mnintains contact. It is ;rieldl'l.lin nil those cns~s where it Is desired to give the horse the free-dom necessary to permit him to move out or to increase his gaIt.If It Is intended to let the horse haye suflicient freedom to ex-tent! his neck, the whole arm shouhl take part III the movement

or the reins shOUld he permitted to slide through the fingerR •.The full effect of the rein aids cnn be produced only whenthe two reins act reciprocally. .A horse \\"111obey the rein on oneside b~' merely bending an,! turning the helH! nn(! neck flro\ln(1to that '5lde. This, then, become~ the inner or direct rein. Inorder to exe('ute a turn properly, M well ns to llmIt the bendof the llead nnd neck, the counter nctlon of the other rein isnecessary; it then Is termed the outer or supporting rein. Itsaction Is usunlly n slight restraint of the hand, but ma~', under

circumstances, increase to un active resistance or reIning in.Either rein may be opened out away from the neck or closed innn(! bearing against it.To execute n turn when riding with the reins In two hands,

the Inner hund Is turned upward toward the body of the rider.the little finger rlsln~ toward the inner brenst; this shorteningof the Inner rein wlll ('ausp the horse to bend an(! go into theturn. The execution Is fnult~. if the rider lJults the hend antineck aroun .. until they are ore the curve of the turn. This I~ Il

fault most ellslIy acquire .. and most (UtIicult to correct. Theouter hand ~'Ields just suftlciently to pt.'l'mlt the horse to obeythe shortening of the inner rein, nnd determines and regulatesthe radius of the turn by the outer supportlIlg' rein beurlngagainst the 11l.'el\: of the horse. Each hand should remain on It~proper side; .:'arr~'in~ the hands lat('I'ally across the withers istault~.. This comLlned use of the inner or direct rein nnd the



MANUAL FOR FIELD.ARTILLERY. 139

outer or supporting rein is the most favorable for tenching the]f'Iohl Artillery horse, int"ended and used for draft, to step freelyinto the turn for which his hend has been set nnd his neck bent.'l'he direct rein alone finds constant application with the FieldArtllIery driver in the control of his otrhorse, as, for instance,a. feellng of this horse's right rein to cause him to bend andst(\P into a turn to the right. . .. With the reins in one hand the turn is similarly executed,exC(~pt that the outer rein predominlltes In its bearIng actionagainst the neck. Here the inner rein is shortened by turningthe little finger toward or mvay from the bouy (II' by adjustingthe. reins before the turn was executed. The action of thehanll is fnuIty if it crosses the withers. .All action of the reins should diminish in intensltv when

obeuience begins, anu cease entirely as soon as the desired result1s secured.. .11'01' equitation worl;: riders can not be too strong in their

legs, and very few of them are sufticiently soft and elastic Inthe Uf~eof their hands. 1\1ost of the trouble the rider has Inhandling hIs horse can be trllced directly to too little use of thele~8 and too much use of me hanus.During elementary instruction in equitation the reins should

be 'habitunlly carried in both hands, as this obtains quicker

results in the matter of hands anu in the manageability of the1101'8es. However, to prepare the rider for his work in driving,ritllng w1th the reins in olle hnnd must not be neglected.The buttocks bearing equally upon the saddle and as far tor-

'Ward as possible.~''I'he thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side,clasping the horse evenly and stretched only by their own'Wel~ht and that of the low(lr legs.'l'he lmees bent and flexible.

\ 'rhe lower legs faIllng naturally, the calves In contact withthe horse without pressure; the toes dropping naturally whenthe rIder Is without stirrups. .'I'he back supple and never hollowed.'I'hc upper part of the body easy, free, and erect.

I The shoulders thrown back evcnly.'I The arms free, the elbows fal1lng naturally.

"




The head erect without stiffness.Eyes alert and sweeping the horizon .•The reins held as heretofore prescribed •.This position may be mouified by the instructor to suit "arying

conditions and unusual conformations ..257. The bouy anu the lower legs are moyuble and should

be under the control of the l'Itlel', ucting Intprmlttently as aidsfor ~ui<lillg the horse 01' as n UWUllSof eomhnttlng his resistnnce.TIle thigh, on the other llUll<l, should rt'llluill fixe<.! immoyU-

bly to the ~llddle eX{'t'IJt while )lostin~ ut the tl'Ot. ~'his fixityshould he obtained. llot U:.' the pressure of the knees, but bYthe cHnging of the buttocks. which is secure<l by the SUPI)lenesSof the loins nnd the relaxation of the thiglls.If the buttocks are too far back, the rider Is unable to con-

form to the' mowment'J of the horse anu mrriE'S forward theupper pn.rt of the body. This defect Is remedied by sitting wellforwar<l in the <lip of the saddle,

If the thl~h is too neurly horizontal. the rider fs doubledup nnd his power of action (llminished ; If the thigh Is too DE~arlyvertical. the rider is on the crotch lllHI lucks en.se.To sum up: The ri:1('r should tuke. a sitting position with the

thi~hs IncHned downward.

The various defects of posltion are overcome by suitnble sup-

pUng exercises.THE RESTS.

258. Being at stand to horse, the comman<.1s' are: AT EASEand REST, which are ('xecuted as prescribed In The Soldier Di:o;-mounted. except that ('n<'11 soluier retains his holtl of the reinsto keep his horse in place.. ,

Beln~ nlOunted and at a halt. the ('olnuull1<1snre: AT EASEnntl REST; 1f marching. ROUTE ORDER. At the cOlllmand atease the floldler nHl~' turn his 11('1\<1nd llllll~e slight chllnges ofposition, but pres('l"\"es silence .

.At the comman<l rest or route order, the soldIer mllY turn 111sheau. mllY tall.:, anu mnke f;llght ('hllDgeS of position, but mustnot lounge on his horse.To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. The sol-

<11er, if dismot1Dted, takes the position of stan<.1 to horse; ifmouDted, he takes the position 01' the floldiel' 111onnte<.1.

'



. ;MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 141

TO DIS1HSS THE SQUAD.

259. The squad being In lin'e at stand to horse: 1. By theright (left, or right and left), 2. FALL OUT.'l'he mnn on the right lenus his horse 1 yar.d to the front

anll then uirectly to the stable or picket line. Each of the other111<:11 E-xecutes in succession the snme movement so as to followthe horse next on the l'ight at a uistance of 1 ~'ard .. BC'ing in column of tiles or twos, at the command FALL OUT,the leading riuer or the riuer on the right of each two leadsout IlS prescribed find is. followetI by the other riders In turn.':rhe men remove, clean, find put the equipments In place, find

Cure for antI secure their horses unuer the direction of theinstructor.

, 'I'he instructor, having sntisfietI himself by inspection that thehorses .antI equipmcnts are properly cared for, and that thepre('(\utlons requirel.1 for the care of horses on their return from,exercises have been observetI, orders 1hat the men be fallen In,:marched to the battery parade, and dismissed.

THE WEIGHT •

. . 291J The weight of the ritIer when properly used In connec-

tion with the rein~ antI the legs is a \"ery important aid, which,InO!'(tover, is entirely independent of the sensibility of the horse'smouth and sides. Its use enables the horse to understand Ploreintelligently find more easily to obey the leg and rein aids.'1'he use of the rider's weight ns an aid will work to the best

tl.dvonta~e if the horse's and the rider's centers of gravity werepreviously in the snme vertical line. The knack of going withthe horse lies in the l1.bllit~' of the rlUer to harmonize. his centerof gravity with that of his' hOl'se. The rider who Is properly

gollil::'with his horse should feel as if he und his horse were onein 011movements. It Is also the ensiest way for a horse to carryn rll1er's weight. On the other hand, n rider who does not pos-seSR this knaclt of going with his horse, by a faulty placing of biswei~ht, will disturb both the gait and the carriage of his horse.With a correetly gaited horse, the centers of gravity of horse

and riuer will. both fnll in the sume vertical line if the latter

~



142 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTnLERY.

maintains a correct sent. anu carries his upper body erect.Bverr devIation from this direction denotes a weight aid.The rider must then be warnE:'d not to hinder the movementS

of the horse by a bad division of his weight, but, on the contrarY',to favor thE:'1llby acting always in the dIrection sought.

In ll1ovin~. stoppIng, turnIng, anu on two tracks, the rider, bY'carrying hi:-l weight on the buttocks or thighs In the dIrectionof lllOren1l'nt m:w facllltate fUllI hasten tile obedIence of the1101'SC'. These <lisillacemE:'nts of the weight are quIte emphasI:wdIn the earl~' hnndling of the ~'oung horse. But they lwco1l1(,moreand more discreet as his tl'alning Is perfectell.

l;SE OF THE SPlJRS.

292,. The spurs are used with. horses that are sluggish Inobe~'Ing the leg aids, as a summons to grenter E'fforts or as nmeans of punishment., It used to nsslst the leg alt1 the spur should he applied moreor l('s:oldelicately, according to th~ sensiblllty of the horse, butnot until the leg aid has already b('cn npplied. The !lositlon ofth(' 10\\,('1' leg must not he dIsturbed Uwreby. The rilleI' shouldavoid tligging Into the horse's sides. To urge a horse to mukegreater use of his strength. or as a menns of punishment, one ormore raps with the spur are ndministered In the same plac<\ thepoInt of npplicnUon beIng imnwdlately In rear of the gIrth.If. on ,'ery rnre occnsions, It becomes nect>ssnry to administer'

punishment. the rilleI' before doing 80 must mnl;:e sure In h1~minll thnt there I~ nctunl diSobcdIf;>nce, thnt hl~ demands hnvenot b(>en too great; nnd thnt he IHI.Snot given ('onfusIng, con.trnlllet\ng. or incorrect indicntIons. Punishment lolhoul/.ln('verhe IHIJllinlstere<1 In the hent of an~er. Such a stllte of mind dl:ol-

flubs the undt>rstnllding between rider nnd hors/.' Hnd t1lHler.mines th<.~confhlence Which the horse should hnye In hi~ rider.An- Ind('pt>ndent s('nt nnd {'({uestrian tact nre nbsolut('ly ncce~.

snry in using the spurs to reinforce the leg aIds .. The recruit should not he perrnittN1 to ride with spurs untilhe has acquIred a proper sent and balance, and until he Jla~Jenmed to npply the aids correctly.




THE WHIP.

THE USE AND ACCORD OF THE AIDS.

293. TIle whip is used principally In training the remount,o tel\ch him to understand the action of the legs. It Is also ofmportant assistance to the Field Artillery dri,er. .. It Is not used in elementary instruction of recruits, since the

endency would be to uepelld on its use rather than to learn theroper application of the legs.

THE VOICE.

,

294. The voice, like the weight, is entirely independent ofthe sensibll1ty of the horse's mouth and sides. It is particularly\7alunble In training the remount to understand and obey therein anll leg aids. It Is not needeu by the expert horseman on a

properly trained horse, nor ShOlllu it be used in the instructionof re~ruits, since the tendency woulu be for the riuer to resortalmost wholly to it, anu thus neglect his reIn and leg aids. Forthe li'lelU Artillery driver It is of important and powerful

assistunce.

295. The beginner must not only learn how and when toappl~' a given aid, hut he must also be maue to understanu why

It slloulu he npplieu.'}'o obtain successful results it is essential tllat the aids be

npplled at the right moment, also that they be applied correctly,as follows: I!'irst, their application must be intermittent, that is,When an aid is employed to effect a movement the action mustbe.relllxeu as n rewnru for obeuience the momellt the horseyielUli in the slightest. The. aid ~hould be reapplied and re-lt~!lKI?(1 Ul1l1 reapplied nnu rl'leased untU the horse has yielded.and complete(l the movement lle8ire(1, In other words, when theueslreu effect hns been gained the apI1licatlon of the particularaid which has been used must cefise Jest the horse becomesImu.'tlsible to. its action. The continual pressure of the legs,for example, would soon make the animal so insensible to legprCl,sure that he woulu notice it no more than he uoes the pres-

SUl'O of the girth.

"

'




Tempo or cadence: This dt>notes the speed with which n horseO\'0rli4a certain distnnce at a certain gait. A proper. concep-ion of tempo Implies nlso the presumption that the steps ortrld('1'l eonstantly follow eneh other in the same uniform inter-nl of time and nre nl\ynys of uniform length .• The tempo isV('ly or slow, depel1(lin~ 11])OJlwhether a great or smull dis- .nee Is ('ove)'(ld in a partieular unit of time.Accurate tempo is the foundation of steadiness in all move-ent. Therefore every rider from the very beginning of hisding instruction must learn to acquire this instinct for cadencend be able to induce or produce it at all gaits and to sustain itniformly throughout any gait,To the right (left) hand: A rider marehes to the right or leftand Il('('ordillgly ns his right or 10ft hnnd is toward the interiorf the F;ehool.

GATHERTXa TIlE HOUSE.

297. Before the horse Is required to execute any mon~mente should he giY<'Jl a pr0paratory signal. 'Vhntever the moye-ent to 1>1.' expeutetl, the si~nnl is always the same. Its objectto Gttrnet his ntt0ntlon antI to pr0pare him for a movement.'hls II'!cn11etl gathering the horse,Having a light }lrcssnre of the bit n~ainst the horse's mouth

nd a light f('pi of Ow 10\\'01' Ipgs against his 8i<10;';::,he rider, inrder to gl1thpr hill1, inerPllseR the pressure of the lower legs,ith llee]s w('1I l';hoYcd t10wl1, nn(l l';lightly increnses the tensionf the l'plns, 'l'hese prCSSlll'('S 111'1.' incr0asf'tl intermittently untile (.Jllstie movell1('nt of t1H~hol's(~ 111lderthe rit10r indicates thate fOI'mer hns obserw'(l tho sigllnl.. If, "'}10n nt a hl1lt, the horse bad,s, or when mnrching de-

tilt' ;!llit, the tension npplle(l to the 1'0111S has b0en tooIf, when llt n llnlt, thl' horse mow's fOl'wnnl, or when

11al'tIlillg'lit' 11\(')'cnsps.thf' pace or g-nit, the Impulse given withe l('~s hus not bp('11met or cOlltrol!('t} hy the l'eins.I~[\('h f01'('e sholl](} exnct!y Imln)]('e the other, and the horse,

"<'tw(,<.'11 t he two, shollh} ft'l'l responsive to the indicationsnlds of the rIder.



148 lrtANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

TO 1[OVE FOR\VARD.

,298. Being at a halt: 1. Forward; 2. MARCH, At the firstcommtmd the rider gathers the 1I0rse; at the second lie simul.taneously (1) pushes Ilis buttocks to the front, (2) acts withboth legs according to the temperament of the horse, (3) euseSthe reins by slightly relaxing the fingers and giving the wrist,without losing contact. The aids cease to be active as soon asobedience 1s obtained.

TO HALT.

299. Being at the walk: HALT. The rider sits well down inthe saddie and gathers the horse; he then simultaneously (1)

closes the fingers on the reins, bending the wrist, nnd, if neCt'S-

surJ', moving the hands in and back with the body; (2) slightlY'increases the pressure of the legs; (3) imposes the weight of hiSbouy against the horse's bnck hy convexlng his loins baCkward.As ioon us the horse slackens the gait ever so little the pres-

sure of the fingers and legs is slightly relaxed to reward himfor his obedience. It is then reapplied and again relaxed untilthe horse has completed the movement uesired~In order to prevent the horse from haltlng entirely on tho

forelegs, the rider must increase the pressure of his legs to

Induce the horse to engage his hind legs farther under the muss.By convexlng his loins and imposing his weight against the mus.culur activity of the horse's back, the rider limits the function.Izlng of the muscles which control IInpUlsion and thus permitsthe hind legs to participate in stopping or In reducing the gait.It Is faUlty to lean buck in un exaggerated position, because ofthe tendenc~' to permit the legs. and thighs to go forwurll andto act with a ut'ad pull of the reins on the horse's mouth; ifdone abruptly, It is paInful to a horse and may Cuuse him tohalt in a hard and joltr manner.In reducin~ the gait a steady pull against the mouth must be

particularly avoided. .

TIlE HALF HALT.

300. The halt halt fln(ls constant applicatIon in the traIningf both horse and rider. It is a brief, energetic action of the




hrough an arc of 90° he is stralghteneti anti then. directed}n(lmaIntained on the new line.H I~ Important that the horse's 1Jo<1~'rom ]Joll to croup beent to conform to the curve over which IH~ is. moving. (PI.

'.rhis will at time~ require a 1l1odlficn tlon Qf the applica-on of. the aids as described above; that is, If the horse tends tourry his h:lUnclws to the inside of the curve the action of the

I(>~ F;hould IlredolJlinnJ-e, while If Ill' tends to cnrry themthe out.side of the cune the nctlon of tl)(' outside leg shouldCtlI)JIlIn:ltl:'. .l>urIIlg' th~ mOVPIllPllt th(' rill('r tn'-('8 (':In' to :;;it ~li~ht1y moren the iIllH.'l' buttock, Without a<1vllndng or drawing back hisutsIde shoul<1er. .When the reins are carrI('<1 in one h:lIHl the action of the sup-

orting or b(,llrin~ rein l)l'l'domlnates.30.5. If the ('OlllllUlllds b(~: 1. Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH;r Right (left) about, ~. MARCH, the arc of the turn Is 45° or", J'Pspectin'I~'.

CIRCLES.

30G. Hh1ing on n elrc]0, when proJ)erly done, is an exerciseh:l ('svecIally valun1Jle for both ri(ler ant] hOI's(\. It teachesrider proverly to coordinate his rein, le~, llll(] weight aids.

y compelling the ini'lide hind l0g to flex itsplf more and to carryore weight than when ridin~ on a straIght line it supples,rengthens, awl incre:lses tlle handincss of the 11Orse.To rIde n clrele properly 111111 (>xllctly, tile hori'lC must be con-antly ehnng-ing <llrect!on.. To (10 thIs he must he hent tonform to the eurvl1turc of the circumference. If the horseprollerly lJcnt Oil thp elrd<\ the Imprint of each inner hindot ~hou](] follow that of tJl(~ inner front foot, nnd the outern(1 foot that of tl1l' onter front foot.

Application of the aids.-lk'fore ~oin~ on the drcle 1'1'0111 nnyck the rIder should gnfh0r t hc horse by ~iving' a half hnltd foJhoul(11h('11slightly dlspl:H'e his ".eight hy sitting a littleore on the Ins!(ln huttoek. 1'he ni(ls nre applied as In therns-thnt Is, the 11111£'1'eg npplietl nt the girth urives theside hind foot forwl11'<l-the i11l1<'1'ein gives the vroper bend



150 XANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY~

and set and conducts the horse on the circle at the tangentpoint. The outer leg applied behind the gIrth prevents thehaunches from falling out. The outer reIn assists the outerleg and regulates the set.. ,

It Is of great advantage frequently to vary the size of thecircle so as to vary the bend of the horse.

TO BACK AND HALT.

307. Being at the halt: 1. Backward. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT.At the first command the rider shoves his loins forward, gathershis horse, and 8traightens him. At the second command hereIns back straight In the. direction of the hind feet, Inducingthe horse to go back qUietly In n straight line, one step at a

time. With each step to the rear the reins llre relaxed as areward for the animal's obedience. The legs take a support.Ing position close to the horse's sides in order to prevent thehaunches from escaping to eIther side. . ..At the third command the action of the reins ceases while the

legs change their action from SUpporting to that of drivingin order to check and stop the movement.Since every loading down of the haunches wlll make the

raising and setting buck of the hInd feet more difficult, therider, if he meets resistance, should be careful not to lean backtoo far, but should Jean forward slIghtly and push his loinsforward. Likewise, the rider must avoid raising the hQrse'seud, since an elevated posHlon of the bead also constrainshe mUscles of the loins and so renders the backward move.ent more dltlicult for the horse. It the horse refuses to back,e should be made to take one or two steps forward or to oneIde on the forehand to fiex: the muscles of the hind quarters

nd advantage then taken of thIs flexed conllitlon to causeim to buck.

Backing Is not correctly done until the horse steps back thoI'.U~hly responsive to the aids and agnlnst the bit.To avoid getting the horses behind the bit the instructor

hould always cause the riders to move their horses forwur4. ntep or two Immediately after halting. BackIng should never.e executed for more than about 5 yards at a time.' •

" " "

-



MANUAL FOR. FIELD ARTILLERY.

TO TURN ON THE FOREHAND •.

161

"I'

308, Being in line or column at the halt: 1. On the forehand~

To the rig-ht (left), or, 2. To the right (left) about, 3. MARCH.

e horse is first put up against the bit, or gathered, The

der then takes a slight set of the head toward the side of thern. The inner right Jeg' is npplicll hehind the girth and whencessary is accompanied by the tlction of the inner rein.e hnunches nre S\Vl1l1g' step hy f:tep around the opposing fore.nd until n turn of noo or 180

0, re~p('('tivcly, i~ completed.

very 8tel) of the haunches Ig regulatel} Hccurntely by the outerpporting leg applied behind the g:rth in sueh a manner thatere Is a decided pause bet".eE'n steps, thereby preventing thentUlChesfrom rushing, Both during and after the mo,'ement

rider's legs nnll seat should insure th:1t the horse does notck hut remains up ngainst the hit. A stepp;ng forwnrd usu.y inlllcates n falling out of the outer shoulder and must beunter'nctetl by the outer rein, The inner rein should not actstrongly as to bend the neck, except incase of a green

jrse th:1t does not um}erstnnll the leg uith;, or with u. horset otTers reslstanee,The turn on the forehnnd 1~ not n real sehooling lesson, be.nse the hnune!Jes fire t1isburueuell finll the horse thrown on the

ehand, li"or this reason it should not be repented very often.As n rule,' turns on the forcha11l1 are Jlrnctlcetl only In thely truinIng of the horse, Their prIncipal purpose Is to teachrider the correct use of the siueward driVing inner leg nid,Inller rein, anI} thl" outer snpporting l0g :lIltl rein,

As t hl) lIl0vel1lC'nt has n g-rcat tcnllenc'y to make the horseuctant In goin;r up lH'Oll1ptl~.against the bit, the turn shoulllnlways hnnH'IUately follo\V('(l by a )llO\"('Jlwut to the front nt ue wnlk or nt u h'ot. antI It should never be exacted of ~.oung

rse~ until the gtrn ight-nhc:1d IllOyelllcut hus lWCll well con.

TO TUUN ON TilE HAUNCHES.

BeIng in lIne or column nt the halt: 1. On haunches, 2.

the right (left), or, 2, To the ri~ht (left) about, 3, MARCH.

e rIder puts his horse against the bit, gathers him, anll sets




the head to the side of the turn. The inner right i'eln beginSand induces the turn, then carried well away from the ned.:,leads the forehand "tep by step around the haunches through nturn of 90°. or' 180", respectively. The inner rIght hind footmust be kept in place during the turn. To accomplish this, the

outer rein should be reined in in the direction toward this foot.The outer hind foot must be prevented from fall1ngout by thesupportIng action of the outer leg. Both of the rider's legs, butespecially the inner one, prevent the horse from stepping' buckduring the turn. It is a lesser mistake if the horse steps for-ward. The rider shoulu place u llttle more of his weight on theinner buttock.

The instructor must see that the rider's legs anu weight areplaced as nbove described and thut the tendency to let the legS

l1y away from the horse'~ sides be c0Il111letely overcome.

4. USEFUL FORMATIONS AND EXERCISES.

'339. The following exercises are not only of value in teach-ing the application of the aids, but they are of use in forming,placing, or marching the squad either in the riding school oroutside.

GUIDIo;S.

340. When two or more soldiers march tn line the tnstnlctor,as f«)on ns the march ts begun, muy <1es!gnnte the element 011

one tlank or the other as the guide of the movement, thusGuide right (left).

The other men align themselves on the gulUe thus InuicateJ.and maintain their intervals from that flank.When marchIng in line nnd the guide is not nnnounCCll by the

ln8tructor. the t>lt>ment In the center is, without indIcation, theguide of the movement.

If marching in column of files, or if marching obllquely, thelendIng element is, without indication, the guide of the move.ment.

The ~Ide is responsIble that the direction and rate of marchare properly r.laintained. •




'1'0 DREAK FROM LINE INTO COLUMN OF FILES.

. ,us

>'341. Deing- boot to boot in line, at a halt: 1. Right (left) by

e, 2. MARCH. The man on the right moves his borse straight

the front at a good walk. 'Vhen within 3 :vards of the track,if outside, when he has advanced 3 lengths to the front, heecutes by the right flank, and takes the truck or moves straightthe new direction. Each of the other men in succession, whenriller on his right has advanced about 2 }'urds, moves his

rse straight to tlle front and executes by the right fianl\: <'11

e line established by the first rider. The mell then follow eacher In column at about one horse leng-th.If marching, all halt at the command march, except the man

the right. The movement is then executed as from a halt.it I~ desired to execute the movement at the collected trot orallop the command for the gait precedes the command march.ach rider first moves one horse length to the front at a walkd then takes up the gait ordered. .If in line with Intervals of one horse length, the movement 18nilarly executeu, each man moving out when the croup of therse on the right Is opposite his own horse's head.If It is desired to march at greater or less distances the

mmand: At (so many) lengths (or yards) distance precedes thest command, and the riders gauge their distance~~ accordingly.Every horse must remain llg-ainst the bit, stand squarel~' on allr it'ct, and absolutely sUB, until the rider ~ives the prope;.s to move out. The rider must then make him move ~trni~httho front and execute the turri properly, and not permit himbll(lUe off to the right. .

'1'0 INCREASE DISTAl"CES IN COLUMN.

342. nelng In column on files fit the halt: 1. To (so .many)gths (or yards), 2. Take distance, 3. MARCH. The leadingan moves out at the command march. The men in rear movet successively, each as soon as the man prdceding him hasned the distance prescribed In the command.If marching at the walk, the leading man continues thealk: the other men halt at the command march and thencute the movement as' before.




If marching at the trot or at the walk und the cOlllmand betrot, the movPIUcnt i~ similarly ex('cuted, the leading man 11I0VCat the trot, the other men take or continue nt the walk, andthen take up the trot successivcly in tinw to conform to the

movement.The ('ommanl1~ are the samf'. und the executloll is similar

when the riders are In column of twos.

TO DJo:CI,E.\S!';IST_\l\'CF:SN COLUMN.

I 343. Hf'jng in column of files at the halt or Ilwrching nt thewalk: 1. To (so many) lengths (or yards), 2. Close, 3. MARCII.The lending rider remains halt(>d or halts. The remuining riderS

move or continue at the walk, cHeh one halting successively,when the distance from the 11e:HIof 11ishorse to the croup of theone in front Is that prescribed in the command.If ma1"('hjn,~ at the trot el" nt the walk llnd the command be

trot, the leading man mon's at n walk. The men in rear COl1~

tlnue at or take up the trot, each Olle tUking the walk as hegains the prescribed distance.The eomman(ls nre the same and the execution similar when

the riders Hre in colullln of twos.

TO I,'OIDIU:'iE TOA I"LA~K }'nou COLUMNOF J!'ILES.

344. 1. Right (left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.The leading mall marehe3 l>~' the right 1lauk; all tll(~ others con-tinue f;traight forwnrti. uncI each Huec('ssively marches by to theright flank when 1 )-nl'cl in 1"<'l11'f the point where the man 1)1"e-ceding him lwg'an to turn. 'The 1(':l(1!ng lllan hnlt~ nt the COIU-

mand; (Oaeh of the others halt when on n line with the lendingman anci to his rkht., The.lllstl'llC't01" ;~ c'm'eful to Sf'<.'that the horse~ when hnH<.'c}are c01"re('t'~. dlspos('(} anc} }lP!'ZlPIHllc:ularto the l l lH\

The execution of this comlllllIHl pinel'S th(' men ill line hoot toboot. Should th(' insl l'UctOl"desire the Inj('rva1 otlwr than thl:-lhe precedes the nboYC..' ('oil1mnnd with: At (so many) lengths (oryards) interval.345. 1. On right (left) int.o line, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad. 4. HALT.

Executed as In the preceding paragl'uph except that ench

'



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. us

an ~uccesslvely, turns to the right when 1 yard beyond theint where the preceding man began his turn. Should thestructor desire an interval other than that of boot to boot,prf'cedes the above command '\vlth :At (so many) lengths (or

rds) interval.TO FORM COLU!IN OF T' ...OS FROM COLUMN OF FILES.

346. BeIng in column of files at the halt, or marchin~ at the1. Form twos, 2. Right (left) oblique, 3. :MARCH. The

ading man moves one horse len~th to the front and halts. ) Theconll man obliques to the ri~ht until uncovered, when he1nrehes straight to the front fiIHl hults boot to boot abreast of

e 111'8tman. The third m:1n closes to 1 ~'ard from hend tooup on the first man, the fourth lll:1n obliques to the right,I so on down the column, each man looking ahead in sufficientme to avoid obliquing out of the column if he is to become theft man In a set of twos.If marching at the trot or at the walk and the command beot, the leading man moves at R walk. The men in rear con-nue nt. or take up, the trot, each one taking the walk as heaches hIs place In column of twos.

'TO FORM: COLUMN OF FILES FROM COT.UMN OF TWOS.

347. Being In column of twos at the halt: 1. Right (left) byle, ~. MARCH. The right man of the leading two movesraight to the front. The mun on his left holds hig horseraight unt11 the first man has passed him, when he executesght oblique. nnd. follows at one horse length from head tooup. l<~nchof the other twos breaks In the same manner as

11K the left man of the preceding two commences to oblique.If marching at the wnll\: the right man of the leffdlng twontillues the wnll\:; the other men halt at the command marchnd then execute the movement as before., It mnrchlng at the trot or at the walk and the command beot; the movement Is simllllrly executed, the right man of theadlllg two moves at the trot. The other men take. or continuet; the walk, nnd then take up the trot successively In time toonfol'm tl) the movement.

_

_




TO BREAK :FROM LIXE INTO COLUMN OF TWOS.

348. Being boot to hoot in line at a halt nnd twos counte(lfrom right to left: 1. Right (left) by twos, 2. MARCH. Executedas in paragraph 341, except that each two in sUCct>RsionmoveS

out together so as to follow in column at n distance of 1 ~'ard.The rider on the sille tOW~1r<lwhich the turn is made marcheSby the flank a~ soon as he has gainell the prescribell distanceto the front. The man on the outside of the turn conforms. lIef;lightly Inci'('nses the gait of his horse so as to come abreast ofthe other man just nfter the turn Is completed .

. TO Fon~r LIXE TO A I'LA~K I'RO:'.[ COLUMN OF TWOS.

349. Executed at the commands, nnd, with obvious modHica.trons,' as prescribed in paragraphs 3.H and 34;).

TO CHANGE DIRECTION.

350. Bein~ in column of files: 1. Column right' (left), 2.MARCH. The leading man marches by the flank, the other menmarch squarely up to the turning point and execute the changeof direction successively on the same ground. Column halt right

(halt left) is similarly executed, the change of direction being45° instead of 00°.

Being in column of twos. The movement is executed by thesame commands as in the preceding paragraph. In each set oftwos the man toward whom the turn is made executes by theflank. The man on the outside of the turn conforms. lie slightlyincreases the gate of his horse so as to come abreast of theother man just after the turn is completed.

u. GAITS.

351. Three gaits are recognized in military equitation, dr111,and maneUH'r, as follows: 'l'he walk, trot, aud gallop. These,however, are subject to different rates of speed. '1'hose usuallyconsidered are as follows: .

, Slow walk: 21 to 3 miles per hour, 66 to 88 yards per minute.Walk (regulation) : 4 miles per hour, 118 yards per Ininute~

'



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 151.

Walk out: 4 to 5 miles per hour, 118 to 147 ~.ards per minute •.Slow trot (a jog trot) : 6 to 6! miles per hour, 176 to 190rds per minute. . .Trot (regulation) : 8 miles per hour, 235 yards per minute.Trot out: 10 miles per hour, 205 yards per minute.

Extended trot: 12 miles per hour, 352 yards per minute.Slow gallop: 9 to 10 miles per hour, 265 to 295 yards per

Gallop (regulation): 12 miles per hour, 352 yards per minute.Extended gallop: 16 miles per hour, 470 yards per minute.The slow trot and slow gallop are the gaits most used in therly training of recruits. The~' are especially valuable foring without reins or stirrups and for the suppling exercises.e slow walk is used when marching with dismounted troops;

is used but little in training the rider.At the regulation or maneuver gaits experience has shownt the speed Is such as, on the average, to render the horsepable of longer sustaine(l fiction without waste of energ~', andt his endurance and useful worl\: are accordingly greatern at the other speetls. Extenued speed at any gait rapidlyhauRts a horse and should therefore be avoided, while a sloweed at any gait does' not worl\: the horse to his limit ofeatel'lt efficiency. The regulation gaits are therefore usedbitually when riding out of doors .. The work in the extendedea during' the third period (356) must be such as thoroughlyimpress the cadence or tempo of these gaits on the minds of

men.THE WALK.

352. The walk is a gait in which the feet are lifted inCCNll'llonnd put down in the order of their lifting. If the

ht front foot begins the gait. the other feet are lifted in thellowIng order Left hind, left front, right hind. The walkould be frec, eniY, and elastic. .

TIlE TROT.

3153.The trot is n gait at which thc horse springs from one,ngonnlly disposed pair of fC<'t to the other; betwPE'n the beats

~




all the feet are in. the air. The right front anll th~ left hindare called. the right diagonal, the left front amI the right hinuthe left diagonal.

THE GALLOP.

354. The gallop is the most rapid of gaits. It must not beused unnecessarily over long distances. particularly on hardroad:;;, where the (~oneussion on the feet is severe, nor when thesaddle is packed. However, when the rapidity of the normaltrot Is not sufficient, the riller, when out alone, should take thegallop in preference to incrpasing the speed of the trot.The horse is said to lend right when the feet on the right

side nre more advancell than the corresponding feet on the leftside. 'Vh('n the f<>et are a<lyancP(1 In the inverse order thehorse is said to lead left.The gallop is marked by three beats and a period of suspen.

sion. If the horse he leading right. the first beat Is marked bythe left hind foot. the second by the nearly simultaneous plac.Ing of the right hind amI left front feet, unll the thIrd by theplacing of the right front foot. The horse then leaps into theair from, and advances, the right front foot. In leading leftthe b<>ats are right hind, left hind, anll rIght front, left front.

A hOl'se gallops true when he leads right In turning to therIght, and leads l<>ftIn turning to the left.HE' gnllops false when he lends left in turning to the right

or conYPl'sely.- A 110rse Ii-!united when he gallOl)S right (left)In front and ri~ht (left) hehhlll. lIe is disunited when he~allops rIght in front anll left behind, or conversely.The gallop shoulll he he~'1.1llon the cIrcle, becaust! the feet

nre then favorably plncell f(lr taldn~ nnd maIntaining the pro})<>1'lend. The horses thm; :-;tnrt off more calmly and the rideI' Is

enabled to regulate the pace by describIng. a cil'tle of greateror le!';s c1l'eurnf(,I'C'l1ee.As :-;oon as the horse hr(':1ks into the galll.}) the rider shoulll

move In ea<1pnee with tits hol's\'. The back anll I('g~ unite inthe r~.thm of the gait, the hands uccompany gently UIHI withoutexaggeration the mov£'m0nts of tl~e llC'nd and neck.During the gallop the. commalHl at ease Is frequently given.

The riders execute the suppllng exercises whleh have been in-




Finish at a walk, more or less prolonge<l its the jonrney haSbeen more or less long and tr~'Ing, so that the horse shall ahvn~'Scome in with it dry skIn and normal respiration.359. To these general principles which must he }lmctically

demonstrated, the instructor adds such counsel as his experience

dictates and such remarks us the nature and state of the ter-rain may render advisable.

The followIng rules cover the majorit~. of circnmstances thatwill arise: : , .

To ascell<l a steep slope, :rield' the hatHI as soon us' the horsehus been giVell his direction, {'nl'l'~' forW:1l'<1the uPllel' part ofthe body, un<.lseize n lock of the mane nenr the middle of theneck un<.ler the reIns.

To descend n steep slope, let the reins to;lipthrough the hUIlllsufliclently to give the horse complete lih<'rty of action; if neces-sary. grasp the cantle of the sad<lle with tIle right hand andmaintain the bod~. in a position u!Jout IK'rpendiculnr to the11Orse'8back.

Riders should be practiced In crossing n V-shnpe<.l ditch, ubout18 feet Wide ull<l 10 feet det'p, so that they go down one side undup the other. This is a valuable exercise, as 110 horse will facethe opposite bank unless his head is left free.

I.ong steep slopes should be uscellded slowl~' and quletl~., all<lwhen the top is reaclH'd the rId('r should dismount anrI ]l0rmit11ishorse to blow. .

AU slopes should be <lesc('nde<1 <lirectIy; short, steep slopesshould he ascended directly; lonr; slopes mny be ascended ob-liquely it the surface is not slippery. ... In ditlicult groun<} the horse should he ul!owe<l to tnke theinitiative; his -instin<:ts nre a more rplialllc guide than the ahlsof the rider,

If marshy groun<l mm:t he <:1'08se<1,o sIo\\'lj' nn<} m.oid fol-lOWing in tl'uep. If the hor8l> goes down nn<1 !J0conws Ilf'rVOUSand begIns to 1'11l1l~C, dlsmo11nt llnd lead.The rIder mllst 1<'nrn to 8('('1\: eH'r~' meallS to sllnre his horse,

especially when currying a pack. In particularly <liOieult placeshe should dismount and lead.The Insh'uctor ghes the mpn much pructlce in ri<lIng uero!'!s

dllches anti rurlnes, such us might be ,'.conntered In tlt'afl.




He hnpresses them with the necessity of confirming the horsesIn crossiu:;{ such places ,vlllinglr, quletlr, with even gait, and

110 tendency to jump.'360. Allvantn~l~ Is taken of the ,,'ork during this period to

toach the men how to cover distances at the diff~rent rates of

sp(wd IlS el11r)lo~'pdby couriers nnd firtllIer~' sconts and agents.he l'utes 01' Hpel><lpl'('scrihed for this duty are ordinary, aboutmil{>loIel' hour; rapid, 7 to S miles per hour; and urgent, theighest sI1Cetl consistent with certninty of arrivnl at destina-ion. '.rhe men must be taught thnt the condition of the horse,he w{'uther, flll(l the stnh~ of the roads may mnke It necessnryo dlvCI'g'Hconsldernbly from the ~peed ordered. The messengerl1ust g'l't his horse through. In Ilence this must be done with-ut in,1ury to the nnimal; In wnr it mny be necessary to do it

t the eost of fatally eXhausting him. .'1'ho messenger rides the regulation gaits unless these arennifcFltly unsuited to his horse, in which cnse he rides nt ench.nlt, the tempo hest suitpd to preserve the nnimal's strength.The following varintions in gnits nre suggeste(l as nffordingnides by wh1<'h the varion!; rates of speed may be ridden. Innch cnse it is assumc(l that the horse is in condition, nnd thate hnlil been warmed up hy gentle exercise, and is therefore'lml1y for increased effort.

Ordinary: Alternate G-minute wnlk periolls with 10-minuterot p(~rlo<ls,fllHI rest for the last 10 minutes in each hour. This,t the re~ullltion ~n1ts, ~lves Gh miles l)er hour, nnd with nlter-

wfill>:nml trot periods of these lengths, the number of min-tes of trnvel nlways closely approxImates the number of tenthsf miles covered. '.rhus nfter riding 18 minutes the messengeros covered 1.8 miles ..Rapid: Alternate {).mlnute walk periods with 10-minute galloperiollH, nnll rest for the l:lst 10 minutes in each hour. ThIs,

t the regulation gnits, gives 7! miles per hour.Urgent: Combine wall.:, trot, gallop,. or extended go11op periods

iS tho particular case demnnds l1IHlas seem best ndnpted to savehe horse. The louger the distnuce to he ('O\-ered, the less muste tho l'uto In miles per hour. '1'hus n horse of good breedingnd In hard condition mny be expected to cover !t> miles ill one

105281°--VOL 1--17----G

'



169 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY~

hour, while it the distance to be traversed is 30 miles, he shouldbe gIven at least four hours If injury Is to be avoided. I .,' I

Similarly, the horse should not be pushed to his extreme speedunless the distance Is very short.Whether the speed to be ridden be ordinary, rapid, or urgent,

the messenger at all halts must dismount and slightly loosenthe girth to relieve the pressure from the back and to facilitateeasier and deeper breathing. Unless scouring, the animal shouldbe permitted to graze.

Frequently When trot periods and always when gallop periodsare used the rider should make it the rule to dismount and leadhis horse during the walk periods. Gallop periods or trotperiods, when the rate Is ordinary or rapid, should not, even fora horse in hard condition, be prolonged for more than 25 min-utes without alternating with a walk period. When using theposting trot it is of little or no advantage to change diagonalsduring a trot period. It Is easier on the horse to walt until the. next trot period and then to post on the other diagonal.' Themessenger must endeavor to water his horse with sufficient fre-quency as to preclude his taking at anyone time n big, heavydrink. Whenever It is possible or practicable to do so, the mes-senger should leave behind unnecessary articles of clothing or

equipment so as to lighten to the utmost the load which hishorse will have to carry. In many cases, however, it may benecessary for him to ride with full pack and also to carry foodfor hImselt and grain for his horse. The rld~r himself must bephysically fit. A tired rider fatigues his horse very mUCh. ,Distance rides, which tax to the utmost the endurance of

both horse and rIder, are the supreme and final tests of horse-manship. ,

363. To prepare recruits for their work with teams It Is

advantageous during this period frequently to form the, sec-tion In a number of squads each composed of six or eight menIn column of twos simulating six or eIght horse teams. Such aformatIon Is favorable for teaching the men the evolutions en-countered In the battery mounted finll for teaching them to obeysIgnals nnd bugle calls. It Is especially fnvornble ,for. teaching

the relative po:,ltlons of the various horses of a teanl 'clurlng nturn such as Is Involved In an about or Q. movement by theflank of an artillery carriage. .

'

'




364. For horse hatterles It is of n<1vantage <luring this periodC'CI1SlolllllJVo forlll fln<! l1IHn0UVerthe men undcr Instructions lllountpJ. gun l'\f}uads,

Section 12. The Gun Squad :r.rounted.'

365. 'rlte 8IlPC'lal Instruction l'pquired fill' the cannoneers ofbntt<'r~' of HOJ'sP Artillery emhraces thnt of a gun squadounted antI thnt of t\\'o or more gun squads mounted.

COMPOSITION OF THE GUN SQUAD.

366. Each gun squad is organizP(l as in llarngraph 135. '1'wof tho prIvates net as horse holtlers for the cannoneers' horses.

367. A caisson r.:quad Is organized HI" In plIl'ag-rnph 136,3e8, .When tllP gUll 8f}t1Utlsmarch or maneUH'r wIth the bat-

('11(')1 ellisson ('orporal 1'(.t:1in8his post hoot to boot wIth thead or Hwing drlwr of hIs caisson.

l"OR1>IATION OF TIlE GUN SQUAD.

369. '1'he gUll antI CI11S80n sf}lwlls are f01'I11('<1n <1ouble ranktho 01'(101'prt'l'Icrihl'(l in Jll1l'ngrnphs 138 un(1' 139 with an

tervlII of n inehes from knPl' to knee, and at n distance of 1.'flrll fJ'om the eroups of the front-rank hol's(,s to the heads ofe reur.rllnk II0rl'\('S,370. III the g1.ml'\(I1WtlNOf:.G flnll 7 and In the caisson ~l1uade hl~hest nmnbpl'l'd ennnOlW0rs In eHc'1l rank aet as horse

If there nre less thnn six cnnnoneers In the squll(l the~hest l1um»('re(1 CfillI1Ol1l'ernets as horse holder, the horses

lInk('d In single rank.371. ~rh(' guitle. of tll0 ~Ull sf}ulltl Is the gunner; of the caisson

u1lll, the cnlssoll ('Ol'fIOI'al,or, In his abscuee, the cannoneel' one right of th(' trout l'lIIlk • .

TO l"on:l[ TIlE oGUN SQUAD.

372. '1'1)(> Instruetor Indicates the point wll('rc the right ote sqllnd 18 to 1)(' awl the direction In which It Is to face nndmmnnds: LEAD OUT.




. The gunner repeats the command nnd places liimself wherethe right of the squad Is to rest, faced In the proper direction.The men lead out and form In double runk, taking the posi-

tion of stand to horse, with intervals of 18 Inches bet,veellhorses; each rear-rank man places his horse at the dlstnnce of

1 ~'al'tl from the croup of the horse of his ft'ont-runk mun, thehorses covering each other. .

TO :MOUNT.

373. 1. Cannoneers prepare to mou~t, 2. MOUNT.Execute(l as. explnlne(l in .. The Soldier Mounted" (240), the

cannoneers mounting without moving their hol'sPS out of rnnks;

if necessary they make them give way slightly to the rIght orleft.It the command be: 1. Cannoneers, 2. MOUNT, the cannoneerS

execute at the comm:m<l mount all thnt has be<.'nprescribeu forthe commands prepare to mount anu mount.

TO DISMOUNT.

374. 1. Cannoneers prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT.Executed as explainetl in .. The SolUier Mounteu" (245), the

cannoneers dismounting without moving their horses out ofrank; if necessary, they make th.em gIve. way sllghtiy to therIght or left. .,.

. It the command be: 1. Cannoneers, 2. DISMOUNT, they exe-cute, at the <:ommanu dismount, all that has been prescribeu forthe commands prepare to dismount and dismount.

ALIGNMENTS.

375. The alIgnments are 11rst taught by. requiring the can-noneers to align themselves upon two tiles estllbllsheu as a base.The squad being in llne at n halt, the in8tru('tor causes the

11rst two files on the 11ank toward which the allgllment is to bemade to move forward a few steps and E'stablishes them as nbase; he then commands: L :BY' file, 2. Right (Left), 3. DRESS,4. FRONT.




TO FALL OUT.

380. The squad being in line dismounted: 1. By the right(left), 2. FALL OUT.The front rank man on the right followed by the man behind

him leads his horse 1 yard straight to the front and then directlYto the stable or picket llne. Each of the other front-rank menexecutes the same movement so as to follow the horse of therear-rank man next on his rIght at a distance of 1 yard.

TO DISMISS THE SQUAD.

381. Executed as prescribed in "The Soldier Mounted" (259).

TO MARCH IN LINE.

382. Befng in line at a halt: 1. Forward, 2. :MARCH.The squad moves of! promptly, the guide marching straight

to the front at the regular gait. .The instructor observes that the squad marches straight to

the front at the regular gait; that the men keep their horsesstraight in ranks: that they maintain the proper Intervri.l fromthe side of the guide; that they yield to pressure from that side

and resist pressure fr(\m the opposite dIrection: that whilehabitually keeping the head to the front, they occasionallyglance toward the guide: that It In advance they rein In gradu-ally; that If In rear they gradunlly Increase the gait untll. theall~nment is regained. .\The' Instructor \\ill impress upon the men that the aUgnment

and Interval can be preserved only by uniformity of gait andby keeping the horse straight In the line of direction.To call attention to the loss of alignment or interval the

instructor commands: DRESS. At this command the men glancetoward the guide and then make the neccS!'lary correction.383. Marchln~ In line, to effect a slight change of dIrection:

Incline to the right (left).The guide turns his horse slightTy to the rl~ht and marches in

the new direction; the other men gradunllr conform to themovements of the guide, Increasing or ulmlnlshlrtg'the 19a1t nc-cording as the chnnge Is toward or opposite the side of the guide.

~




TO HALT.

384. 1'. Squad, 2. HALT.

TO REIN DACK THE SQUAD.

385. neing in line at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH.All the men rein back, dressing on the guide.This movement is used for short distances only,

TO ODLIQUE IN LINE.

167

38G. 1. Right (Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.

At the command march each man obliques to the right (305).s right knee in rear of the left knee of the man on hisght. 'fhe squad moves in the new direction, regulating by theght, In n line parallel to the original front.If the command halt be given ,vl,ile marching obliquely theen halt faced in the direction in which they were marching.To resume the oblique march: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.While ohllquing-, to resume the march in line: 1. Left (Right)blique, 2. :MARCH.

TO TURN AND HALT.

387. Heing in 1lne: 1. Squad right (left), 2. MARCH, 3.

At the commnn<l march the front-runk man on the right exe-tes by the right flanl.: and halts: each of the other men turnsis horMe to the right, npproximnting the oblique and mo\"in~y the shortest line without changing the speed, places him:;elf

breast of the pivot man. 'l'hc rear-rank men conform to th.)ovenll'nt of the front rank and place themselves, coverIng- H.eirle lenders at a distance of 1 ~'nrd. All dress to the pivot with-ut cOlllmand.The Instructor ,,('riflE'S the alignment from the pivot.Squad half right (half left) is executed in the same manner;e pivot makes an oblique to the rIght.




TO TURN.AND ADVANCE.

388. BeIng In line at the halt or at the walk: 1. Right (Left)turn, 2. MARCH. . .

The front-rank man on the right executes by the right fianl{

nnd moves forward in the new dIrection without increasIng thespeed; each of the other men turns his horse to the right, ap-proximating the oblique, and, moving at the trot by the shortestline. places hImself abreast of the pivot man, when he takesthe gait and direction of the latter. The rear-ranI\: men con-form to the movements of the front rank and place themselves,covering their file leaders at n dIstance of 1 ~"ard. During theturn the guide is, without command, on the pivot flank; theorigInal guIde is resumed without indIcation as soon as the

turn is completed.It marching at the trot the pivot man continues at the trot,

each of the others slightly increases hIs speed unW he arriveson the line. .

If marchIng at the ~nllop the execution Is similar, the pivotman contlnue~ at the ~allop, each of the others slightly Increaseshis speed until he arrives on the line.Right (Left) half turn is executed on the same principles; the

pivot man makes an oblique to the right.

THE ABOUT BY SQUAD.

389. Being in line: 1. Squad right (left) about, 2. MARCH.Executed as in paragraph 387, except that the turn is through

an arc of 180°.

TO MARCH BY THE FLANK FRO:!.[ LINE.

390. Being In line at a halt: 1. By the right (left) :flank,2. MARCH.The front and rear rank cannoneers on the right simulta-

neously execute by the right flank; each rear-rank cannoneer,after completing the turn, closes in so as to rlUe boot to bootwith hIs front-rank man. The movement is taken up succes-slYely by the other cannoneers In time to follow the two nexton the right at a distance of one yard. .. .




If marching, the men on the flank toward which the move-ment is made execute the turn at the command march; theotherH halt and then turn in succession. .391. 'rhe squad having been marched by the flank is now in

flank column. I<:achcannoneer should so conduct his horse thatthe man of his rank who immediately precedes him shall hide

all the other men in his front.

TO FORM LINE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT FROM FLANK COLUMN.

392. 1. Right (Left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT,

5. FRONT.. Executed as in .. The Soldier Mounted" (344), each rear-ranl{ man checking his horse so as to follow his front-rank man;the command halt is given at any time after the leading flle has

advanced its own length In the new direction. The other filesdress CIS they arrive on the line and tal~e the prescribed interval(369) ; the instructor places himself near the right to superin-tend the movement and gives the last command when all are

aligned.'l'lw instructor commands left (right) into line according as

the flunk column is right or left in front.393. The flank column is right in front when the front-rank

men lire on the left of the rear-runk men; the column is leftin front whell the front-rank men are on the right of the rear-

ranl{ men.TO OBLIQUE IN FLANK COLUMN.

394. 1. Right (Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.To resume the oblique after halting: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.

TO CllANGE DIRECTION IN COLUMN O:F TWOS.

395. 1. Column right (left), 2. :MARCH.Iil'wcuted ns In .. ~'he Soldier Mounted" (350).

MANEUVERS OF TWO Olt MORE SQUADS.

396. If it Is desired to train two or more gun squads mountedin the formations amI movements lulu uown in the Gun Squad




these two the swing pair. When there are two pall's bf!tweenthe lead and wheel pall's, the pall' next behInd the lead pair iscalled the lead swing;' the other the wheel swing pair. Whenthere are five puirs the one between the lead swing and thewheel swIng i8 called the middl~ swing pair.

NO:HENCLATURE OI!' HARNESS.

409. The instructor, using a harnessed pair or n hitched tenm,poInts out the different parts of the harness, explains the pur-pose of e~ch, nOlI instrncts the drivers in the correct nomencla-ture as given in the Handbook.IDachdrIver is required to become expert in takIng the harness

apart llnd in quickly nnd. correctly assembling it.

DISPOSITION OF THE HARNESS.

407. In garrison.-The harness is arranged. on two pegs onthe heel posts, as follows:On the upper p<,g: Both brIdles hung from the peg by their

headstalls; the truces of both horses hung over the peg closeto the heel post; the off saddle with its nttachments over thesent; the blanket across the saddle: both collars, unlocked, over

the blanket.On the lower peg: The near saddle and blanket arranged asprescrIbed for the off harness. .The neck yoke, with martIngales attached, is hung trom a

spIke driven Into the sIde of the heel post.To rlrevent injury to the off saddle when the blankets are out

dryIng, the sacl{ is put over the harness and the collars arethen J)laced across the sack. .If the harness pe~s are on the left heel post as the driver

faces the mnnger, the sadlIlcs are placed wIth the cantles a~alnstthe lweI post: if the pe~s are on the other side of the stall, thepommels are placed against the heel post.408. In the lleld.-The pole prop is plnced under the end of

the pole. The wheel traces are detached from the collnrs onlyand Inld back on the footboards. The remaln<.1erot the harnessof the D'eur-wheel horse is placed on the pole next to the double-



:MANUAL.FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 173

collar nnu the collar pnu, the collar is placeu well up on the neck,loclwu, anu then llfteu gently to its position against the shoul-ders. By stooping down anu looking at it, the driver shouldsaUsfy himself that the buckle latch is securely locked.Saddle.-He puts on the blanket of the off horse, then the

saddle with its nttnchments, taking care not to. displace the

blanket; buckles the collar strap to the sadule; turns back theback lltrnp anu, in the case of wheel drivers, the breeching,fastens the ('rupper nnd completes the saddling (228). He then

saddles the near horse in .like manner.Traces.-He lll~'s the middle of the traces of the off horse over

the horse's bacl~, behind the sadule, toggles on opposite siues,auu, }wginnillg with the off trace, passes the toggles through thetrnce loops from the reur and attaches them to the hame tugson the collar. The traces of the near horse are then attached

in the same manner. 'rhe rear cnds of the traces are left hang-ing over the bucks of the horses.When the horses are harnessed for drill by pair, the traces,

at the direction of the instructor, are either not attached or are'toggled up by passing eueh trace over the back behind the saddleund 8lipping the ring of the trace chain over the toggle whichattaches the opposite trace to the hame tug.. Br1dle.-He bridles (234) first the off horse, passing the reinsthrouj;{h the roller, and then the near horse. .. Unle~s otherwise instructed, the halters are removed beforebridling.Couple.-He turns his paIr about so as to face the stable

driveway and attacbes the hook at the end of the coupling reinto the rip;ht pommel ring of the near saddle. lIe then standS

to horse (237, 425). .Yoke.-The wheel drivcl' takes down the neck ~'oke; places

him8elf between his horses, facing in the same direction withthem; fastens the brenst strap of the off horse, then that of thenear horse; passes the martingale of the near horse betweenthe forelegs, through the standing loop on the cinchn; attachesthe hooks at the end of the side straps to the martingale Dring;secmcs the martingale of the off horse in the same manner;then llOsses out in rcar of the near horse and stands to horse.412. To' harness without detail: HARNESS.~



174 MAKUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

TO UNHARNESS.'

, 413. 1. By detail, 2. UNHARNESS.

Unyoke.-At this command the wheel driver passes betweenhis horses from the rear, unhooks the martingale of his nearhorse, antI draws the martingale through the stamllng loop

on the clncha; then does the sume with. resl1cct to the off horse;unhooks the insIde enll of each breast strap, detaches the ned:yoke, find hangs It on Its spike .

. Uncouple.-Eacll drln'r steps in front of his pair antI un.couples. It the horses are facing the stable driveway, he turnsthem about to face the manger.

Unbridle.-lIe unbridles (235) the near horse, puts the haltel'on, fastens the halter to the manger, anli. hangs. the bridle 011

the upper peg next the heel post. lIe then unbridles the offhorse In like manner.

Traces o1!.-IIe (lisenga~cs the near trace of the neilI' horseand la~'s Its mitltIle over the saddle, toggle on the nenr side;disengage:-; the off trace and la~'s It bt>side the near truce, toggleon the off sltIe; removes the truces antI hangs them 011 their peg;In like manner he removes and hangs up the traces of the offhorse. .

Unsaddle.-lIe unfastens the crupper of the near horse and

places the attachments In the saddle; unfastens the collar strapand then unsaddles the near horse (229), placing the saddleon the lower peg. He removes the blanket from the near horsend places It over the sa<ltIle, the folded edg-e away from thelcel post. He then unsaddles the off horse In like manner.Collar off.-He rpmoves the collar of the near horse, then thatf the off horse, and hangs them up, the nenr collar next to theost, the zinced surfaces away from the heel post.414. To unharnes~ without detail: UNHARNESS.

TO HARXESS AXD UNIlARXESS IN TIlE FIELD.

415. Executed as in gnrrison, but in such order IlS to snit theisposftlon of the harness. Thus, the ortIcr In hnrnessing Is:.ollar, bridle, saddle, traces, couple, yoke. In nuhllrnessing:nyoke. uncouple, traces off, unsaddle, unbridle, collar'Off.




rein Is fastene<1 l11t~ the snap on the pommel of the off saddle.After the blanket is put on, the truces are taken off the 8uddleuna laid on the carriage until lweded. Saddling is executea usfollows: Seize the blanket with the thumb and 11r8t two fingersof the left hana at the front edge of the fold, and in a shnllarmanner with the right hand at the rear edge of the fola; hold

the blanket up, arms extendell, nnll see that the lower {\llges areeven; thel1 thl'o\\' the outside part OH'r the right arm, Approuchthe hors(~ frolll the near side, !)l:1cethe hlanket well forward 011

his hack by throwing to his off sille that part of the hlanketover the right arm, still hoilling the blanket at the middlepoints; slide the blanket once or twice from front to rear tosmooth the hair, being careful to raise the blanket in bringIngit forwar<1; put the blanket in place with the forefinger of tholeft hatHl at the ,vith('rs and the forefinger of the right haml OIl

the backbone; then remO\'e any locks of mane that may beunller it an<1smooth out the wrinkles. SeIze the pommel of thesa<1dle with the left haml an<1 the cantle with the right; np*proach the horse on the near siae from the dil'ectioll of thecroup and place the celltel' of the saddle on the horse's back, thofront cnos of the bars about three fingel's wIdths behintlthepoInts of the shoulder blades; fasten the colInI' strap, to thesaddle; turn back the back strup and, in the case of wheel

drivers, the brecching; fasten the crupper; let down the cinchllstrup an<1 the cinchu; pass to the off side, adjust the dllChlland straps and see that the blanket is smooth; return to thenear sItle, run the left hano, back up, down the ,v!thers so asto raise the hlanket slightly under the pommel arch, in ortIerthat the withers may not be pinchcll or prossed upon: thenfasten the cinelm, using one of the approved methods. HaVingcompletec1 the cinching, let oown the right stirrup. then theleft. The surcingle, if used, Is then buckled over the saddle

and shoul<1be a little looser than the clncha.Traces: Each orivcr la;ys the lllillllle of thotl'llCes of tho 'off

110rse over the horsc's back behinll the sa<1dlc, toggles on oppo-site sIdes; and, be~innlng' with the off trace, passes the togglesthrough the truce loops from the real' aIlll attaches them to thotugs on the collar. The truces of thc near horse are then at-tached in a similar manner. The 1'('ur cnlls of the' tl'tlCes are




ft htngln~ over the backs of the horses. 'Vhen the horses arearnefS(;(l for drill by pair, the traces, at the direction of thenstrue;or, are either notnttnehed or are togggled up by passing'Hell tnce over the hack hehind the sll<1dle nnd slipping theing ofthc trace ('hain over the toggle which attaches the oppo-ite trn'c to the 1ml11etug. •

Coupl: Each clriY<:'rf'te}ls in front of his horses and snaps then(l of tie couvIing rein Into t11e right pommel ring of the nearaddle. . ,

Yoke: 1.'11ewheel <11'in'r tnkei'l the yoke; places himself be-tb horses, facing In tlle same direction with them; fas-

ens tllcbrenst strnp of the off horse, then that of the nearorse: Jll';ses the lllllrtingale of the near horse between the fore-egsancl hrough the standing 100l) on the cincha; attnches theooks a t he ends of the side straps to the martingale 'D ring;

tl~ martingale of the off horse in like manner: passesut In rea of the nenr horse, moves the pole prop from underhe end of:11epole and replaces it In its carrIer; then stands to .1Orse. .

III. 'l'IIC>nirs being harnessed, to post tIlf'mat the carringesor hite-hin; the instructor comlllUlllls: PAIRS TO YOUR CAR-

l\ch driver unties his l1uir an(ll'ecures the end of thealter tie rtJe of the TIl'ar horse to the left pommel ring of hisuddle and. 'lut of the off horse to the right pommel ring ofhe saddle. The teflms are thcn posted, be~inningo wIth theheel TlUir, :fjlowc(l by the S\Yill~ aUll ]ea(l pairs.IV. 'l'11etelns bein~ postcll nnd the driv(,rs stan<1lJl~ to hor~e.

o hoole and hch the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, 2. HOOXND HITCH. 1Jach wheel <1ri\'er passes behind the Ileal' horse,'laces himself>etwecll his horses on the right of the pole, en-ages the en(hf the pole In the l)ole ring of the neck :roke,hen goes behil the off horse nml nttachcs his trnces to thenme tng, bCP;mingowith the neilI' truce. lIe then passesl'oun(l to the r(r of the cnrrlage at a double time, and hitcheshe near horse, ('ginning' with the off trace. Each' lead nndwing <1river gOl to the rcar of hi:o;off horse, p:H,sing by hisff side, and hool the rear ends of the traces to the front endsf the correspondg trnccs of the pair in rear, begInning with

'




the outer trace of the off horse and ending with the outer traceof the near horse. Each driver th~n stands to horse.V. The pairs being harnessed, hooked, and hitched, md the

drivers at stand to horse.. 1. To unhook and unhitch, the instructor comm::nds: 1.Drivers, 2. UNHOOK AND UNHITCH. Each lead an! swingdriver backs his pair, if necessary, in order to unhOlk moreeasHy. He then goes in rear of his horses, passing by the nearside of the near horse, and detaches the traces of hIs pall', be-ginning wIth the outer trace of the near horse and en.ing withthe outer trace of the off horse. As each trace is uPlooked itis laid over the back of the horse in rear of the sadIe. Thewheel driver detaches his traces from the collars on1: and layst~em back on the doubletree, beginning with the outr trace of

the near horse and ending with the Inner trace of th. off horse,passing around the carriage at a double time afte) detachingthe inner trace of the near horse. After the innr trace ofthe off horse has been detached, he places himselfetween hishorses on the right of the pole, detaches the po) from thepole-)'oke ring and lowers the pole to the ground. JJach driverthen stands to horse.2. To post the pairs at the carriage wheels prparatory to

unharnessing, the instructor commands: FALL aT. At this

command the lead pair is moved by a right abou to the rightwheel of the piece or caisson; the swIng pall' byl rIght aboutto the rIght wheel of the limber; and the wheel,air by a leftabout to the left wheel of the limber. Each dver ties bothhorses to the wheel by means of the halter tle r~es; the wheeldriver removes the pole prop from its. carrie' and places itunder the end of the pole. Each driver then studs to horse.VI. The pairs being in the position just descoed: To unhar-

ness by detail the instructor commands: 1. 1 detail, 2. UN-HARNESS. This is executed in the following rder: .

(a) Unyoke: The wheel driver passes betwlO his horses, un-hooks the martingale of his near horse and dr~'s the martIngalethrough the standing loop on the cincha ; thepoes the same withrespect to the off horse; unhooks the Inside nel of each breaststrap, beg-inning with that of the of! horse detaches the neckyoke and place3 it on the footboard.

"




being farthest to the rear. The saddles are placed on tte polc,pommels to the front. .VII. The horses being unharnessed and the picl~t line

stretched, to tie the horses on the line the Insti'ucbr com-mands: TtE ON THE LINE. Each driver unties his pdr froul

the wheels, leads them to the line and ties them on.NOTE.-When In the fiehl, after the collars, placed on the polesas prescribed, have been cleaned hy the drivers and 'nspt'cted,the~' will be replaced over the saddles in the normal position:that Is, with the zinc surface to the inside, so as to JTotect thebearing surfaces from heat and dust.

ADJUSTMENT AND FITTING OF HARNESS.

416. Drivers will be thoroughly impressell with the Impor"tance of bestowing constant and unremitting attelthm on theadjustment and fitting of their harness. They n:ust learnearly that a horse can not properly perform his work unlesShe is made comfortable in well-fitted harness. JJ ' the harnesspinches, galls, or oth('rwi8e causes him dlscomfor~. his sole idenwill be to escape from the annoyance or pain theJ{~byoccasionedhim, and he will become fretful, nervous, and msteody in hiswork. This will not only add to his own dlstresf, through n use-

less expenditure of strength and nervous energ7, hut by render-Ing the draft of the whole team unstpudY" 1; wlll needlesslyIncrease the work nnd fatigue of the other 1Iorles.417, Drivers must be made to appreciate fie fact that every

sore, every injury, evcry abrasion of the skin.is due to n certaindefinite cause which, if removed, cun prodUce no further effect.If ill-fitting harness has escuped the notice d a driver while hishorses were at work, any injury caused the'ehy must not escapehis notice at the next stables. F'allure t( discover and reportsuch injury at once to the instructor or u the chief of sectionis a neglect call1n~ for disciplinary correltion.418. Injuries due to the harness mus: be discoverefl In theIr

very heginning and at once r<,porte<1tc the oflicer in charge ofthe horses. That officer then performs his duty unsatisfactorilYif he lacks in~enulty nnd skill to m1dlfy or correct the fit ofthe harness so as to remove the cuus('of the Injury.




but not so short as to impede the animal's movements whlIe indraft. The exact adjustment can be obtained only by wa.tchingthe horse in draft, both up and down grade .. The martingale is fastened by its c1ncha strap to the neckyoke. The length of thIs fastenIng should be such as to permIt

the D rin~ and D rIng safe on the martingale to be well throughthe standing loop 011 the dneha, thus avoIdIng catchIng andinterferIng with the latter when the horse is set into the breech.ing. .The martingale must be kept smooth and soft or it w1l1chafe the inner sIdes of the legs and rub the belly.The breast straps should support the pole In a horizontal

posItion. If the pole is too low, the effort of supporting it isincreased; it too high, the martIngale and neck yoke may rubthe breast.

The loin straps should be adjusted so that the traces, when indraft, will be straight and without downward pull on the traceloops. Otherwise, galls on the back will result.The traces.-The length of the lead and swIng traces must

depend In a great mcaSUl'e on the size of the horse and his stride.The rule for lead and swIng paIrs is to allow about 1 yard fromhead to point ot buttocks when In draft. The length of thewheel trace is fixed, but allowance may be made for <.lIfferenceIn the sIze of the horses by proper adjustment of the martingaleand sIde straps. ThIs wlll allow a mInImum distance of about14 inches between hind quarters and singletree for the averagewheel horse when in draft. The traces should be adjusted by astrap under the belly or one over the saddle so that theIr direc.tlon shall be as nearly normal to the shoulders as possible toayold any downward or upward pull on the collar. A downwardpull on the collar wlll tend to gall or Injure the neck, while anupwaru pull on it will tend to l~nke it rise nnd choke the horse.

The rear trace chains of the lead and swIng traces have arln~ at one end and n hook at the other; the hook Is passed. through n "D" rIng nt the end of the trace and hooked backinto any desired link. By this means the length of the lead and8\\1ng traces may be adjusted. Care must be exercised that thetraces belonging to anyone horse are of even length.




lrIOUNTED INSTRUCTION, ,

INTERVALS AND DISTANCES,

183

423,' Intervals 1>etween-

aIrs In line, I-horse length, 3 ~'ards.eams in li11£',1-team length, 3 yards for each pair.itcht'(l cllrrlnges in line, 1 hiteh-carriage lengtll, 17 ;yarus for-

u' :J-pair team.

Dist:lllces hctween-

airs In column, 1 yard.eams In column, :2 yar<ls.Iltd)e(1 clllTiag('~;, about :2 ~'urds, or such that, when moveu by

the flank, tlw Intcrv:11s will be as above .Other Interva!s n111] c1IstancE's are as prescribed in "The Bat-

ery l\Iountcc1."

DIsrOSITIOX Ol~ THE c:'AJ~RUCES OF A SECTION.

424. The. carriag0s of a s('C'tion are said to he in sectionolumn when one is in renr of the other and hitched, carriageistanre from it. They are of(linarlJy parked in this formation.Thf'Y are salel to he In flank column when ubreast of eachther nt the Intervul )If('s('r1l)('(} for hitcllc(l carriages in -line;n double section Wh/~llahreast ot endl other at 2 3'ards interval.

'1'0 t:;TAND TO HonSE.

425. The drivel' takes the position with respeet to the nearorse ))rescribeu for "The Soldlcr l\lol1llte(l" (237) nnd o]so

olds the couplIn~ rein In hIs right hand when this is necessaryoperly to control the orr horse .. When It Is held the couplingeIn Is not nttnche:l to the nenr saddle .•

TO LEAD OUT.

426, To form the palr~ Ot' ten m~ nftpr harnessing, the Inructol' IndiC'utes t1H~ or(ler in ,,'hleh the drivers firc to' leav~

_




the pIcket llne or stable and the place and character of the for-mation, and commands: LEAD OUT; or, 1. First (such) section,2. LEAD OUT. The crlvers, movIng In the order uirecteu and soas not to interfere with each other, lead out as explained inII The Soldier l\lounted" (238). When necessary to lead 01

control the off horse the driver holds the coupllng reIn in therIght hand. In such a case it is not attached to the saddle of

the near horse.H the paIrs are to be led at once to the carrla~es the in-

strurtor may command: 1. To your carriages, 2. LEAD OUT; or1. First (such) section, 2. To your carriages, 3. LEAD OUT.

TO 1>IOU:-iT AND DISMOUNT.

427. Bein~ at n halt: 1. Drivers prepare to mount (dismount),2. MOUNT (DISMOUNT).Executed as prescribed in "The Soldier Mounted" (240

245). The Whip, if in hand, is hung on its ring before dis-

mounting.

TO DISMOUNT THE DRIYERS WHILE MARCIlING.

428. BeIng at a walk: 1. Drivers, 2. DISMOUNT.Each driver dismounts without checking the galt, places the

bridle reins of hIs near horse over the pommel, and walks besIde him without touching the reIns, unless it is necessary tocheck hIs pair; if either one of his pall' lags, he speaks to himor touches hIm lightly with the whIp.If necessary to guide the carrIage to a definIte position, the

<1riv(>1'ukes the reins as in stand to horse and controls the

movement.

If the inFltructo1' commands: 1. Lead and swing drivers, 2DISMOUNT, only the drivers name<.ldismount ...TO 1>£OUNT THE DnIVERS WHILE MARCHING •

. 429. BeIng at a walk: 1. Drivers, 2. MOUNT.. All tbe drivers who are dismounted mount without checking

the gait.



MANUAL FOR FIELD .ARTILLERY. 185

If the instructor commands: 1. Wheel drivers, 2. MOUNT, onlythe drIvers named mount.Marching with the drivers dismounted will be practiced at

first over smooth, level ground .until the teams are taught topull together nnu to wnlk with nn even, regular ~ait .

.ALIGNMENTS.

, 430. Being in Une of pall's, teams, or sections, unhitched,nnd at a halt, the instructor sees that the driver, team, or sec-.tlon on the flunk toward which the alignment Is to be made Isin the desired position nnd commands: 1. Right (Left), 2. Dress,3. FRONT.

At the command dress the other drivers look to the rIght nndalign themselves acclll'at(~ly, keeping their patrs straight. am!preserving their intervals. At the command front they .turntheir eyes to the front. .The instructor may place himself on either flank nnd ~ive. n

general alignment by ordering any uriver to move one or bothof his horses forward or baclnvard. . .If the teams are hitch(~(l the aUgnment is made as prescribed

In "The Battery Mounteu." (547).

GUIDES.

431. When two or more pairs, teams, or carriages msrchlnline the instructor, as soon as the march in line. ha~ begun.deslgllates the element on one flank or the other as the ~uide ofthe llIovement, thus: Guide right (left). The other elementsaUgn themselves on the guide thus indicateu anu maintain thetrIntervnls from that flank.

If marching- in column of pall'S, teams, or carriages, or itmnr('hlng obllquely, the lending element is without indicationthe gulcle of the movement. .~'he guide of 11 team or carriage is Its lead drIver. Tne

guiue of u section in seetlon column is the guide of its leadingcarriage: in double section, the gulue of its left carriage ..The guide Is responsible that the direction and rate of march

are properly ll111Intlllneu.



iS6 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.'

DESTS.

432. The rests are execute(} and. the attention resumed. us inU The SoldIer Mounted" (258).

When ulsmounted the drIvers remaIn dose to their pnlr8 soas to keep them in place, and are required:1. To raise the collars and examine tIle shoulders for injuries,

reporting any discovered. The collars may be ullsnappc(l andlaid back on the sadule.. 2. To rub the hand over the bearin~ surfnce of the collar tosee that: it is clean and smooth.3. With n cloth to wipe the pf'rSplrlltioll, if any, from the

bearing surface of the collar U!HI from the shouhlers.

4. On marches, or when the draft has been ~mch as to causesteady and constant pressure ngninst the shouldcrl'l, to restoreand stimulate the circnlatIon in them by hand rUbhing, heingcareful on finishing to leave the hnIrl,ying smooth and tlat.5. To look after and adjust such parts of the harness as need

it (420).

G. In audition, if a. wheel driver, to rclleve the weIght onthe necks of his horses hy properly placIng the limber or poleprop; on mudd.~' ronds to wipe the mud. off the martingales.

TO HOOK 'l'n.\CES.

433. The teams being in column of paIrs in proper orderfrom front to rear, the instructor comm:ll1ds: HOOK TRACES.Each lead. and. swing' <1:-i\"<'1'oes to the rear of his off horse,

passIng by his off siue, anll hook~ the renl' Cll(1~ of the trnces tothe front ends of the corre~I)OlHlillg traces of the pair in ren1',beginning with the outer trnc~ of the off horse and ending withthe outer trace of the near horse.

TO U~IIOOK 'l'n.\.o:s.

434. UNHOOK TRACES: Each 1ea(1 nnd swIn~ drly('1' hocks hispair, if necessary, In order to unhook more easIly. He then s;oel'lin renr of his horses, passin~ hy the near RIde of hIs nenr hors(',Dn<1 uetaches the traces of hIs vail', begInnIng with the outer




the rear of the carriage fit double time and detache~ those of hioff horse in like manner; pa~ses hetween hIs horse~, dIs('n.~Ilg'the pole from the pole rin~ of the neck ~'oke, UlH.l l()wer~ the polto the ground. He then mounts. If mounte<1when the. commandwas given; or l'tamls to harRe, if <1ismounted.The ends of the traces are passed over the horse's bnck behind

the saddle or are secure<1 to the hreeehing body, as may bdirected by the Instructor.439. If cannoneers he present the Instructor may command:1. Cannoneers, 2. UNHITCH. The ennnoneer posteu nearest

the left wheel of the 1imher unhitches the near wheel horse, tllsengages the pole of his (,UITillg'f',nl\(l 10\ver8 it to the grounu.1.'he CannOIl('el.post('ll nenl'est the right wheel of the limber un

llitches the off wheel horse. The outer truces are Ulsengagedfirst.

The ('nlls of the traces are securell as preseribetl in the preceuing paragraph.

TO DIS~USS THE DRIVERS.

440. The drivers being in line of pain.;, teams, or sections, atRtan<1to horse, with teams unhitchell anll traces unhookeu: 1

By the right (left, or, right and left), 2. FALL OUT.If in line of pairs the movellwllt Is executell by euch pall' as

prescribed for each rider in .. The Soldier l\Iountetl II (259).

If in line of teams or sections the leadin~ tlriwr on the l'i~htexecutes the movement as hefore, being followell at 1 yard bythe remaining drivers of his team or section. 'rhe movementis then successively executed by the remaining elements of the11ne. . .If the instructor commands: FALL OUT, eadl driver leads his

pair directly to its stall or to its place for llnhllrnessing.441. As soon as the (lriv('rs have ~(,cUl'e(ltheir horses nt the

place for unharn('ssing, tlw instl'\l('tor commlUll]S: UNHAR-NESS; or, 1. By detail, 2. UNHARNESS.The. hnrn('ss i~ removell, (']('an('d, nnll propcrly put in place;

the horses are rul>l)(>(ldown filHI curell for. lIavin~ satisfiedhImself by inspection that these duties hnve been 11roperly performeu auu that nIl the precautions required on return from

o




exerelse have been ohserved, the instruetor causes the harnessto be eovelw1. '1'he men fnll in, amI are marched to the batteryparade ground, and dismissed.

:MANAGEMENT OF THE PAIR.

442. Th(~near horse is managed as explained in "The SoldierMounted "; the off horse by the bridle reins and. the whip.The voice, usell quietly in connection with the whip and theaids, hi of especial service to the field artillery driver in themanng'('ment null control of his pnir.443. The whip is habitually used in driving. field artillery

teaIng. However, it wIll cause much harm and little good

unle!'l~drivprs fire thoroughly instructed in and made to under-stand its correct use. It must never be used with a full-armswing and never about the bead or neck. It should be appliedby a simple motion of the wrist, and, like the leg aids, shouldcommence with mild, ~ent)e taps \vhlch are gradually increasedin tllplr severity until obedience Is obtained, when its actionmust ('ease. If applied in such manner as to cause the horseto jump or jerk into the collar, It becomes a fruitful cause ofsore l!lhoulflers, broken harness, and balky borses. The horses

ShOU)I}not be afraid of the whip. A reliable indication tbat apair lJa8 bef'll ,Jriven by a soldier who U1H.lerstands the properuse of the whip Is that the horses permit head, ears, and neckto be stroked with it, and show no sign of nervousness or fearwhen It is brandished around their hends or over their necks.'1'he whip, npvli('ll by gentle taps on the left shoulder of the

off horse, should cause him to move his forehand to the right;appll('II on the right shoulder, it should cause him to move hisforehnnd to the left; applied on the near side slightly In rear of

the l)lace for. a rider'/;; legs to act, it should cause him to movehis hnunche.s to the right; applied similarly on the off side, hishaunches should move to the left; applied behInd the saddle,on the croup near the right hip, it should cause him, whUe re-maining close to his mate, to move straight to tbe front.While driving, the whip Is habitually carried hanging from the

right wrist. At ceremonies it Is carried so as to point obliquelyto tho left front over the driver's left for~nrm.




Drivers must be forbidden to use the lash of the oft brIelle 11~

n whip.444. The voice, because it is independent of the sensIbility

of the horse's mouth Hull sides, heenuse its ,signals are quieklylearned, easily recognized, and smoothly olH'yell by the horse,

and because it requires no great amount of skill in its correctuse,is an aid of great vnlue to the drIver.I~ike the other aids, it must cease to act when obedience to it

has been obtainelI. It must be reserved for occasions when itIs neede<! to produce n definite effect. l\Ionotonous and continu-ous use soon renders it meaningless ...It is proper to make use of the voIce in the following ways:, (u) A low, quiet chIrrup or cluck, in connection with the

aIds anc} the whip, to attract attention and move the horsesto the front or to increase theIr gait.(b) A low, quiet whoa used in connection with the rein and

. le~ ulds to steady. the horses, to decrease theIr gait, or to stopthem.

(c) Gentle, quiet, reassuring tones to calm a horse whenfrIgbtened or when patting 'hIs neck or otherwIse rewardInghim. Used with the chIrrup or cluck at the moment a paIr showsn disposition to hesitate or stop, they are the best possihle nitl in

eneourllging them am} keepIng them in the collar in a heavy ordIffkult pull. ,

(rl) A harsh, ang"J', scoldin~ tone shouted at a 110rsewhen heis doin~ something wrong, for examl)le, kIckIng. So used, theYOce frightens or startles him and makes him stOll his wrong-doIng. .

Shouting or ~'ellin~, except n~ indicated in (d), must not betoleratel} in the management of horses.445. The bridle reins of the off horse nre used in gnthering

him, for stendying him, for dll'cking hIs gait, for hnltlng hIm,filul for reIning him hae1\:. They are hahitunlly currIed in theleft hanl1, 80 held fiS to maintaIn gentle contact.Wh~n Ilecessnry to use the hridle reins of the off horse with

some foree, the driver tlrnws thC'm tOWtlrl}hIs rIght thIgh, usInghig right hand, still h{)lt1in~ the lash in hIs left hand. Theroller, fastene'l to the saddle, chnnges the din~ctloll of the force

"'




pplied and serves to transmit nn equal tension to both reins.nless the off horse is well trnlned and prompt In conformingo the movements of the nenr horse, the driver must frequentlynke use of the direct rein In controlling him; thus, he mayeach over and feel the rig-ht rein In order to turn his head tohe right and Induce him to step into a turn In that direction.he coupling rein may properly be used to lead the off horseto a turn to the left, but It must never be used to check hisait. Its use for this purpose has the effect of pulling the headn, preventing the horse from traveling squarely, and causingalls and inju!'ies on his outside shoulder. Off horses that areoo free and have the tendency to rush forward until the headnd neck are drawn in by the coupling rein are most easily andffectively driven on a short coupling rein and the right directein. For this purpose the bridle rein as issued should be re-laced by one mnde so thnt It may be passed from the right ringf the snaffle up through the roller and thence to the left ringf the snaffle. .446. Both horses sbould be gnthered before moving from aalt, hefore halting, and before chnnging gait or dirE'CUon, theear horse as explained in .. The Soldier Mounted tt (297), theff horse by a slight pressure or a slight additional pressure on

he bit. The near horse is then required to move In the desiredanner or to halt, while the oft horse, by the use of the reins,hip, or voIce, as may be necessary, is made to conform to theovement. By kind and gentle treatment the two hvrses muste accustomed to worl, together evenly and to effect changesf gait and direction simultaneously. The off horse must neitherrowd the near horse nor travel too Widely from hlm. In allovements Involving a chnnge of direction the horse on the out-ide of the turn, having the longer circumference to pass over,

ust quicken his movements slightly; but In order that whenitched the draft during the turn may be kept as even as pos-Ible he should be heW behind the inside horse and be broughtlbreul'lt of him only when the turn has been completed and thetraIght-ahead movement In the new direction begun. Theriver causes the horse on the insil1e of the turn to move. overhe arc of a circle whose radius is G.3'ards. '.,




447. Driyers ure instructed in mana~ing and maneuveringn sIngle pair before their trHinin~ with teams hitchelI and indraft is begun. . l.'he instructor. elllployin~ COll1mumls similnrto those used in .. The Soldier ~Ioullted." cuuses the drivers to

move their pairs forward, to the 11anl" to the ol>lique, or theabout; to execute chan~es In ~nlt, or to halt; to all~n the111-selves; to pass from Hne to column or column to line; to rel11back; to execute circles;' to side step; In short he causes. thel11to execute any movement (212) which in his judgment is ofvalue in teachin~ the driver and in giving him practice in thecontrol of his pair.448. The next step is to form the drivers in column of three

of four pairs, with traces unhooked, and to teach them the com-

mands unll movements they are to obey anll execute when theteam is hitched and maneuvered as a section. In this instruc-tion the drivers are frequently chnn~ed ahout so as to drive,lend, swing, or wheel pall'S, thus teachIng them responsibility forguides, distnnces, und Intervals, and Impressing upon them thenecessity for attentive cooperation In order to develop intelli-gent anli eflicient teamwork. This Is II most favorable formationfor teachin~ all the movements employed by 0. section ns 0. pnrtof .. Tlw Hattery Mounted," together with the commands and

signnll'l therefor.449. Tilis Instruction by pair Is then followed by the ~llme

eXE'rcl~t's with trnce~ hooke<.1but with tl>nms unhItched. It isruInous to (Iraft efticienc~', nnd ~lloils the traInIng of drafthorses when n <1rlver is hesitating, uncertaIn, or Ignorant of nmovement, since thIs lends blm to start or check bis pall',. toswern~ this way or that, or otherwIse to worl\: against or in.t{'rfere wIth the other drIvers in bis team. It is therefore ofutmost Importance that drivers, while unIIer~oIn~ Instructlonprescrihed In this nnd the preceding paragraphs, learn nn<1be.('ome thoro\l~hl~' familiar with every movement uselI by the sec-tion in .. The Blltter~' Mounted." When thIs is accomplished nndwhen they thorou~hly understnnll how to (lired nnd hold theIrhorses in 0. turn, nnd how to direct unll control them in limber.ing, the drivers are ready to take up the management of theIrhorses in dr~ft.



198 :MANUAL FOR FIELD ,ARTILLERY.

TO.lJA.CK A. CA.RRIAGE.

454. The wheel driver is responsible for backini: the cnr-riag", .. The- other drivers must give him complete liberty of

trace. Both. horses are reined bael\: to~ether, quietly o.ndstenuily accoruing to the principles outlined in "The SoldierMounted to (307). .

TURNS.

455. Turns nre made to the right or left throu~h nnil~a of4:>° (the obllque), 00° (by the flunk), or 1800 (the nbout) .. Inall of these turns the lend c.ll'iyer directs his pair so that' thehor"e on the inside of the turn moves over the o.rc of 0. circle

whose- rndiu~ is a yards. It is desirable that all the horses ofthe tellm relllain In draft during the turn. 'Vhen this Is the casethere is n constnnt tendency for the line of traction to becomethe chord of the circle over which the lead driver is moving, andfor 0.11horses to make the turn on two tracks 011 the hnunches.In o1'<.le1'hat the turn mny not he too short, forcing' some. of thehortl~s to step directly to the side nnd perhaps step on ench otheror kno('k their legs, 0.11orlvers must comuat this tendency byk<'t"ping th('lr horses oi1'pcted toward the outer circumference ofthe turn. '1'hls Is nccomplished in a sntisfactory manner If eq..ch01'1\"('1'keE'ps hig horses set nnd going ns if to mnke hIs horseon the inside of the turn move up between the horse!') of .thevail' next in front. In this IUanner each pair will describe ndl'd(' whi<'h is only sli~!Itl,}" smaller thnn tllat described by thepair nt>xt in front; the nbl'uptness of the turn on the hauncheswill bl>l'(>c.lu('(>t!nd the turn rentlered cnsler. .':.It the outslue hor~e~ w(\n~ held nccurntely abreast of .the

Insille oneH during the turn, the only truce In draft WOUld.be theout{lf oue of the outside 1~1l(1lwr8e. '1'0 nvoid this and to keep'all the hor8NI in draft, it Is necessnryfor the lcnunlld. swin,drl'"ers to 11011.1 tlle!r outer 1I01'8(,S a grenter or less <.ll:stnllcbehInd the Inner Onl:\lol.'1'he amount of this ucpcuc.lg llpon theradius of the turn owl the position of the pall' in the t('n111. ItIs ll:rl'ut~t with. the leaet vulr, and diminlshe~. vrog1'esslvely:with en('h polr to the rear .. In the. wheel puir, however, theout~hle II1)r8c should b~ ahead of tbe inside horses o.s much o.s



198 MANUAL FOn. FIELD ARTILLERY.:

easily be trained to be a shirker and a quitter. . A horse willnot pull freely or wl.llingly if to do so causes him pain. It Isessential, therefore, that hIs harness, especially his collar, fit

him wIth absolute comfort; that his shoulders. be hardened

through careful conditioning and rational work and are there-fore not tender or sore; and that he apply his weight. In thecollar slowly and gradually, without sudden starts or jerks thatwould pound and bruise his shoulders. Bven though all of theabove conditions be favorable, a horse wHl not pull unless he Isconfirmed in the belief that when he applies his strength theload behind him will yield. Thus a wl.lling horse may be hitchedto an immovable object and withIn a few mInutes, espec1o.llyif he be yelled at or whipped, be tran8formed into n sul~er and

n balker that only long, patient, and careful handling will cure.To allow repeated trials and failures in pulling is the quickest.and most e1l'ective method of ruining the draft efficiency of anyteam. It must be horne in mind that there is n limit to the draftpower of any artillery team and that this power, uue to thetandem method of hitching, is, even with perfect driving, from20 to 50 per cent less than the sum of the powers of the indi-vidual horses. A team should never be given dell.berntely ntask that is clearly beyond its stren~t:h .. It is right and propel',

. In order to train n team and to develop its draft power. to' nmaximum, to give it from day to day or weel>:to week tasksthat gradually increase. in difficulty. Such tasks w11l .occasionally stop the team .. No evl.l results wl.ll follow if the ani-mals, when so stopped, are permlttt. .... to rest quietly for a ,feWminutes and recover their wind. The first tendency o~ theinexperienced noncommissioned officer or driver when, a teamstops Is to urge it forwnrd immediately. This is exceedinglywrong. The horses are either taking an absolut~ly needed restor. are showing by their action that they need assistance.' Whilethe horses are resting a sufficient number of cannoneers with'drag ropes should be brought up so that when the signal tomove is ghen the carriage will certainly move. Such a practicetrains the horses that there Is no such thing as fallure' ordefeat in n pull' and therefore confirms a wUilngness to pullwheneYer they are called upon to do so. A team so trained may,when it has become hardened to its work, be called on to make



202 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY,

retaliate upon those who abuse them, while persistent kindnessoften reclaims vicIous animals.Before' entering a horse's stall and when coming up behind

him speak to him gently, then approach quietly and withoutsudden or abrupt movement.A horse must never he struck or threntene<l nbout .the hen(t

Such treatment quiekly makes him head shy and renders hisproper control dimcul t and exasperating. ;Xe\"er kid>:, strik(l, ot. otlwrwise abuse a horse. On rnre

occa~ions punishment ml1~' be necessary, hut it. must be nd-ministeretl imm(>tliately after the offense has been committed,and then only in a proper manner with whip or spur and neverin the heat of anger.Before taking n horse out carefully examine him to make sure

that he is fit for work. ', I, 1. See if he has eaten his food, especially his grain. .'2. See if his hreathing is normul; thllt is, quiet nnd without

distenl1ed nostrils. . '. , i. 3. See that he is not resting 11 fore leg, n sure indication thatsomething is wrong with it.4. ~ote wheth(>r his droppings are normal.5. Look him over, espedo.lly on the back and the shoulder~,

to see that th(lre are no sor(IB, lumps, or injuries to be ruhhed

and irritated hy harneRs or 8addl~ry.G. Clean out his fe(lt; see that there are no stones ot' nalls inthem; and see that hl~ ~hoe!'olare tight. A loose E'hoe' greatlyincr(lases the concul";r-;ionon the foot. !,. 7. ~ee if the hor~c goe!'! Innle on lentllng him out. d'.

Hi"e the hor~e an ot)portnnlty to (Irink hefore leaving thepicket line or f'tnble and hefo!'e pnttlng the hit in his month.In coltl W('uth£>l' WfIJ'lll t he hit hy blowing and rubbing it

before pntting it in the horse'!,! month,

In taking a hor~e. out, alwa~'!'! walk him the first mile to st.artthe circulation in his leg!'!. Hahitual disregard of this rulelends. to fO/)t, and leg troubles that will r('n<1er the horse un-servIceahle he fore his time. ',t

Alwarg '{\'ulk the last mll<" or fn'rthet" If necessary, to bringthe horse in ('001 and breathing naturally.

<

<

" "

~ '

'

"



MA~l1AL FORF~ELD -ARTILLERY. 203

To be certain of no m effects, a horse brought to the stable inheated condItion must be cooled out and uried before he is lefted up in his stall. '1'0 cool the horse walk him about slowlynder a blanket if the air is chilly. Occasionally interrupt thealking by giving him a good brisk rub-down,and two or threewnllows of water. Walking is especially valuable, because thisentle ex~rcfse keeps the muscles moving slowly and so assistsn working any excess of blood out of them and out of his vitalrgans. The brisk rUbbing dries him and assists in bringinge blood back to the skin, and so aids in restoring the circula ..oo to the normal. If the surface of the body becomes chilledr if tlle cooling out is too sudden the congestion existing In theungs or in the feet may not be relieved, and pneumonia, lamini-s, or other troubles will then result. A sudden stoppage otard work is ~lways bad for the feet and is very liable to resultn laminitis. ; The water given In small quantities slowly coolshe horse internally and so aids in sending the blood back toe surface and restoring the normal circulation and tempera-re .. , The cooling-out process must always be a gradual one.o throw water on any part of a heated horse is particularlyangerous., ,Except as directed .in the preceding paragraph, never waterhorse when heated unless the exercise or march is to be ra..

umed immedIately; if the exercise or march is to be resumed atnce water wlll be of the J2;reatest benefit to the horse, no matterow heated he may be. nut a horse should not be called upon'o do fast work for at least a half hour after a bIg drink. .Never feed grain to a horse when heated or fatigued. Grain

s a h~ghly concentrated food that requIres hIgh digest1vepower.bnormal temperature impaIrs the power of the digestive or-

If the animal has been worlwd to the point of fatigue, ,ll bodily functions are for a time injuriously atrected. For

hat reason he ,must be rested and his normal digestive powerestored before concentrated food of any kind is given to him.n the other hnn<1, hay, being a bulky food, wlll not hurt a horseowever' heated or fntigued he may be. , .Never remove the saddle nnd blanket In such a way as toxpose a wet back either to the hot rays of the sun or to a

_

_

-

_




sudden cooling. The pressure of the saddle restricts the blood•supply and so weakens the tissues of the back. .In this condi-tion a hot sun more readily burns or inflames the skin, while asudden cooling contracts' the blood vessels and prevents' theproper return of the blood to nourish the tissues. In either case

sores and swelling'S may result.When the saddle is removed the back should be promptlyrubbed an<l massaged to dry it and rt'store the clrculntlon. l If

this Is impossible the next best thing Is to relllace the blanketwith the dry sides next to the skin and again put on the saddle,girthing it loosely. ,After a long or hard march it is nece~sary to restore the cIr-

culation in the back very gradually, or sores and swelllngs areliable to result. To do this the girth should be slightly loosened

and I the saddle allowed to remain 011 the bad\:. for 15 or 20minutes. 'l'he more gradually the cIrculation can be restored,the less severe will be the pain ttud swelllng. .In hot weather, especIally on the march, it is very refreshing

to the horse to have ,his eyes, nostrils, dock, and the inside ofhis hind quarters sponged with cool water. ,'Vhen the horse comes in wet with rain he should be scraped.

then blanketed, and his head, neck, loins, and legs rubbed. . Ifthe weather is cold an extra blanlwt should be put on for 20

minutes. The wet blanket should be changed ,when tke horsedries. , . . ,Do not wash the legs. This practice is one of the surest means

of causing scratches. The legs should be rubbed dry and ban-daged loosely with thick bandag-es. Strips of gunny sacks aresatisfactory for this purpose. It 1s far more Import:.mt to havethe legs warm find dry than clean. The best method of treatingmuddy legs In order to avoid scrntches Is to banda~e thenl.tokeep them warm until they are dry llnd then brush them clea~:Kever leave n, horse for the night until he is thoroughly

clean. especially around his legs, pasterns, and feet. .,. ,. Individual men returning from mounted duty or pass wlll re~port their return to the stable sergeant, who "ill inspect eachhorse anG see that he is properly cared tor.' .. .

~

' '

' ,



206 MANUAL FOR, FIELD ARTILLERY.

the heavy omft type weighing 1,300 pounds or more. Substitu~tions of hay for grain or grail1 for'llny are authorized, so thatIn garrison the horses of an organization may at all times 'beproperly fed in acconlance with the severity of their work. ~'The best substitute for the slow, continuous fe~ding natural

to the horse is re~ulnr and frequent fecding~ The Ynlue: ofregularity Is abundantly proven hy experience. The dige::;tlveorgans uc('ome organs of habit, nn(} perform their functions hestIt culled upon to wOI'k at fixed and regnlar times. If not limitedby other iml)OI'tant considerntionH, five feeds daily would bebetter than three, the first one being not later than G a. m. aUlIthe last nt 11 p. Ill., the other three so that the intervals be~tween feeds are as nearly equal as the worl~ may permit.. IIIthe service such frequent feeding is impracticable. ','", .'..

Artlllery horses should he fell at least three times n (lay, atrevellle, in the middle of the <Iay, and at night .. Ordinnrllyone-thirll of the grain ration is fell each time. 'Hay, it ,thehorses are to work, is not fell in the morning, but about one-third of the ration should UP. fed at noon and the remainder atnight. . ," I ,

. 599.. Immediately after a full feed the stomach and bowelsare distended. If hard work is given at once they press a~ainstthe lungs and impede theIr power of expansion,' thus leading to

blowIng and distress. Fast work should therefore be aYoidedufter n full feed. Moreo,er, though such worl{ rarely results incolle, it Interferes with dIgestion to ,such an extent that loose-ness of the bowels occurs and the food' passes tjhrough undi ..'gested and is wasted. l.'ood remains' in the stomach about 1!11Ours. l.'ast or heavy work should therefore be deferred forfrom Ii to 2 hours nfter a full feed. . \ t ,,'

600. A bran mash acts as a mild laxative and should be fedonce or twice a week to stabled horses. A little dry bran mixedwith the oats is of value in compelllng more thorough masUcn~tlon and prevents greedy animals from bolUng their grain. Inspring or early summer the animals should be. grazed dallywhen practicable. A lump of sait should be' .kept. in, eachmanger. , ,.,.Before feedIng hay it should be thoroughly shaken 'out. with

a fork so as to get rid of dust and seetl; it is also advisable to

'



MANUAL' FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 20'7

moisten the hay before giving it to the horse. The grain,' ifpossible,' should. be run over wire screens or allowed to fallthrough the air to remove dust. ., It is advisable to feed at least a portion of the allowance of

hay before feeding the grain.' .Grain should never be fed or placed in 1:he mangers until it

Is certain that the horses are thoroughly cool.In the mornin~ horses are usually fed at or before reveille.

The noon feed of hay is usually placed in the mangers whilethe organization is at drill, but the grain is not fed until. thehorses are thoroughly cooL The evening feed is placed in themangers after the stables have been thoroughly policed for the

night.All borses do not require the same amount of forage; the

amount given each horse must be based, therefore, upon his

tndividual requirements. .When' forage can not be obtained, grazing should be required

at every spare moment, especially earl~1 in the morning whendew is on the grass, but not if it is covered with frost .. All forage should be im~pected by the lieutenant in charge tosee that it is up to weight and contract specifications. A foragebool\, showing daily entries of all forage drawn, fed, and re-maining on hand, together with the numher of the public andprivate animals fed,. will he kept by the stable sergeant andchecked daily by the lieutenant in charge. All officers shouldbe tnmillnr with the characteristics of good forage and the man-ner in which It Is commercially graded for contract specIfica-tions .. To obtain thIs knowled~e, o1tlcers should he encouraged

to visit large commercial stables., Barley'possesses n husk so tough nnd Indigestible that itshould, nlways be crushed before being fed, else n "ery greatpart of its nutrient value Is lost.Sudden changes in food are to be :wolded. The digestive or-

gans are frequently unahle to accommodate them~elves to a sud-den change, and scourin~, con~tlpation, or colic may result. IfBudden changeR become ne('essar~', the ration of the new feedshould be greatly reduceu and then increased gradually to the

full requirements.

'

"



~08. MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

Good oats weigh about 40 pounds to the bushel; barley about48 pounds; corn about 5G pounds .. Pressed hay weIghs about 11

pounds per cubic foot. •.. The, standur(l bu~hel in the UnitNl State~ contains 2,lfj0.4cubic inches. A cubic ~'arcl contains 21.aD bushels .. , A, box 16by '16.8 by 8 inches holds 1 bushel; a hox 12 by 11.2 hy 8 inchesholds halt" a bushel; a box 8 hy, 8 hy 8.4 inches holds 1 peck;box 8 bs 8 by 4.2 inches holds one-half peck, or 4 quarts.: r

WATERING.

~'t

! 1""""

601. Except w}lC'n they are h~ated it is desirable that horsesshould have free Hccess to water at all times. It Is always bestto water a horse so frequently that ,he will, neyer. be undulythirsty. As frequent watering', howe;\"('r: is. usually impos:'3ibleit becomes necessary to water at stttted times. ... t':',. ,,"

: Horses should, if Vossible, he wat0re<1 before,' fee(lin~",or notuntil two hours aftc'r fi'cc1ing. A~ horses rarely. drInk.. In theearly morning. the waterln:; must ,follow, the feeding,' but ,afterthe proper interval, if practicable. . : ".' , ,. :"A hor:-;e requires from!) to 13 goallons of 'wat€'r dally; depend-

ing upon the tem}lPl'fiture un(} upon the work he Is doing. Ex-cept in "ery cold weather horRes should. be watered at ,least

thrf'C times daily-in the morning, before the noon feeding, undbefore the evening- feeding. In warn" weathel',water. drawnfrom a cold well or spring shonld be allowed to stand. longenough for the chIll to pass off before the hor:'3e 1s allowed todrInk. .,' .602 . .A horse should he allowed ample time to llrInlc his fill

and not he led nwn:r the fir~t time he raises his hend from thewuter. 'l'his must be carefully explninc(l to the untrained lllanwho thInks, bec~u~e n horse pnts up htl head to get his ,wind

after his first fill. that he has finlshNl, . TIorses are always ledor ridden to and from 'water at a walk. .. I I ,,; :

STAnLE DUTY.'j',

;.f" r/.,

, • ";, '.' "',, I,

603. l\Iounte(l work, except as noted in paragraph 466, wlll befolloweU immediately by stables; the hor8('s are then thoroughly

" '

~ " .. f

' ' '

'

"




groomeO.and the harness and equipment cared for and" put.away in good order. The lieutenant in charge of Department BIs preRent ano. in immediate supervision of this work;. He" Is'assisted by theflrst sergeant..: On SundaYR or holida~'s the ,horses are thoroughly groomedonce during tbe day. This is usuall~r dolle at morning stabl~.;

The li0utmallt in charge of Department B or some other officerof the hattE'I'Y.is pl'E':'\entat this time. ,,' ,. OIl days that the horses nre \Yorkeclmorning stables are h~ldbefore they go out. At that time each chief of section super-intends the removal of manure and foul litter from his stallsor picl~et line, seeing that, it is placed in plIes convenient for'carting away; he c~H1sesthe drivers and individually mountedmen of his seetion, after clea.ning their stalls, to look over and

carefully examine their horses to see that they are fit for'vork'(591), and he, causes each horse to be brushed clean of dirt or,manure. '1'ho, lieutenant in ,charge inspects the geneJ;al condi-tion of horse~ und stables at this time. . ..,, On returning from R drill or exercise and after a inarch the110r8e8nJ'(~unhridled, their collars r.nd traces removed"~and the,girths 100sene<1.,The men then put 011stable clothes, relievethem"elves, and prepare for the work of caring for the,'equip-ment and grooming while the horses' backs are being, cooled

under the. pressure of the saddle .. After the bits and collarsare clenned the remainder of the harness Is removed ,from tliehorses und dl~llOSe(l of deliberntel~r, the necessary cleaningbeing done at the l"llllle time nnd in the most convenient man-ner., After tho, allotted time hug been given for the care anddisposal of the harness and equipment the horses are groome(l

und cured for. ;,, '; ,The horses me habitually groomed at the picket line.

Under a nonconlmissioned officer, the horses of the ~attery

commamler's detail, the ninth section, and the supply. sectionare groomed hytheir riders or drivers at' detailed privates, two

llOrses to each mun.", :Under the chief of section the horses of each ot'her: sectionare g-roomed by thpir driverg or riders or detailed cannoneers.two horses to each mun. An abs«ant chief of section Is replaced

by a caisson corporal. : '.

" ' '

"

- j

'



0 MANUAL' FOR' FIELD ARTILLERY.

The horses of officers are groomed by specially detailed men •The men are marc'hed to the horses, take the position of standheel at the direction of the first sergeant, and then begin work

s soon as the first sergeant commands: Commence grooming.604. Grooming is essential to the general henlth and condi4

on of the domesticated horse. Horses improperly groomed,ith ragged manes, unkempt pasterns, feet improperly lookedfter, form nn indication of an InefficIent orgHni~at1on. Cleanorses, properly harnessed and smartly turne<1 out, add to thesprit of an organization an<1give a fair indication of its dis ..tpllne and efficiency. .The principal use of the currycomb is to clean the brush. Foris purpose a piece of hard wood with channels ,along its sur"ce answers equally well. :

The curr)'comb should never be used on the legs from thenees and hocks downward nor about the head, and when occa.ionally required to loosen dried mud or matted' hair on theeshy parts of the body it must be applied gently ..To groom the horse proceed as follows: .. ,First clean the front legs, then the hind legs.' They will thusave time to dry while the rest of the grooming is being done.ext,' on the near side, with the currycomb in the right hand,ingers over back of comb and the hrush in the left hand, begin

rushing at the upper part of the neck, the mane being thrownthe other side out of the way; thence proceed to the chest,

houlders, back, belly, flanks, loins, Ilnd rump. In lJsing therush the man should stand well Hway from tho' horse, keep hisrm sUff, and throw the weight of the body against the brush.he principnl, work of the brnsh should follow.tho direction ofhe hair, but in places diflicult to clolln it may,' be necessary torush against it, finishing by leaving the hllh' smooth .. Aftervery lew strokes clean the brush from dust with the currycomb ..,Having finished the nenr side, tllkethe, brush in the rJghtnnd, the curr)'comb in the left, Rnd groom the offside in theame order. 1. '.

Having done with the brush, rub or dust oft the horse withhe grooming cloth, wipe about the fllce, eyes, and nostrils,rrange. the mane and tail, and clean the doek. I!'inally go overho legs once more and clean out the, hoofs. In clenning the,

"

" " '

~

"



MANUAL FOR FIELD, ARTILLERY. 211

,mane nnd the tuil begin brushing at the' end of the hair andgradually worl, up to the roots, s€,pnrating the locks .with thefingers so as to g€'t out all scurf and <lirt.' Tails require .ire.qnent wfishing with wa'rm water nnd sonl). 'rhe skin under thefian], anll between the hind quarters must be: soft, clean; nnd

free from <lust. . .. CUl'r~'comh8.. card:'!, or common ('oml1:-;must ll("Y€'rbe' appliedto the mane' or .tail; the hrush, fingers, find cloth' are freely

usee! on both. . . .'The wisp is uRel}wh0n the horse comes in wet find also for

stimulating the cont. It is 111lulebj' twi:;;ting or plaiting strawinto n rope. The ends are then hent together, cut off square.and rubbed on n board untll they form u soft, eyen stmw brush.The wisp should he workeci forwnrci and backward well. Into

the coat, so that full advuntage mny be obtllinedfrom the frie.tion .. After finishing with the wisp the ('out should be laid fiat.'.' Hand rubbing is beneticinl. When n horse has had \"ery hard.exhausting worl,hi8 legs should be hand rubbed and nfterwardsbandaged. taking care that the bundagl's are not tight. I.An.exhausted' horse shoulll also be giyen stimulants and -wurmgrnel. ;' ..; . \.,I•.. The . Ynlue of grooming is dl"l)endent upon the force withwhich the brush is used and the thoroughness of the other

,york. '. .. ?, ..

, Officers nnd noncommissioned officers should, by continuouSpersonal supervision, see that the grooming' ig properly' done .. ,,No horse should be eonsidered 1n order until he is thoroughlyclean. his mane nnd tail brnshed ont, and lail! flat; his eres

anei nostrils w1ped or \vfished. and hoofs put in order ... The pasterns nnd that part of the lllllne where the ('rown-piece of the brielle rests should be neatly' trimmed und .the mane

and tail pluclwd. ;. .., At each stable the horses' feet and shoes are cftrefnl1~' exam-ined. Horses requiring shoeing are I'l:'portOO to the' chief ofsection. who not1fies the stable sergeant. .. / .. The sheath wUl be ke}'lt clean h~. washing, when necessary.

wIth wnrm water and cast11e soap.' , 1 I';

.. A horse should never be tensed in grooming .. It is bad prac.tice to' attempt to make nn animal ~ubmit to l'ough or harsh

~ ' ' "

_ '



MANUAL FOR FIELD ~ARTILI.ERY.,

groomIng .. To do so means that he w1ll be provoked Into kick ..lng, striking, or bftfng, anel perhaps confirmed In; these badhabits. If he objects to the use of the brush or currycomb, thehand or cloth should be gently used tnstead. Careful work wlllusually win the animal tnto submitting to the proper use of thegroomIng tools. . .

. The object of grooming- Is not merely to clean the coat. Theskin must, be rUbbed and massaged to l{cep the animal healthY'and in condition. An abundance of friction applJed to the skIn'When the horse returns from his worl\: Is of special value, Inkeeping him healthy and fit. .QUick grooming is to be encouraged. Under ordinary condl ..

tlons a horse should be thoroughly groomed in 20 minutes .. Onthe other hand, at leust that much time should be devoted tohim. . Each chief of section, after the necessary time hils been

devoted to grooming an(l after he has made a thorough Inspec"tlon of every animal In his section and finds them all satis"1'actorlly groomed, reports to the first sergeant and to the OfficerIn charge: First (such) seotion horses in order. .The officer,;after making a general Inspection of the whole section and acritical inspection of three or four of the horses selected atrandom, may, if the grooming Is satisfactory, permit the chiefof section to dismiss his men. i'/

605. To conftrm recruits in a thorough nnd systematic methodof ~roomlng', and to impress upon them- the amount of time to beordinarily devoted to the dln-erent pnrts of the horse, they arerequired to groom by detall during their instruction In "TheSoldier l\Iounted." . . I

. To groom by detail the Instructor causes the men' to stand toheel nnd commands: 1.' By detail, 2. COMMENCE GROOMING.Clean and brush front legs from the knees down, rubbing undel"the fetlocks and arounfl the coronets with the brush and hnnd}time, 2 minutes. 3. CHANGE. Same as nt secondcommnnd. the

hind legs from the hocks down; time, 2 mInutes. 4. CHANGE.On the near side, with currycomb and brush, groom neCk, shoul-er, arm, elbow. bnck, side, 1tnnlr, loins, croup, and the hind legto the hock; time, 4 minutes. !'i. CHANGE. First on the nearide, nfter fnishlng up on the oft side, groom chest between theorelegs, the belly, nnd between the hind legs; time,S minutes.

\

'

'

'




6.' CHANGE. Same as 4,. on the oir.slUe; time, 4 minutes.7. CHANGE. Brush head, ears, and throat; with the hand rubthe throat and bet\veen the forks of the lower jaw; time, 1

minute. 8. CHANGE. Brush and lay forelock and mane; time,2 mInutes. 9. CHANGE. Brush out the .tnil; time, 2 minutes.

10. CHANGE. With the groomIng cloth, or with a damp clothor sponge if the parts are foul, wipe out the eyes and nostrils;wipe the muzzle, dock, sheath, and up between the hInd legs;time, .2 minutes. 11. CHANGE. Clean out the feet; time, 2mInutes. 12. CHANGE. Complete nny unfinished work. 13.CEASE GROOMING. 14. STAND TO HEEL. j : "., • I

Total time required for the horse, at least 24 mInutes.:: ,To facilitate superVision, the men must. be required to changepromptly at the command. '.

; G06. To judge the cleanliness of a horse, the hand ,ma~' bepassed the reverse way of. the hair to get a view of the skin.'Vhen the points of the 1ingers are run 1irmly a~mlnst the setof the coat, lines of gray are left on the coat of H dirty skin'and the points of the skin are coverell \\.itll scurf. Betweenthe branches of the under jaw, under the crownpiece of thehalter, at the bends of the knees and hocks, under the belly andbetween the forelegs and thighs ore the places usually neglectedwhen the work Is not thorough and which should be looked at

when the horse is being inspected.\ 601. HorseR should never' he hurrj('d in turning nround IntheIr stalls .. Shonld the stalls or driveway be covered with leeor be otherwise slippery, sand or Jitter should be :o;prinkled onthem. .

G08.. HorsC's are particularly terriftptl by fii'e. ~houltl a fireoccur in the stables they must be led, backed. ')1' ritltlen out ofthe stable. If they are unwmin~ n cont or gunny sack shouldbe thrown OYE~rheir eyes.- Cure ~houlll be taken that the~' donot break bnck into the stables.

Section 15. The B:lttery Mounted.

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

461." llecruits after theIr first thre<'. mOllth~', in:o;tructlo~:and older men during any instruction ~'<'llr, are l"p('e!alized for

'

'

'

" '




,', The first sergeant is assistant'to the captain, and'is respon-sible to him for the general goou order, police, and discipline ofthe battery. i •

The stable sergeant is responsible for the general care of thepublic animals assigned to the battery and thegoou order andpolice of the stables, l1ic]\.et lin(\~. (\tc. .: -. '~

The supply sergeant is rp~.;ponsible for the care of all Govern-ment propert~' Issue(l to the 1Jatterr. I' ,~"

. The mess sergeant is re~ponsihle for the proper messing of thehnttf'ry.The chief mechanic is responsihle for the good oruer and

repair of the mute-riel in actual use by 'the batter~'., In actionlw assists the exeeut!yc. .( "l'he sergeants eommand sections.The gunners nre re~ponsible for the goofl order of their guns,

carril1ge~, limhers. fincl equipment. \ .•. 11~lIchcaisson corporal is placed in charge of a caisson, flIul acts

'fiS Ilf'lslstnnt to his chief of r:('(~tion. \473. On ~uhdivision for :. ~tioll the bfitter~' is llivided into the

firing battery' and the combat train .. The firing battery com-prises the llr~t five seetions. It is under the immediate com-mllnd of the captain. '1'he combat train comprises the ,sixth,seventh, eighth, and' ninth sections. It is commanded b~r thelieutenant In charge of Depllrtment B. lIe is nssisted by the

stahle f;ergeant. '. .474.. On 'n pence footing the sixth, sewnth, nnd eighth sec-

tions nre not mnnned or horse<1. Otherwise the organization issimilar to thnt nn a war footing and is separntely shown In the~'nble8 of Organizntion..475.' In light batteries the cannonel'rs ore on foot or mountedon the cnrriages at th~ discretion of the captain; they are notordered to mount or <lismollnt when the bntter~' is marching ntn trot or gallop. . ,

, In h01'/';ehatteries every oue is mounted: the cannoneers', ex-cppt ~he horse holder8, dismount to serve the gUlls.

. I

- ~

"



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.•

the intervals between adjacent wheels of gun carriages is thatprescribed for hitched carriages in line.In column or in line, the distance between a carriage and a

mounted gun squuu 'is 2 yards; in flank column the uistancebetween caissons is such as to permit each caisson to march

abreast of its piece; in line, ldlen the pieces leau, the distancebetween caissons of the caisson sections is such that they' march-in line witll the caissons of the gun sections. In batter)" whenthe limbers take post in rear of their carriages, the distancebetween the line of pieces and that of the teams is 25 ~'ards,measured from the rear of the caissons to the heads of the lead

~na '482. When the teams are short one or more pairs, the in-

tervals are diminished 3 yards for each pair that is missing;

~houlu the teams have more than three pnirs the Intervals areincrensed3 yards for each auditionnl pair. ;, :;V an~' carriage has, lost one pair of horses or more, it bus the

same position as if the team were complete. .,

'\.

~



HANUAL"FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

...o •

... l:l",0e:;:

",




Q

.~ 00

c.> ;:::

,0. CD .S

oS .l:l....d

~.~0 .... 00

'~C"ICD'tl

:; l

1~d0c.> c>

~i:allll:l ~11.s oS

.S....,Q,a

::lCDaCD

'g'0 ca

1=1 J3~~:a Gl.sa

l~. 'I;l ~o~'g,t' ....

bD~.a .5

~8gj.S,8 gj

CI.l;l Clllo-od

0 ;5~:SC"I~-< ca

~C"I t!l1'j:; t'~ .Cl~

~'tli=Q.Ji'~~~

go>QJ""

.~ ~CD! CD ::.9. CD .] bDf; Cl>.;3.~ .a

'oS .l:lt';aoS.;3= oW ;....$ 'p : 0 010-00-.. "Cl..,.s ~,g'01yj2C"1

0

1,Q,a-.a,hll ~.s~..8

..8~~~l:::~g.;3:::,Q"'~ ell 00

i=Q

'tl d\: ..0 .5 l

:a 'I;l b.ll

'S ::l

0 i=Q

S19

:1'..

';

~ ~ ~

~ ~ ~ ~ ~

~ ~ ~

~ ~

~~ ~ ~

~ ~

~

~ ~~ ~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

'




THE PA.RK.

221

DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES.

488. The carrlages are oruinarily arrangeu in .park in therder in line, the secUons arrllnged from right to left in the

rder of their numl.lE'rs, the pieces in the front rank. The in-erval bet,veE'n adjacent carriages lDay be either the normalnterval or such as the captaIn may ulrect; the distance betweenhe ranks of enrringes is such that, when hitched, the distance~ that prescribetl in paragraph (423).

. . TO FORM THE BATTERY IN THE PARK.

. 489. The hatter~r, (Usmounted, being formed on the batteryparade (151), the first sergeant commnnds: Drivers to the

:tront.The chiefs of section and driver squads step G yards to the

front; the <:llief~ of section plnce themselves in front, and theIndividually mounted men in the line of file closers of thesquads thus formeu. The first sergeant sees that suitablecannoneers are uetnileu to replace ahsent drivers, closes the<lriver squaus toward either flank, nnll directs the senior chiefof section to Inarch then} to the horses. .On arrival at the stnble or picJ;:et line, the chief of section to

charge halts the urivcr~ and commands: Harness. The driversfull out and hnrness nnder. the superivli-,lon of their respectivechiefs. Chiefs of f,Jection nnd other indivhluo.lly 1110unted menfluddle their horses while the drivers 11l1rlleSH.The (1rivers having. het:'Jl marchc(l off, the first sergeant

('101'3('8 the ~un sqmH1s to either flunk :\ll<l (lirects th~ senior~\1lmer to mardl th('1)1 to the parl~. The fo;l-'nior ~U1mer, onnrrlvnl at the pnrl~, vo~t8 the ~un s(}\lluls with their (,I\rrluges.

If tlle carrill~('!ol Ilre in n gun shed, t he senior gunner halts thecolU1nn in front of the bull<lln:;, givps the uc('es!olary tlirectio1l8for the formutlon of the IJarl~, nm} COllllllHIlU8: Form park.; The cnnnolwers fnll out, the curriages are run out by hand

nnl1 formed 1n pnrl~. .The parI\: being in or<1er, the senior gunner posts the can-

noneers nt the cnrrlnges limbered (181). He then commands:




; ,.1'

225

To resume the attention, the captain commands: 1: Battery,

ATTENTION.".The leading carrIage is' responsible for, and sets the pace of,

e march. •The post of the captain on n route march is 15 ;yards in front

f the lead horses of the leading carriage. The captain, how-ver, must frequently let the column pass him in order to ob-

erve the condition of men and hor~es.One bugler accompanies the captain; the other, the executive.n third bugler is present, he accompanies the commander of

e comhnt train., The chiefs of platoon habitually march opposite the rearnrrIage~ of their platoons and supN'intend the march, going

herever their presence may be required.

The chiefs of section leave their posts whenever necessary. touperintend the march of their sections.At each halt, chiefs of platoon and chiefs of section care-

Ully inspect to see that their drivers fa1thfull~r perform, their

uties. .'.ro avoid dust, the officers and noncommissioned ofiicers mayarch on the windward side of the column. For similar reasonshe cannoneers are permitted to march on' the right or left, to

nke advantage of n footpath, etc.

When the rond is suitable, the driv(>rs awl horses should beested frequently by dismounting the drivers. Before goinglawn hill or over rough parts of the road, the wheel drivershould mount without command, dismounting again when onhe level or when the rough place is passed.

MANEUVERS OF THE lJATTERY.

ClUIDES.

508. 'I'he gnide of a carriage is its lead (lriver; of n sectionIn section column, the lead dri,er of its leading carriage;' of ul'l('ction in double section, the lead driver of its left carrIage.Chiefs of Hectioll supervise the gait and direction of march

ot their sections.In section column, the guide of the leading section is the

guide of the battery.

l05281°--voL.1--17----8



228 MANUAL FOR FIELD "ARTILLERY~

',,' :1

,- 509. The guide of the battery' in' line' is the guide of' t11eright, left,' or center section. :. ( ','

510. The guide of the battery in flank column is the guideof the leading carriage on one finnl\: or the other. ;. 511.' During an oblique march the guide of the' battery Is,

without indication, the guide of the leading carriage on' theside toward which the oblique is made.512. On leaving park the guidon at once posts him5elf with

the guide of the battery. If a subsefluent maneuver places theguidon at the renr of a section column, he hnstel1~ to post him~self with the guide of the lealling section; if with a rear car ..riage in line or in fiank column, he hastens to post himselfwith the guide of the leading carriage nearest hIs former posi ..Uon, or takes post with the indicated guide in case nguIc1e is

announced. On the tOl'mation of double section" the "~J;uh\onposts himself with the left carrIage of the guiding section.During nn oblique march the guidon does not change p08itlol1~. 513. With the exception just noted, the guide Is habltl1alliftoward the guidon; while he is changing position, it is toward

the guide with whom he is to take post. ';

514. The captain may announce or change the guide thus:Guide (right, left, or center). ." , I. ," I

515. If the captain desires, he may place himself in front of

any carriage of the battery. and command: Guide on me.;: Thecarriage in rear of the captain then follows his movements nndthe others guide on this as the directing carriage, regulatingtheIr march and gait so as to maintllIll their proper'relllt1vepositions. The guidon posts himself with the directing carriage.

GAITS.

516. Unless otherwise specified, horse artillery executes themovements herein described at the walk, trot, or gallop; lightartmer~., at the ,,,,nlk and trot only. IPor light artillery thegallOp should usually not be used; except for short distanceSwhen all cDrrlages are in line or column and lv-hen a chnnge ofdirection for any cnrringe is not involved (36-38)." . ,517. In changes of fcrmation the carriages whi~h' estnblish

the direction and rate of mnrch of the new formation are termed

directing carriages.

" " - " "

" I " "

'



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY~ 22~

518.' Reducing the gait one degree is to be umlt>rstood as pass-ng from the gallo)) to the trot, from the trot to t>cwulk, orrom the walk to the halt. , '. .;:,lncreasln~ the gait one degree is to be understood as passing

rom the halt to the walk, from the walk to the trot, or from

he trot to the gallop. '.519. The following rules govern the gaits during changes of

, MoVEM.ENTS FROM COLUMN INTO LINE, AND ANALOGOUS MOVE-

• I ',MENTS.

. Rule I. 'Vhen n change of formation requires ecrtain carriagesto gain ground 50 as to reach specified positions abreast of the

Urecting carriages.' the captain mayor may not announce anIncreased gait for the movement. If he announces an increasedgait, the directing carriages maintain their gait; the other car-riages move at the gait announced until they have reached theirnew position, when they take the gait of the directing carriages.

If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the di-recting carriages reduce their gait one degree; the othersmnlntain their gait until they reach. their new position, whenthey tal{c the gait ,of. the directing carriil.ges. If the movement

1Ft executed from a halt or. while marchin~ at a walk, and. anIncrease of gait is not ordered, the direeting cnrriages advancethree carriage lengths toward the front. of the new formationand halt. . '.This rule applles to forming line from column, double section

HIle from line, flank column from section column or doubleM~ctlon column, double section column from section column orllnnk column, closing or extending inte1'\als, and wheeling bybuttery,' , , .

:MOVEMENTS FROM LINE INTO COLUMN, AND ANALOGOUS MOYE-

MENTS •.

Rule II. When n change of formation requires the directingarriages to gain ground in order to precede the other. car-riages, the captain mayor may not announce an increased gait

"



23~MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY"

captain orders an increased gait .for, the maneuver, the rightsections take the gait indicated; if an increased gait is notordered, the left sections reduce the gait lO,or,;if: baIted,thev remain halted. As soon as the right sections are, clearof the left sections, the captnin' gives the command for the

about or the countermarch, which is executed by, all the sec-tions at the gait of the right sections. On the completion' ofthe about or countermarch, the sections in rear increase the gait

so as to reach their positions in line.528. In horse batteries, in executing an about, if the pieces

are in front, they reduce the gait 8li~htlY80 as to, folloW thegun squads at 2 ~"ards' distance; if the cais~ons are in front,they increase the gait slightly on completing the about, so' as

to follow the pieces at 2 yards' distance.

TO MARCIl OBLiQUELY.

529.1. Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH •.All the carriages simultaneously turn to the oblique (455).

The carriages move in parallel lines., The lead drivers nlignthemselves in each rank of carriages; the lead driver of, eachrear-rank carriage also aligns himself upon the lead driver ofthe carriag~ corresponding to his own in the front rank. If

these positions are properly maintained, the carriages' should,on executing a second oblique in' either direction, have 'the

proper tiistances, intervals, anti alignl1l~nt.,

TO CHANGE DIRECTION.

1530.1. Column righ't (left), 2. MARCH.. / ,It in section column the leading carriage turns to 'the right

through an angle of 000• The carriages in renr follOWand'turn

on thl? same ground.'If in tiouble section or flnnk column the cnrringcs on th,e

side toward which the turn is mnde, execute the movement asbefore. In each section, as the inside carriage begins the turn,the outc;lde carriage increases the gait 10, preserves its interval,from the inside carriage and takes the gait of the latter onarriving abreast of it. .' ',"Column half right (left) is similarly executed. "i' d ,i

, "

'

' "




531. Being in line: 1. Battery right (left) wheel,. 2. MARCH.The pivot section executes column right. The other sections

by twice executing column half right place themselves on the

line established by the pivot section.

ltule I governs the gait (519).Battery right (left) half wheel is similarly executed.

TO EXECUTE A PASSAGE OF CARRIAGES.

532. Being in line or in section column, to place the rear car~

rlnges in front: 1. Pieces (Caissons) front, 2. MARCH.'l.'he cfil'rlages designated in the COlllmand ure the rear car.

rlnges in the existing formation.

In each section the designated carringe inclines to the right;pU8ses the other carriage, takes position in front of it, and con.tlnues the march; the carriage thus placed in rear then fol.

lows at the prescribed (llstance.Hule II governs the gaits (519).

TO CLOSE 011 EXTEND INTERVALS IN LINE.

533.. 1. On (such) section, 2. To (so many) yards, 3. Close

(Extend) intervals, 4. MARCH. .. The indicated section moves straight to the front; the. othersections incline towm'd or away from the indicated section andmove to the front when at the proper interval.

Hule I governs the gaits.

TO lfORll{ SECTION COLUMN TO THE FRONT :FROM LINE.'

534. 1. Right (Left) by section, 2. MARCH.The right section moves straight to the front. The. other

f1('ctions in turn change direction to the right and follow in

the column at the proper distance.nule II governs the gaits.

. (

TO FORM LINE FROM SECTION COLUMN.

535. To the front: 1. Right (Left) front into line~ 2. MARClI.The leading section moves straight to the front. Each sec.

tlon In rear obliques to the right until opposite its vlace in




',.:1

line, when it obliques to the left, moves to the front, and takes

its place on the line. . .. . Rule I governs the gaits.'. 536. To the right (left): 1. Right (Left) into line, 2. MARCH.The leading section executes column fight and then moves

straight to the front. The other sections move fonvard anasuccessively execute column right, when, by so doing, they willbe opposite their positions in line; they then move to the frontand take their places on the line, to the right of the carriages

which preceded them.If, in the execution of the movement, the sections in rear

move at a faster gait than the lending section, the second sec.Uon in the column inclines to the right suftlciently to clear the

leading section. .Hule I governs the gaits.531. On the right (left): 1. On right (left) into' line, 2.

:MARCH. . . .Executeo. as prescribed for right into line; except that the sec.;

ond ~ection in the column ~nclines to rue left in order to clearthe leading section, ano. that each scct!on passes heyond thepreceding one before turning to the right; also that the leadingsection is habitually halted on advancing three carriage'lengthsafter the completion of its change of direction. I )

538. To form line at closed intervals, the captain commands:At (so many) yards, before giving the prescribed commands forform:ng line; the, battery is then formed with the intervals pre ..

scribed.

TO FORY FLANK COLUMN FRO}[ SECTION COLUMN.

539. 1. Flank column, 2. Right (left) oblique, 3. MARCH.The rear carriages 01' all the 8('(:tlons oblique to the right

simultaneol1s!~', and then ohlique to the left, when by ~o doingthey will have their proper intervals from the lending cnrrlnges.All carriages in rear of the leading one clese upon the cnrri:'lgeswhich preeeo.e them in the column at the gait of the carriageSwhich oblique. ., Rule I governs the gaits.

I

'

"



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 233.. ..

• TO FORM LINE TO THE FRONT FROM FLANK COLUMN.

,HO. 1. Right (left) front into line, 2. MARCH.

~'lle carriages on the right of the column execute right frontinto line, as pl'escribell for a section column. "The carriages on

the left move by the right Hank, anll each forms in section col..umn behinll the right carriage of its own section ..

Hule I governs the gaits.

TO FORM LINE TO 'I'lIE FLANK AT CLOSED INTERVALS FROM FLANK

COLUMN.

541. 1. At (so' many) yards, 2. Right (left) into line, 3-

MARCH ..

In each column the 'carriages execute right into line as pre--scribell for the see-Uons in paragraph 536, each section march-ing by the right flank in time to be opposite its place in line.

TO FORA-f SECTION COLUMN FROM FLANK COLUMN.

542. 1. Pieces (caissons) front, 2. :MARCH •

.. The <1esignuted carriage of the leading section moves straightto the front; the other carriage of this section obliques toward

the designated cal'ria~e in time to follow in its truck at thellrcscribed distance. 'The remaining sections in the column ex-ecute the movement similarly, eneh carriage moving out in timeto follow the pl'eCC(lillgone nt the proper distance.

Hule II governs the gaits.

TO :FORM DOUBLE SECTION AND TO RESUME THE PREVIOUS OHDER.

543. Being; in line or in section column: 1. Double section,

2. Right (left) oblique, 3. MARCH. .. In each section the renr carriage inclines to the right andplnces itself abreast of the leading cnrriage nt an interval of

2 yards.If in section column, all carriages in rear of the leading one

('lose UI)Onthe cnrriages which precede them in the column at

tll(~ gait of the carriages which incline.

ltule I governs the gaits.

~

'




544. To resume the previous order: 1. ,:fieces (caissons) front,2. ~rARCH. ,. If in column, the designated carriage of the leading. sectionmoves straight to the front; the other carriage inclines towardthe designated carriage in time to follow in its track at the pre-scribed distance. The remaining sections in the column execute

the movement similarly, each carriage moving out in time tofollow the preceding one at the proper distance.If in line, the movement is executed simultaneously by all the

sectioM.Uule II governs the gnits.545. Bein~ in flank column: 1. Double section, 2. Right (left)

oblique, 3. MARCH.In each section the rIght carrlnge moves or continues straight

to the front, the left one inclines sharply to the right, and

moves up abreast of the right carrIage at 2 ~'ards interval.Hule I governs the gaits.54G. To resume the previous order: 1. Flank column, 2.

Right (left) oblique, 3. MARCH. .In each section the left carriage moves or continues straight

to the front, the left one inclines sharply to the right and thenmoves up abreast of the left carriage at the prescribed interval.Hule I governs the gaits. .

. 547. The section being formed in double section retains that

formation until again formed in section or finnk column, andis maneuvered fiS if it were a single carriage. In executing theturns the pivot carriage executes the movement as heretoforeprescribed; the other carriage conforms to the movement otthe pivot carriage, increasing the gait so as to arrive abreastof the latter Without delay..'1'he double section line or column is maneuvered as explu ined

for the normal order in line or in section column, with the ex-('O';nJons made necessary by the difference of formation. The

carrillg-es retain their relative order untll they are again formedIn the normal order in line, In section column, or in flank col-umn. The posts of In<1!Vldualsare analogous to those prescribedfor the orcler~.inline or column.

"



MANUAl.:. FOR' FIELD -ARTILLERY; 237

555. When posted elsewhere than in Tear of the guns, thelhnbers are formed so as to take the best advantage of cover,generally in double section line faced toward' the enemy, andwith intervals of about 20 yards between limbers of adjl1centsections. If unlimbered from line, the limbers of each sectionexecute a left about and move straight to the rear; if .fromcolumn, they turn townrd the rear of the position. After thusclearll1i the front of. the position, they form in double sectioncolumn at the command or signal of the first sergeant and areconducted by him to the place designated by the captain, wherethey are formed right or left into line; as the case may be. If

the position is to be occupied for a considerable time, the firstsergeant may dismount the ddvers and allow them to standat rest.'.:' ..' ."If the horses are he~lted amI the air is chilly, the teams should

be putOH' a circle and wnllwd to cool them out whenever prac-ticable.. 556.. 1f the lImbers are posted on the flank of the battery, atthe command or signal for limbering, they file off from the flankhearest'the battery and move in section column toward it; onnpproaching the position, the piece and caisson limbers separateantI form in two columns, each column being directed towardtbe trails of the' corresponding carriages. ., Ai soon as the fifth section caissons are limbered, the chief ofthis section 'assembles his. section on the proper fiank of thebattery and In a formation similar to that of the remaIningsE~ctiolls of the battery.:. 557. In unlimbering,' the limbers habitually move. to theirI108ts at n trot. In limbering, they move at a walk, unless anIllerensed gait is ordered.558. Before unlimbering effort should be mude to place the

battery in position so that the guns, when unlimbered, will' be~ppro~i~~nteIY a~igned with' uniform Intervals.

.:, ..,. TO FIRE TO THE FRONT.

. 559. BeIng in double section line, the caissons on the left oftheir pieces: ACTION FRONT.' .,Executed as prescribed in pnragraph 199. .

'

'

"




TO FIRE TO THE REAR.

560. Being in double section line, the caissons on the right oftheir pieces: ACTIONREAR.Executed as prescribed in paragraph 200.

TO FIRE TO THE FLANK.

561. nein~ in double r-;ection column, the caissons on eitherflank of their piece.:;: ACTIONRIGHT (LEFT).Executell as l-l"escribed in paragraph 201.

TO LIMBER TO THE FRO~T' AND REAR, AND TO MARCH.

562. 1. Limber, 2. FRONT AND REAR.

Executed as prescribed in paragraph 202. .After limbering to the front and rear, the teams of each sec-

tion face in opposite directions.563. To march in line:. 1. :Pieces (Caissons) front, 2. MARCH.The carriages designated move straight to their front; the

others execute a right about and quicken the gait so us to followin' section column the carriages of their own sections whichprecede in th~ movement. . ,5134.To march in column to the :flank: 1. Flank column,

2. :Pieces by the right (left) flank, 3. MARCH; or, 1. Double&ection, 2. :Pieces by the right (left) llank, 3. MARCH.All the carriages move by the flunk in the indicated direction,

the caissons so regulating the gait as to place themselv{~sabreastof their pieces in flank column or double section, us the casemay be.

TO LIMBER TO THE UEAR, AND TO MAUCH.

565. 1. Limber, 2. REAR.

ExecutNl as })rescribell in parllgrnph 203.After limbering to the rear, the teams all face in the samedirection.

566. To march in line: 1. :Pieces (Caissons) front, 2. MARCH.'.rile cnrrlnges designated move straight to the. front; . the

others follow their proper carringes in section column.567. To march in column to the llank.Executed us prescribed in llaragraph 564.




,'. TO FORM: DOUBLE SECTION LINE AFTER LIMBERING.

239

568.i 1. Form double section line, 2. MARCH. .'If the battery has been limbered front and rear, the caissonstand fast; each piece indines to the right, executes a leftbout, and places itself in double section on. the right of its

"If the battery has been limbered rear, the caissons stand fastnd each piece moves up and places itself In double section' one left of its caisson. .

, Section, 16. Battery. Inspection, :Mounted.

, 1: I' l:'730.. The battery being In double section Une, the captain

1. Prepare for inspection, 2. ACTION FRONT •

.At this command the gun platoons are unlimbered and pre-m'ed for firing. 'rhe chiefs of the other platoons move theirilltoons to the rear by a left about, and, after gaining sufficientl~tauce,' execute a secon<.1left about and, form their platoonsdouble section line abreast of the limbers of the gun sections.'rhe chief of the first and second platoons take post oppositee center aud 4 ~'nrtlg in, front of the line of muzzles of theirIn toons. The chiefs of the other platoons take post oppositehe center an<.1.4 yards in front of. the lead drivers of their

latoons •. /',~ 1.: .All the carrla~es being in position, the captain commands:••Right, 2.. ,DRESS, .verifies the alignment of the officers and thewo rnnks of ('urriages, commands: FRO!iT, and posts himself,

not acting as inspector, opposite the center of the battery8 yaros in front of the line of llluzzles .

. The ninth section constitutes an additional platoon, which Isommanded by the senior sergeant with it (488). When. theinth section is not present its personnel is assigned as pre-

eribetl in paragraph 486.'l'he guidon is 4 ;rurds from the right fia nk of the line of

imbers, nbreast of the 10ft(1 drivers; the musicians on the rightf the guidon, all boot to boot.'The chiefs of section cause all limber, caisson, and wagonhests 'to be opened f,or inspection.

'

'

'




When acting as inspector the captain inspects the chiefs ofplatooh from rIght to left; passes by the rear of the ba~tery tothe post of the first sergeant and inspects Mm; 'thence by, therear of the battery to the rIght flank, where he returns saberand inspects the musician and guidon. I

: 'He goes'tothe right section of the right platoon and inspectsthe section, commencing with the chief of section, pU!':lsingInorder to the caisson, the gun, and the 'limbers.' He then slml.larly inspects the oth('r sections in order from right to left.When the cnptain commences the inspection of: the right

platoon the chiefs of the other platoons cause their platoons tostand at ease, calling them to attention as the captain ap.pro aches their pIa toons. I~ach chief of pIntoon accompanies, ~hocaptain <hiring the inspection of his platoon. As soon' as nplatoon is. inspected its commander causes it to take the marchorder' amI then to stand at ease. The platoon commander faceshIs platoon while at ease.

, The in~pe<:~tionbeI:1g completed, tile captain limbers front andrear and commands : 1. Form double section line, 2. MARCH.At the 8econd command the 11rst nnd second plntoons execute

the movenwnt (568); the chiefs of the other platoons movetheir platoons in double section up on the line established I bythe caissons of the gun Eections.

731. The battery carries for inspection every article that isprescribed as part of its regular equipment anll for which thereIs 'n'specially dec;;i!,;natedplace.

, '732., Should the inspector be other than the captaIn, thelutter, having prepared his battery for inspection and taken hispost, salntes when the Inspector arrives In front of him. Theinsl'('etol' returns the salute, inspects the captain, !lnd then in.spects the butter;r In the order just described. As soon as In.spected the captain retu:ns sabel' and accompanies the inspector.

Section 17. Firing Instruction.

THE CANNONEER.

l\IETlIoD 010' INSTRUCTION.

838. In "lew of the great importance of instruction, of thischnrncter, it is begun as soon as the recruits join the battery,

'




d is continued, In mldition to other instruction, until thennoneers 'are thoroughly skilleu in their individual duties. It

often be found advantageous to give the older cannoneersstruction of this kind from time to time. .' \ . "'\,",839. Care must be taken to impress upon the recruits theportance of the instruction of' cannoneers and to maintaineir interest. The time spent in thoroughly training the 'in.11vldual ('nnnOllPer in the operution of the matl'riel will resultincreased rl1piditr and aecurucy of the gun squad as It'whole.840. The instruction of Cl1nnon('('r8 and of gun squaus will beder the immediate supervision of Olle or more batter~' officers

lecteu for this worl\:.841. The permanent gunners and men skilled in the uuties of

1anu 3 can be useu to advantage in the instruction of the

cru1ts. 'By nssigning particulal' details of instruction to the<1ermen and by causing the recruits to pass' from one to theher of the instructors the instruction is expedited and unI-rmity is secured. The onicer in charge must be careful thate instructors are accurute in their explanations and that theysist upon exact performance of the varIous dutie!a. , ,842. During instruction in the individual duties in the servicethe piece special stress must be laiti on the necessity for nccu •cy. The recruits should be maue to understand thoroughly

at "peed.is purely a matter of practice, but that accuracy cannly be obtained by' forming the habit of exactDe~s from. theginning. Rapidity Is i1,lcreased by insisting that each Ind1.dual performs his duties in regular sequence. .:843. To provide yftriety nnd so to maintain interest, instruc-on in the duties 1)[ the gun squad (929-1043) ma~' be begunter a few da~'s of instruction in the duties of cannoneers; bute lm;t-mentlonet} instruction mnst not be cnrtailed.' The keep-g of records as to the time reqnired by each cannoneer to per.

rm the various duties and of the errors maue not only stimu.tes interest but furnishes an intelligent basis upon which tolect men for permunent assignment to duties.

INSTRUCTION IN l\IATERIEL.

844•. The instruction begi ns with the first, tir ills of. the can-neer, and Is carried on during the intervals of more advanced

I • • I

'

'

' '

"

~

~ '..



MANUAL FOR' FIELD ARTILLERY. 243

anoramic sight' and the peep sight. The panoramic' sight is

abitually used except in fire at will (1008):. , ,'~':

847. The panoramic sight is so constructed that any horizon .. ,l angle can be laid off by it, and that by changing its settinge gunner can look in Hny horizontal uirection.The sight' haso scales. The limb of the instrument is diyiueu into 64 equalarts. The even-numbered, divisions are marked in figures.e fo5mnllerscale 011 the left side of the bo<1~'of the instrumentdivided into 100 equal purts, umlis culle(l the micrometer~ : A

ompl(;.te turn of the micrometer ('huuges the reading' of the1mb by one division. 'fhe complete circumference is, by thisrrangement, divided into G,400eqnal parts, and the least read-g Is one of these !)arts, culled n mil. A deflection of l'milorresponds to tt deviation at the objective of one one-thousanuth

f the range. Hence n uifference of ,I mil in ueftection Isquivalent to 1 yoru in uirectlon at 1,000 yarus from 'the gun,

li yards at 1,500 yards, anu so on.\Vhen the panoramic sight is set at zero the ,erUeal plane

hrough the line of sight is parallel to the axis of the bore.848. To set off a deftection on the panoramic sight: ,The gun-er turns the rotating heuu of the instrument until the num-er of hunureus of the setting is shown by the index of the limbnu the number of tens anu units, if an~', by the inuex: of the

It, in setting the ueftection, the 'rotating heau of th~ Instru- .ent has to be moved through a smull angle only, the slow-otion screw is useu. ,But. if the reauing given requires a largengular movement, the slow-motion mechanism is ungeareu andhe l'otating- head is turncu around to the approximate positiony hand. '1'he slow-motion mechanism is then thrown' in gear

nd useu to set off the exnct setting.849. The gunnl~r is practiced in setting' uellc('tions on the

anoramic sight by command, Thus, for example: Deflection,64~ , .

Tile gunner bring'~ the' fnuex of the limb between' the ulvl-ion~ mnrkeu .. 16" nnd .. 17" on the limb, then turns' theicrometer until its inuex: reuus 40. , • • -, ;'1'lIe instructor verUies the setting." ;' ':'

, 850. The grutluutions on the deflection scnle of the peep sightorl'l'spoml to those on the panoramic sight, the unit of the

'

_

'



MANUAL FOR FIELD .ARTILLERY,

scale being l' mll .. When set at 0 (6,400) the verUcal pllil.uethrough the line of sight is parallel to the axis of the bore.Toward the left the readings increase, the maximum readingbeing.45 mils; toward the right the readin~s decrease,: theminimum reading being 6,355 mlls. . ~.'U

1, To set off a detection on the peep sight: The gunner turns thQpeep-sight screw head with his left hand until the index isopposite the desired graduation.I He is practiced in setting off deflections as before (849).851. To throw the projectile to the left, increase the deflection.

To throw the projectile to the right, diminish the .deflection...• J The captain changes the direction by commanding: Right(Left) (So much). The command Right (Left) indicates thedirection in which the captain wishes to throw the projectile .

.., The gunner is practiced in setting off a new deflection. Thus,the reading being 1620, Left 20, the gunner at once sets 1640. 'I

THE DEFLECTION DIFFERENCE.(;,J! 'f I

i 152. The training of the gunner in applying, the deflectiondifference (955 et seq.) Is begun when he is expert in settingotT.t~e deflection. . :.' .. !'"tj . THE RANGE. : 1. '.L

\; ", 1 I •

t. 853.' The range of a target is the distance in yards from thegun to the target. '. ':'j:.854 •.The range scale on the sight. shank is graduated .froIIl100 to 6,500 yards, the least reading being 50 yards. The scalemay be readily set by e~'e to read to 25 yards.';;.To set off a range on the sight shank: The gunner moves' theSight shank up or down in its socket until the desired graduu~tlon is OPPOSitethe index. In setting the runge be is cal'efu1

to lower his head so as to look squarely at the scale and theindex. ..i .The sIght shank is moved up or down by means of a. scrollgear operated with the right hand. ,If a considerable move--ment of the shank is necessary this mechanism is ungee.redbYdrawing outward the scroll-gear handle with the right hand;the shank is then raised or lowered with the left hand until',',.i ,"

' "

I •

,~ ~ < • , • , •

"

, ~ . , .

. f : • • . " •

'



MANUAL ..FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.

e . desired graduation is' near the index. The scroll-geareehnnislll is then throvm in gear and utilized to. set thecnle at the exact setting desired.' .j

855. The gunner Is. practiced. in setting the sight for range,The sight shank being in its socket, the instructor com-

anus, for example, 2700. . :., ..The gunner sets the sight us just described an<l the instructor

ritlps the setting.Tl-m CROSS I,EVEL.

~. ..

8t.8. To center the bubble of the cress level:' The gunner, withis left hand, turns the leveling screw on the sight-shank socket.

ntil the bubble is centered.- . .' I

The centering of this bubble is necessary to avoid errors in

he direction of the gun due to a difference in level: of' theun wheels.

THE DIUECTION.

857. To give the direction to the piece: The gunner traverseshe l)lece on the carriage until the vertical cross hair of, hisanorumic sight is on the target or the aiming point. He ha-itually operates the truwrsing gear with his left hand. 'Vhene 11nds that he elm not traverse the piece EufIiciently to bring,

he vertical cross huir on the aiming point or target, he com-anus: Muzzle right (left) (893-900). { InulleUiutely upon giV-ng this comllluIHI the gunner brings his piece back to the centerf tl'uverse, except that in the cnse of fire at moving targetshe muzzle of the gun Is moved as. fnr as it will go in theire('t!on opposed to that of the motion of the target.858.. The gunner is practiee(l in the. manipulation of: the

l'llvl;'l'sing gear antI in bringing the Yertical ('ro~s hair accu-utely on the niming point. He must form the habit of turning

he traversing hundwlH'el in u clockwise direction to throw('1'OSS wires to the left,. Hnd vice versa. He must also form

he habit of. bringing the gun to the center of traverse ,yhen-

wr it is necessary to shift the trail.'. 859. When the gunner gives the dir'ecUon only, the method ofaying Is indirect. The signal that indirect laying Is to be useds the command: .Aiming point (So and so). .. . ..

- "

. \ '

'

'

-

' '



:MANUAL FOR' FIELD' ARTILLERY;

'f 860.' The gunner is practiced in his duties of laying for direc"tion only as follows:.' . : .The gunner being seated on his traU seat at the piece un ..

Umbered, the sights in their sockets, the bubble of the. crosSlevel centered, and the pIece at the center of its traverse, the

instructor commands, for example: ..''~;.;'II. Aiming point, the chimney on that white house." I

. '2. Deflection, 240.

3, 2400.

1. At the command for the deflection the gunner sets it offon hIs panoramic sight ..~.2. Sets off, approximately, the range announced.3. Looks at the cross level and centers the bubble, if necessary.

;'"4. Looks through the sIght and operates the traverslng'mechll.

nlsm so as to bring the vertical cross hair on the aiming point.5. Calls ready when he has laid the gun accurately for direC"

tion.'.rhe gunner takes care not to touch the elevating gear in

this method of laying. The approximate elevation is gIvenby. the Instructor or an assistant. The chIef of section causeSthe trail to be shifted until, when the gunner has set off thedeflection, a side face of the rotating head of the sight is inllne with the aIming point. .

'. The Instructor verifies the sight setting and the centering ofthE-cross level bubble and sees whether the sight is accuratelYlUrected Upon the aImIng poInt. , ", J'

, If the piece has been laid for 11 given deflection, the instructormay command, for example: Right (Left), 20,, The gunner applies the correction to the old deflection andJ:l,~~ .;the piece llS explaIned above.

'. .. THE ELEVATION •

.'. 8Gi: T~ give the elevation to the piece,tbe gunner tur~s the~leYlltlng handle until the horIzontal cross hair Is on the bottoJJ1of the target.

':.,The gunner is practiced in'the manipulation of the' elevatinggear .. lie must form the habit of turning the handle in aclockwise dh'ection to increase the elevation and, therefore, therange and Vice versa.

"

' '

'



:MANUAL FOR.:FIELDARTILLERY.

802. When the gunner. gives both the direction and the eleva-tion, the met1lOdof laying Is direct. The signal that direct lay-ing is to be. used is the command Target (So and so).' .

: 803. The gunner is practiced In the duty of .laying for both(Ur{~ctionand. range as follows:. : .... r< .

The gunner, being' seated on his trail seat ut the piece un-limbered, the sights .in their sockets, the. bubble of. the crosslewl centered, the piece at the center of its traverse, the In-struetor commands, for example:

.. 1. Target, that gun.2. De:llection, 10.3. 2400.

At the indication. of the target an assistant gives the piecethe generul direction under the supervision of the chief of

section.. . .As the commands are given the gunner-

1. Sets off the deflection ordered. .2. Sets off the range ordered.'3. Centers' the cross level bubble, if necessary. ,:4. Looks through the sight and operutes the traversing

and clevnting mechanism 80 as to bring the line ofsight on the bottom of the target. ...

,5. Calls ready when the gun is uccurately luld. .The instructor verifies the sight settings, the centering of

the bubble of the cross level, and sees whether the gun Is laidaccnrately upon the target. . .804. Whatever the method of la;ring, the gunner must always

see that the gun is ntthe center of its traverse whenever it Isncc('ssary. to shift the trail, except. \vhen firing, at ,movln~tur!:<'ts. This ('entering of the gun in its traverse and theaccurate establiS)llnellt of the general direction avoh} frequentshifting of the trail and consequent loss of time which would

othl'rwise result.

THE READY.

865.. The call ready by . the gunner indicates to the chief ofsection that the pieee is accurately laid and is ready to fire.

'."'.

~

" ~



ltAN'tJALFOR FIELD .ART~LLERY.

'\'. 'TO AVOID INJURY •

... •.' f :: ,,'~ i\ , •

86G. Unle~g the gunner is careful to move his head out of theway ot the sight before the gun Is fired, the shock of dischargemay bring the sight against his eye with sufficient force to

injure it. ,,. I" 'f','

THE COMMAND TO FIRE.

867. The gunner invariably gIves or repeats the commandfire In actual or simulated firing, so as to insure his piece beingft~ed at the proper time.

:;.1 ',,'TO ),IEASURE A DEFLECTION.

868. The gun being established in direction by direct layingor otherwise, the deflection may be measured by turn lag therotating head of the panoramic sight until the vertical crosShair is on the aiming point. The reading of the instrument is~hen the deflection sought. ;: ,869. The gunner is practiced in measuring the deflection asfollows: 'The gun being laid In direction on any target with zero de~

llection and the gunner seated on his trail seat, the instructorcommands, for example:, 1. Aiming point, that clock tower.~.,. 2. MEASURE THE DEFLECTION. ,~, 1. The gunner turns the rotating head of the panoramic sightunt1l the verUcal cross hair Is on the designated aImIng point. :.. 2. He then reads and announces the deflection, thus: Delleo':tion, 490.' , , , I

; 'The Instructor verifies the reading and sees wheth~l the$Ight Is accurately directed upon the aiming voint.

DUTIES IN DETAIL OF No.1.

':' 870.: The' dnties of No; 1 In the service of the piece are: .1. 'To set and release the brake.2. To open the breech.3. To set the site on the quadrant.

,

' ..... i

"

'

"

' '



MANUAL FOR FIELD :ARTILLERY.

the command:' Target (So-and-so). In direct laying No.1 mustbe careful not to touch the elevating mechanism .. 88G. To give the elevatioIl. to the piece, No. ,1 operates theelevating handle until the bubble of the elevation level is

centered. I •

. .Turning the elevating handle clockwise moves' the bubble tothe front and Increllses the elevation and the range, and vice'Versa.' It is important that this become second nature to No.1.. 887. 1\0. 1 may be practiced in his duties of hl~'ing for eleva-

tion as follows:1 "No; 1 being seated on his trail seat, at the piece unlimbered,the quadrant in its seat and the cross level bubble centered, theinstructor commands, for example: .

, 1. Site 280.

'2. 3400.: . 1. At the command for the site No.1 sets it off with his right

hand.2. Sets the range with his left band., .:3. Centers the cross level bubble, if llecessar~'.4. Centers the bubble of the elevation by turning the elevat-

ing handle. with his right hand. . ",'J, 5; Calls set when he has laid the piece accurately for eleva-tion. .The instructor ..erifies the settings and the centering of the

bubbles.THE SET.

888. The call set by No.1 indicates that so far as he is con-cerned the piece is accurately laid.. ,As soon as he calls set !'io. 1 grasps the firing handle with the'left hand.

'Vhen the chief of section cautions with the lanyard, No.1attaches the lnnyarll to the f1rin~ mE'chanism nnll, after cnllln~set, steps (')(>urof the wheel, holdill~ the end of the lanyard illhis lef~ hand. ,

': ". '. , I TO FIRE •

. . 889. To 11rethe piece, No.1 at the command of his gunnerp)ushes the firing' bandle down with hIs left hand, so as to reoease the firing pin. It is important that No.1 form the habit

'

' '

' ~

'

"

' '




TO SHIFT THE TUAIL•.

. .893. For the assistance of No.2, the upper euges of the ;top

and main shields should be graduated in mils, find each <livisioI\of 50 mils should be marked. No. 2 should also he instructed

as to the value in mils of the width of the trail spade and ofthe float. .''Vith the origin at the mid(Ue of an upper edge the divisions

on the shields should he for the average case with the 3-iudlfield gun G, 12, 18.1 a11112.t(> inches from the origin to indicatedivisions of 50, 100', 150, and 200 mils, respectively.' The mid-dle of the top of the tir~ is ap11roximately 250 mils from the

center divisIon.A shift of the trail hj', the width of. its mark in the ground

corresponds to a change of dirceUon of about 150 mils .. IA 8hift of the trail by the width of the 110at corresponds to

n change of direction of about 2:!0 mils. . .894. To shift the trail, 1\0. :2 stands immediately in rear of

the trail hand:;;pike, feei: about 18 inches apart, and graspS

the hl;lndspike with both hands. .'895. When the target is visible and direct laying Is used, No.

2 sights along the barrel and shifts the trail so ,as to point t1\egun directly at the target. 1]nl('s8 the target is moving it should

not he necessary to shift the trail durIng the firing. In the caseof mo'\ing targets ::\0, 2, after once poInting the piece at thetarg('t, does not shift the trail until he gets the gunner's cont.mand: Muzzle right (left). lIe then shIfts the trail so as to

brin.g the piece again on the targ('t.W hene\"E'r it is ncecssary to shift the trail in direct laying,

NO..2 watches the gUlln('r and does not complete the shifting ofthe trail until the gunner has trtl\"ersed the gun to the center orto one extreme of its movement on the carriage (864).

89G. ::\0. 2 is prllcUc<:>c!n pointing the piece directl.)' at thetarget.The pI('ce heing in posItlon alHl Ko. 2 at the trnil hnndspike,

the instructor commands, for example: .'.' Target, that house. .r\o. 2 points the piece quickly on the designated target.

.

" '



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. ,

The instructor verifies the pointing with the pnnoramic sightset at zero deflection., 897. When the piece is laid for direction l)y the use of annhnlng point (indIrect laying), No 2 gIves the orIginal directionto the piece by shifting the trn11 in accordance with the com-

mnndR or RI,c:'llfilsof the chief of section, or of- some one repre-s('nt1'n~ the chief of section. . ,.'1'0 signal to No.2, the chief of sC'ction extends his arm

townrd the trail. palm of the hand turned nnd fingers pointingin the dir('ction in which the troll is to be movC'd. To indicatethnt the direction is correct and that the trail is to be lowered,the ('hief of section commands: Trail down; the correspondingslgnnl is the bringing of the extended flrlll ~hnrply to the side.898. No.2 Is vrncticed in giving the picce its initial pointing

in Indirect laying. In thesc exereises an aIming point is taken,tlw sight is set at an appropriate reading and the chief of sec-tion, looking along a side of the rotating head, causes the gunto lIe given it:s proper direction. .No. 2 should also be instructed as to whnt should be the ap-

prOXImate direction of the piece whon the 8i~ht, set at differentdeflections, is directed on nn aiming point.899. After the initial direction hns been gh'e!1, :Ko. 2, In Inrli.

reet laying, shifts the trail wheneYer the deflection is chnn~edby riO mils or more un(I also when eyer he gets t1le COllllllHlHI:

Muzzle right (left). . .No.2 must thoroughly under~tnnd that fo;hJfti!1~the trnilto

thl"l right (left) moYl'S the muzzle to the left. (rfg-ht).' ;900. No. 2 is practIced in 8hjftII1~ the trail at the command

for 11 deflection change of 50 mils or more. . ...The piece being' In positIon and No.2 :1t the trail hn[}(h::plke~'

tbe klght directed on an aiming point, the Instructor commands.for l'xample: .

1. Right 100.

2. Trail down. . .'1. At the cOllllllnnd :Right 100, No.2, standIng in his position

for f:lhiftinb the trail, locates nn object, as far a,vny as possible,whIch is in line with the graduation mnrked 100 on the right ofthe top ot the shield, find shifts the trail to the left so as to

'

_



256. MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.'

THE DlUCKET F"C'ZE SETTER.

bring tl)e center division on the shield in line with the objec

selected.i' 2:,At the command or signal trail down No.2 lowers the trail.f' 'l'he instructor makes the appropriate change in the deflection

setting and 'Verifies the accuracy of the work of No.2.' ,,If it, be impracticable to select a definite object upon whichto sight, No.2 judges the amount by which the trail must bshifted by. the width of the trail spade or float (893)~

E~PTY CARTRIDGE CASES.

901. To k~el) the empty cartrid~e cases out of the way of tl~~gUll squatl, ~o. 2 catches the cases as they are ejected.from the

gun and throws them a. little to the rear of the caisson wheefarthest. from the piece.

D"C'TIES I~ DETAIL OF No.3.

,,' 902. The duties of No.3 in the service of the' piece are:1.. To set the corrector.2. To set the range on the fuze setter. . ..3.. To set the fuze when the hand fuze setter is uHed.

:903. The fuze setter is a device for setting time fuzes so tha

the projectiles will burst in the air at such height as. may ,bdesired. It has a range scale and a corrector scale.' .The range scale is graduated in yards from 0 to 6400,.1ts leas

reading being GO~'nrds. 'Vhen a shrapnel is turned in the' fuzsetter, the fuze is set so that the projectile w111burst, afte

being fired, at about the range set off on the mnge scale.The torrector scale is uniformly graduated. into 60 divisionS

Every tenth diylsion is numhered in figures 0, 10, 20,--60.The purpose of the device is to change the time of burning.ofthe fuze, IndependC'ntly of the range scale, and thus to controthe point at which the pro.iedlle bursts. Under normal condt10ns a change of fuze setting by one unit of this scale producea varlatlOIl of about 1 mil in the height of burst of the projec

' '

'

• J



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.2~l_,

. The middle graduation of the scnle, 30, cor~es~nds

oretlcully to the normal height of hurst, 3 mils.904. Increasing the corrector reading shortens the time ofrning of the fuze and hence raises the point of burst of theojectile; decreasing the corrector reading lengthens the Hme

burning of the fuze and hence lowers the point of burst ofe projectile.. .'The corrector scale, thus affords the means of correcting anserve«l error in height of burst and of adjusting the mean

int ,ot burst at the proper height.905. To set the corrector, No.3 turns the corrector worm knobth the right hand ~o as to bring the movable index oPP05ite'e corrector reading ordered. It must become habituul witll. 3 to turn the eorrector knob in a clockwise direction' to

crease the reading, and to turn the knob counterclockwise tocrease the reading. \ .906. To set the range, No.3 turns the runge worm crank, w)thher Imnd, so as to bring the range reading opposite the fixeddex of the range scale. 'It must become habitual with No.3tnrn the range crank cloclnvise to increase the reading, andturn the crank counterclockwise to decrease the- reading:907. In setting either scale, No. 3 must be trained to placeheud so that he looks squarely at the scale uncI its index.

908. No.3 is repeatedly practiced in setting the scales of theze setter by command.The .caisson .beIng in posItion with the fuze setter loweredd No.3 being seated at the fuze setter ,vith his back to theide of the right wheel of the caisson, the instructor com:'

ands, for example:1. Corrector 28.2. 3600.

1. No.3 sets off t1le corrector as soon as it is announced .

,2.. Sc.ts the rall~e senle at the range ordered.,The instructor verifies the setting's.909. 'l'he corrector having onee been set, changes in the set~g are usunllymade ut the command: Up (Down) (So many).The command up menns that the corredor reading is to becrellHcd; down menns that the corrector rending Is to be

100281°~VOL.l--l1---,-9

'

'



268 MANUAL FOIt FIELDAR'l'ILLEIty ...

,No.3 Is practiced In this method as follows: . .1

The corrector having been set at: 28, the instructor ,COln'"mands,' for' example: ,', ,"1. Up 5. 0 ", 0,[: 'i

2. 3400. / .

'1~' No. 3 increases the corrector reading by 5 I)Qi~ts and,: ae-cordingIy, sets corrector 33. I J, ..

2. Sets the range at 3400.The instructor verifies the settings. , .

910. Even though time fire is not being used, No.3 always,keeps his scales set according to the commands. If percussion.fire is being used, No.3 is thus always ready to pass to timefire.

THE HAND FUZE SETTER.

911. The hand fuze setter is used' only when, the bracket

fuze setter is not available. No.3 sets the scales in n manuer.similar to that described for the brucl{et fuze setter. ,He llISO'sets the fuze, No.5 holding the round. ,;', ':" .';. To set the fuze with the band fuze setter, No. 3 engages thefuze setter on the fuze and turns the fuze setter to the rightwith, a steady and uniform motion until the lug on the fuzecomes firmly against the fuze-setter stop.

.1 . .'f

DUTIES IN DETAIL OF ,No.4.

912.' The ;luties of No: 4 in the service ~f 'the' piece are:'.1. Intime fire to complete the setting of the fuze.'2. 'To insert the round in the breech.

3. In volley fire to call out the number o~ the round.

TO COMPLETE THE FUZE SETTIoNG.

913. The signal that time fire Is to be used is the 'command:Corrector (So much). The signal that percussion ':tlreis to pe:used 'Is the command:' Shell, or Percussion. . ,"'. ,0.

914. In time fire, to Insure correct setting of the fuze, No.' 4'turns the projectile to the right, before reinoving it from thefuze'setter, being careful not to turn it until' the 'scales huvebeen set. ,

,

'

' " " " "

-



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY .., 269.

In turning the proj{>('ttle"No. 4 stands' slfghtly to the leftRnd' rear of the fuze sett€'r facing to the right fro:H. His lefthand, buck down, grasps the round at or near the forward' endof the cartridge ense. The pnlm of the rIght hunt! is l)laced onthe bllse of the cartridge cuse, the fingers grasping the edge of

the base. While turning the projectile, No.4 takes care to boldthe body of the projectile down on the guide and to keep the fuzewell engaged by :.:t 8teady pressure on the base of the cartridgecase with the right hand. The projectile should be turned witha steady and uniform motion until. the lug on the fuze comesfirmly against the fuze setter stop.

TO INSERT THE ROUND.

915. In time fire: Having accurately set the fuze, No. ,4lthdrllwS the round from the fuze setter, taking care to drawstraight out so' as to avoid any possibility of changing, thectUng. At the same time No. 4 slips his left hand towardhe point of the projectile until it is about at the center ofravity of the round. As 800n as the fuze is clear of the bodyf the fuze setter No.' 4 8prings toward the breech, steppingfT with the right, foot. As he approaches the gun he rnises

he point of. the projectile slightly above the bnse and allowshe weight of the round to be sUI)ported by the left hand. Theingers of the right hand are rigidly extended, the palm of theand being l~ept firmly pressed against the buse of the cartridgea!'ole. Taldng position to the left and rear of the breech, theront of his body being parallel to the axis of the bore, e).es onhe breech recess, No. 4 inserts the nose of the projectile inhe chamber and shoves it forward, the extentled right handeing brou~ht sharply ngainst the face of the breech. The

'Iofo!ing.f the breech insures the proper seating of the projec-As soon as he has Inserted the round, Ko.4 quickly re-

umes his position nt the fuze setter. ,916. When the JlI1nd fuze setter Is used, llnd in percussIonre, No.4 receives a round of ammunition directly from ~o .. 519) .nnd inserts it ns nhove prescrIbed .. ,917. In percussion fire No.4, after taking n round from No. !),.ands at his position at the breech and loads the piece as. soon,



260 MANUAL FOR FIELl>ARTILLE.RY ..

as the previous round has been :(ired.. No. 4Is thus always readyto load the piece without loss of time. He takes care to standclear, of the breech during recoil. , . •. ... 918. No.4 Is practiced in setting the fuse and in loading'j:hepiece. His training in his duties in volley tire. is not begun

until drill in the duties of the gun squad combined is. C01ll4menced.

DUTIES IN DETAIL OF No.5.

919. The duties of No.5 in the service of the piece ,are:1. To take ammunition from the chest.

2.>When the bracket fuze setter is being used, to insert ,theround in the fuze setter uncI to set the fuze.3. When the hand fuze setter is used, to hold the round While

No.3 sets the fuze. .,4. To pass the round directly to No.4 in percussion fire, and

when the hand fuze setter is used in time fire. .

TO REMOVE A ROUND FROU THE CHEST; .' ;

920. To take a round from the chest, No.5 places himself tothe left rear of the round selected, grasps the edge of the car-

tridge case with the fingers of the right hand, vulls the' roundto the rear, across the front of Ills body, and catches the bodyof the projectile with the left hand. As soon as he is relievedof one round 1\0. 5 immediateiy takes another from the chest. I

THE BRACKET FUZE SETTER.

921. When the bracket fuze setter is used, No.5 strips off thewaterproof hood of the fuze. He then inserts the point of the

projectile in the fuze setter, tnking care that the lug ileal:estthe point of the fuze E'ngages in the groove in the fuze setter,and sets the fuze for the settings then on the fuze setter asprescribed for No.4. .

922. Having set the fuze, No.5 Immediately takes anotherround from the chest, strips off the waterproof hood, and stundsready to Insert the round In the fuze setter as S0011 as No.4has withdrawn the previous round. . ','

-

'"

'

"

'



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 26i

THE HAND FUZE SETTER.

923. When the hand fu~e setter is used, Ko. 5 holds the rotinuwhile No.3 sets the fuze. Nos. 3 llnd 5 should occupy the samerelative positions that they haye in usin~' the bracket fnzesetter. As soon liS No.5 lws wlthdrnwll the round from the(~hest and stripped off the hood, he faces to fhe ri~ht rear andkneels 011 the right knee. The round is plnced with the baseof the curtridge cuse against the right knee, the edge resting onthe ground. '.rbe point of the projectile is up so that tbe uxlsof the round is pointe(I in the direction of 1'0. 3's head. No.5grusps tbe round with both hands, the right arm resting on theright thigh, bad>: of the right hand up. The left arm rests

against the outside of the left leg, back of the left l~and dOWl~~TO PASS .A ROUND TO NO.4.

{.

924. lVben he passes a round to Ko. 4, Ko. 5 pInces the righthand under the center of the cartridge case aud the left handunder the center of the projectile, backs of both hands down.1'he round is held horizontally and well away from the body,the base of the cartridge case heing presented to Ko. 4. Ko. 4

rC'('elves the round hy passin~ his left arm under the right armf Ko. 5, grasping the round hetween the hands of Ko. 5, at theame time grasping the buse of the cartridge cuse with the

ight hand.DUTIES OF Nos. 6 .AND 7.

925. Nos. 6 and 7 haye no specific duties in the service of theiece after it Is established in position. They act as spare.nnnoneers. .

926. Upon goIng' into fiction, Nog. G find 7 nre utilized for theonstruction of eoneenlnwnt for the enrrifigC's, for line guardsn the telephone lines, for the resnppJr of fi1l11l1Ullition,etc.his work jg done under the immediate supervision of thexecutive or. his assistant.

.4




To MOVE BY HAND THE CARRI.\GES UNLIMBERED.

937. 1. Pieces (Caissons) forward (backward), 2. MARCH, 3HALT. .

Each piece: The gunner and No. 2 gra~p the trail handles,

the gunner the left, ~o. 2 the right handle; Nos. 1 and. 3 theright and left wheels, re~pectiveJy; Nos. 4 and 5 place them-selves so as to work advantageou!oll.y at the hreech of the gunin moving forward, at the muzzle in moving backward. Nos. 6and, assist nt the nearest wheels. At the command march,all working together move t"1] carriage in the direction incHcated. At the command halt, they stop the carriage nnd resumetheir posts.. .

Each caisson: Bxecuted as explaine<l for the l)iece, except

that Nos. 4 and 5 are at the trail of the caisson and that thegunner and No.2 work in rear of the caisson chest in movingto the front, against the footboards in moving to the rear.

PREPARATION FOR ACTION. AND l\tARCH ORDER•.

TO PREPARE FOR ACTION.

938. The carriages being in position unlimbered: PREPAREFOR ACTION.

I<]ach member of the gun squad performs his duties in theorder given below: .

Gunner: (a) Removes the hood from the ~ight bracket;(b) Releases the traversing antI elevating lock and operates

the traversing find elevating gear;

(c) Hemoves the sight shank from its case and places it in itssocket, setting the range at 3,000 and the peep sight deflection atzero;

(d) Takes the pnnoramic sight from its case and places it inIts seat, making Sl1l'e that the sight is clamped and that the de--flection is set fi t zero;

(e) Ibises and secures the top shield, with the assista nee ofNo.1; .

. (f) Seats himself on his seat.No.1: (a) Hemoves the quadrant from its case and places it

In Its seat; centers the cross level bUbble;



MANUAL FOR' FIELD ARTILLERY.

(b) Sets the range at 3,000 and the sight at 300, and bringsthe range, bubble to the center; ,

(c) Equips himself with a lan~'ard and a wiping cloth; .(d) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the ,breech

block, .bore, and chumber, cleaning any parts requiring,)t,lea ving the breech open, except when the gun ,is .loaded; .•

(e) Assists the gunner in raising find securing the top shield;. (1) Aeuts himself on his seat.. No.2: (a) Hemoves the breech cover;. (b) Turns huck the trail handspike and engnges It;(c) Huns around to the right of the piece and assists No.3

to lower the piece apron; . '. .(d) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers for use in

their ears' '.,. (e) S('ats him~elf on the handspike. .... No.3: (a) Huns around the left of the caisson find removes

the muzzle cover; ,(lJ) Hemoves the' front sight cover and adjusts the sight In

Its firing position;(c) Lowers the piece apron, with the assistance of No.2;(d) Senti'! himself at the fuze setter, with his back to the

right caisson wheel;(c) Sets his SCHI<~S nt corrector 30, range 3,000. . • ,; •

No.4: (a) Asslst('d h~' No.5, lowers the caisson npron;( lJ) Low('rs the fuze setter; .'(c) Assisted b~' No.5, raises the caisson door;

I (d) Stn nds rC'udy 10 serve ammunition.No.5: (a) Assists No.4 to 10\\,('1' the caisson npron; ,(b) Assists No.4 to raise the caisson door;

J (c)' Puts a round of shrnpnel in the fuze setter, setting the

fuze;, (d) Stantls ready to serve ammunition.The cnnnoneers report to their chief of section if any parts of

the mnt~riel arc not In wOl'ldn~ order. '. ,939. The carringes, limbered, are habitually prepnred for

action before reaching the ftrin~ position. 'I'he duties of thecannoneers are the same as nt the carriages unlimbered, exceptthat after the examination of the elevating and traversing gear

'

'

t :



264 MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY ..

the piece Is secured by the traveling lock; the trail handspikeIs not turned back; the breech is closed; the firing pi.1 Is re-leased; the fuze setter Is not lowered, nor Is a round put in thefuze setter; the apron is not lowered; the caisson door is leftclosed; and the cannoneers do not tal;:e theIr posts for servIng

the gun. The gunner and No.1 return the panoramic sIght andthe quadrant to their cases, unless special orders to the contraryare given. ,

Immediately after establishing the carrIages the preparationfor actIon is completed wIthout command and the cannoneerstake their posts for serving the piece.

940. If prepare for action has not heen gIven before estab.lishing the carriages in the firing position, that command ishabitually given by each chief of section as soon as' his car-

rIages have been unlImhered and established. ,]~he instructormaj., however, caution do not prepare for action when he wishesto drill the personnel In limbering and unlimbering only or illthe cJetai!s of preparation for action.

POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED AND PREPARED

FOR ACTION.

941. In each ,squad, the gunner, seated on his seat facing the

gun.No.1, seated astride hIs serit facing the gun.No.2, seated a~tride the trail handsl)jke near the trail.No.3, seated with his back to the insIde of the right caisson

wlieel, facIng the bracket fuze setter, legs extended one on eachside of the fuze 8etter. .

, Nos. 4 and G, in renr of the ealsson In a convenient positlonfor the performance of their duties.

l'os. 6 and 7, abreast and in order from right to left, 5 yardsin rear of the trail r-:patleof their })iece, nwaiting (mlers.Higher numbered cannoneers, if present, accompany the

limbers.

In the Horse Artillery the two highest numbered cannoneersnct as horse holders and take the lead horses to the. rear wIththe limbers.

'. ,




( d) Raise!'! and secures the fuze setter;(c) Assisted by No.5, raises and secures the caisson apron;(f) Takes his post.

No.5: (a) Ueceives ammunition from No. 4 and stores it inthe chest;

(b) Assists No.4 to lower and secure the caisson door:(c) Assists No. 4 to raise and secure the caisson apron;(d) Takes his post.

If it is intended to resume the fire, lJut in another position,so that the limberin~ of the carriage is necessitated, the com-man(! MARCH ORDER is not given. At the command forlimbering the carriages are placed in the order described inparagraph 939.

THE FIRING BATTERY.

COMPOSITION, FOlnfATIOX, Al'\D INSTRGCTION 01<'THE FIRING

BATTEHY.

944. The firing battery COmlH'ises tll(~ guns and caissons ofthe first five seetion8 of the battery, with the personnel {lndanimals assigned to their immediate service. It Is untier thedirect command, or orders, of the cuptain.

* * * * *945. For the instruction of recruIts the drill, of the gun&Quads Is at first carried on In the parle Later the InstructIon

of the firing battery Is carried on Over all form" of terrninavailable. . ,

In the field it is desIrable that the guns be placed u'pproxl-mntely In line wIth regular intervals of apprOXimately 17 ~'nrdsbetween adjacent gun wheels. It is more important thnt theintervals he regular than that tlwY' be exaetly 17 yards. guch

chief of section cautions (Such) piece, or, No. (So-and-so), as

soon us his carriages have been established in position (47). .In the park the limbered cnrriages are formed in line or

column of double sections, the cnisson of eaeh seetion beingalongside of and at t\\"o rards interval from its pIece, at suchintervals or distances between sections ns may be practicable.By the execution of action front (rear, right, or left) the car-

'



ringes nre placed in line in the firing position at sufficient Inter-vals for thedrm of the gUll squads. ,,',' .' . , . ':946.. At, the' mmmencement of training of recruits In their

duties in tlle firing battery, their instruction in the elementaryJlrinciples of gunner~' contained in this chapter will be begun.

As the instruetlon progresses and the recruits are divided intodasses, euch class sllOuld.be instructed in ,so much of the prin-dples involved in Service Firing as the men of the particularclass can thoroughly grasp.

:MANUAL :'FOR -:FIELD' ARTILLERY. 16T

...; '\.1

n-bTIES' IN GENERAL OF THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS OF THE

GUN SECTIONS.

r ,-

950.' Chief of gun section:

1. Commnn<ls his section.2. 'Makes sure' of the identification of his part of the target

OJ' of the aiming point. ;, 3. Keeps informed of the firing data so as to be able to reo-TIPnt any parts not understood by the cannoneel'S but doeS notl'pveat anything unless it is called for by a subordinate.. If a('hief of section does not understand any Hem of the firing datahe asks the executive for it thus: Site? Corrector? etc. .4.' In indirect laying whenever the trail has to be shifted,

puts the gunner npproximntely on tIle aiming point by glancingnlong one side of the rotating heau of the panoramic sight and,causing the. trail to M ,shifteu until tile side of the, rotating]wnd is In llne with the aIming point (897). '~ ., n. Comm3 nds with the lanyard for the first shot ,vhen .theground is. !':iuch tlla t the trail spade is not easIly seated, nnds~cs that nIl the cannoneers step clear of the piece for the .firstsllOt. ' ," .

, o. Extends' his right arm vertically as soon as the gunnerhus called ready, so ns to Indicate to the executive officer thatthe pIece is ready to fire,' The rigllt arm is held vertical until1118 gunner commands fire." .7. Supervises and, is responsible for all, the detaIls, of cor-('t service by hIs gUll squad.951. Gunn,er: r ,',

1. Performs his duties in the gun squad.

'

' _ '

' "




0'

. 2.. Commands muzzle right (left) when he has reached thelimit of traverse of the gun on the ('arriage.

3. Commands :fire 80 that his piece '''ill be fired, after havingbeen accurately laid, at the proper time.

DEFLECTION AND DEFLECTION Dln'EREN~E.

955. Euch gun in the battery must be so l)()illted that itg. pro-jectile will full III thedirectioll of Its part of the target.956. The direction of ('ach gun may be gIven by setting the

sight at zero, tlwu In"ing-iug tlte cross hail's on the target byshifting the trail and traH'rsing the gun on the carriage.Or, the direction of the gun may be given by setting the

sight at a reading, called the deflection, vrevions]y determinedand then bringing the vertical cross hall' on a designated aim~

Ing point by shifting the trail and traversing the gun on itscarriage ..

957. When the guns are laid for direction by bringing thecross' hairs on the target, each gunner sights at nnt! 11is pro-jectiles should fall on his own part of the target:When the guns are laid for direction by bringing the vertical

crossllairs on an aiming point it is usually necessary to givethe guns -different deflections in order that cncll piece mny bebrought on its own part of the target. The difference In de-

flections is called the deflection difference. It is usunlly smalland is the same for any two adjacent pieces.958; By opening out the guns like n fan, the front covered

by the fire is increased; by closing in the guns, the front cov-ered may he decreased. By IncreasIng or diminIshing the <Ie-flection difference, therefore, the front on whIch the vrojectilesfall may be increased or decreusfld at will.

The lines of fire of severnl pieces collectively directed formthe sheaf of fire.

959. When an aiming point is used, the captaIn, assisted byhis battery detail, determines the defleetion for one of thepieces and the amount by whIch the other pIeces must beopened out or closed in on this one in order that the shots nwyfull on the front (]C'sired.

The piece for which the deflection is determille<.l or on which. the others are to close or open i::; indicnte(l by the number ;of

- 0

0

o

o

o



MANUAL FOR' FIELD' ARTILLERY. .$69

t':1e piece given in the command: On (such) piece, Open (close). (&0 much)~ This piece is called the directing piece., 960. SInce the' defle'ction"' difference for any two. adjacentrlleces . is the same, each gunner must multiply the 'deflectiondiff~rence' by the number of gun Intervals between his piece

nnd the directing piece in order to' find the amount by ",hlchhis defiection will differ from that of the directing piece. . ....961. The gunner' of the directing piece tloes not change bis de.

tleetioll on account of the deflection difference .. In ol'der to open out the sheaf the guns on the right of the111redlng piece must have their muzzles moved to the right findthose on the left of the directing piece must have their muzzlesmoved to the left. i Since tlecrensing. the deHection moves themuzzle to the right and throws the shot to the right, each gun-

ner on the right of the directing piece, in order to open thesheaf, must. multiply the deflection difference by his numberof Intervals from the dirpcting piece and subtract the resultfrom the deflection announced. Since increasing the deflectionmoves the muzzle to the left find throws the shot to the left,each gunner on the left of the directing piece, in order to openthe sheaf, must multiply the deflection difference by his numberof intervalS from the directing piece llnd add this result to the

deflection announced.' '.962. Converse]:r, to close the sheaf 011 the directing piece, thegunners on the right ,must Increase the deflection or fidd to it, sous to throw the muzzles of their guns toward the directingpiece, while those on ,the left ,must decrease the deflection orf:o!ubtrfictfrom it in order to throw their muzzles toward the

directing piece.963. When the aiming point is in certain positions it may ,

.happen that the fire will be properly tlistributed on the target

When the deflection of all the pieces is the same, or when thedeflection difference is zero. The absence of any commandopen or close Is the indication thnt all the pieces are to be laid

with the same deHectlon .. , 964. After the first or subsequent flring, one of the guns maybe directed 011 Its part of the target while the others are not. In. such cuses the captain does not change the deflection but bringsalii the .guns on t~le target by opening or closing on the gun

'"hleh has the proper direction.

'



MANUAL' :FOR::FIELD ARTILLERY.

, 985.' When it Is possible' for the gunner to see the: targetrlearly nnd to aim tlirectly upon the part of It which ,the tireof his gun Is intentled to reach, the gun may be lahl' by tIlegunner for both range and direction. This is called direct

laying. .. ",.986. When it 1s ImpracUcablefor the gunner to ulm directly

'upon thir pnrt of the target which the fire of his gun is In-tended to rench, the gun is lllldhy him for direction onrS'~ 11\this eusc analnling point whi(.Jl can be dearly 8een by the'gunner Is designated find n suitllble'deflection given', such that,W~letl the line Of si~ht Is directed upon the nhning point, the

gunwlll he directed upon the target. This 1s clllletl indirect,laying. ." ,965. The gunners are trained in 8eUing off the corrected de-

flection lndividually fiS well us during the instruction of thegun squads. . :' , !. I. • ,.

I\'or exumple: 1. Dellection 1620, 2. On 1st piece, Open 10. Allthe'~u11lier~ set lG20 as' soon as it Is announced . .As soon us'On:1st piece, Open 10 Is given the gunner of the 2d piece multi:'

f,everal guns. In such cases the captain' commands: Site, No.1(So and so); No.2 (So and so); etc. The gunner of each piece.sets the site indicated for his particular piece.. ... ;976. The range is announced for each salvo or volley.C 984.'rhe gun' squads must InlOW the kind of projectile and

the fuze which are to be used. This is indicated to th-elll bythe commands: Shell; or, :Percussion;: or, Corrector (So much) ;'or; Up' (Down) (So much). The 'command" shell indicates thatf;hell are to be. used., The command percussion. indicates thatshrapr.el for percussion tire are to be used. Since shrapnel forr)ercussion fire must have their fuzes set at safety and sincethe fuzes ure carried at that setting in the ,('hest, it is not'neeessaryto use the fuze setter when th.e command percussion:Is given; but,. as the gun squads must be ready to ('bange from

pm'cussion to time' fire, No.. 3 ahvll~'S sets his range scule atthe last runge announcetl. j. •

'Corrector (So much); 'or, Up (Down) (So much) indicates timefire with shrnpnel and that the fuzes must be set.. I

II:' •.• i:. M~THODS OF LAYlN'G.

'

" " " '

' ~

•

'



MANUAL' FOR' FIELD ARTILLERY;

plies' 10'by hIs interval (one) and adds the result' (10):<to'1620and ,accordingly 'sets 1630.. The gunner-of the 3d, pIece 'multI .plies 10 by his interval (two) and adds the result (20) 'to 1020and accordingly sets '1640. ,The gunner of the\4th' pIece. mnltI .plies 10 by'his'interval (three) and adds the 'result (30) to

1620, and accordingly sets'1650,,The sights being set as above, for example, the conuuand

may' be: On 3d piece, Close 5. The' 3d pIece becomes thedirecting piece nnd its gunner leaves his sIght reading at 1640.The gunner of the 4th piece multiplies 5 by his interval (one),subtracts the result (5) from 1650, and accordingly sets IG4GTheguimer of the 2d piece multiplies his interval '(one) 'by:'5,adds the: result (5) to 1630, and accordingly sets 1635. 'Thegunner. of the 1st piece multiplies his interval (twO)-by 5, adds

the result (10) to 1620, and accordingly sets 1630.The instructor verifies the settings. .

966. It'is most important thnt all the gunners first set 'thedeflection ordered and' then npp]y the deflection difference.This method avoids errors and results in greater rapidIty thanis obtained should the gunner nttempt to muke all of his calcu-lations and then to set off the rf>sulting deflection.967. It may be that the aiming point Clln be seen from only

one piece. In such cases the executive, nfter nnnounclng. thedeflection, comman(!s: Lay on (Such) piece, desIgnating 'thepiece from Which the fi'iming point can he seen. At this 'com-mand each chief of section, except that of the piece designated,causes llis gunner to turn his sight in the direction of thedesignated Iliece and his No. 2 to extent! the l'ammer stl1ffvertically in front of the object glass of the sight. The desig~nated piece lUl\'ing been accurately lalu at the iridicated deflec-tion, its chief of section causes the gunner to turn his sight,without traversing the piece, so that the vertica!, hair'. wIllbisect the rnmmer staff nt the other pieces in' succession nndannounces the reading, thus: No. (So and so), (So much). Thechief of section of the piece which can see the aiming pointthen C:luses No.2 to extend his rnmmer staff vertically along-side the sight. . .

As the reading for his piece is called off, each chief of sectionwho is unable io see the aimIng point ~ubstracts 3,200 from the



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY, 273

read Lng announced if he is on the left of the piece trom whichthe aiming point can be seen, or adds 3,200 to the rending if heis on the right. He then causes th~ gunner to set his sight ac-cording to the result thus obtnined find to lny on the rnmml'fstuff at the designated piece. 'I'his results in the guns heing lnid

so that the axes of the bores are parllllel., ,IiJuch chIef of section tlJen selects his o\\"n fiiming point nnd, causps the gunner to mensure the defledion (959). I

968. The necessity for taking full ad\"lllltng'e of ('over for theconcealment of the guns, ('specially frolll airel'nft, may some-times make it impossible to utilize a COllllllonniming point or tosee o,ne pieee from another. In sueh ('a~es the exeeutive causesthe pieees to be pointed, by the {~om}lass or other means, fiSnearly as may he in the proper direetion. One of the pieces I~

selected to fire a single round of time shrapnel so fiS to give aburst about 10 mils nbove the horizon visible from the guns fintlut as great n range as practicable. 'I'he remaining pieces nre soelevated nnd the sIghts are so set 1IS to ennble cneh gunnerqUickly to turn tIle rotnting head of his panor:unic !'light upon theburst without disturbing the la~'lng of the plpcE.'. Euch dllef ofsection, having noted the deflection, Clluses the gunner to turnthe sight on any suitable niming point without di~tul'blng theluying. The reading on the aiming point seleeted i~ then dimin-ished by the reading on the burst if this latter reading was lessthnn 3,200 .. If the reading on the burst WfiSgreater tlUlll 3,200the reading on the selpeted aiming point is increnst>d b~' thefli1f:erence betwet'll the hurst settln,~ nnd 0,400. The deflectionobtained uy mnkillg the correetions just IndicHted is then set ofton eneh sight and eHeh gunner brings his ('r08S hllirs on the nlm- .lng point seleett:'d hy traversing the piece. This rt>sults in theIlleces all being Inid on the point of burst of the shot tired. By

fluitable commnnds for opening the euptllill forms the sheaf.96S. Having once formed the sheaf, the ('aptain. may changeIts <1ir('<'110nby announelng n new deflection or by the com-mand: Right (Left), (So much). At the ('Ommlllld, for example,:Right 30, ('uell gunnpr subtracts 30 from his <1etlection, sets hisflight at the new detlt:'ction, und brings his verticul cross hair onthe aiming point by traversing the piece. Eneh gunner hns thenmoved the muzzle of his gun to the right through an angle of




80 mils. Simllarly, if. the command be Left 30 each gunneradds 80. .970. The dIrection and-'dlstributlon may be changed simul-

taneously. 'At the command, for example, 1. Left 30, 2. On 1st

piece, Close 5, each gnnner' first adds 30, and then applles the

defiection difference (965);' Having set off' his correct deilec-tion,' each gunner brings hIs vertical cross haIr on the aimingpoint by traversing the piece.971.' In order properly to dIstribute the fire, it is sometimes

necessary to change the deflection of a sIngle piece while leav-Ing the others unchanged. The captaIn commands, for example,(Such) piece, Right (Left), (So much). The dellection of thedesignated piece only is changed. as Indicated in the command., ;

FIRE FOB ADJUSTMENT; FIRE FOB ,EFFECT.

989. It Is usually impossible to determine before firing theexact la:rlng which will certainly give hits on the target. It Istherefore necessary to correct the luylng according to the cap-tain's observation of' the bursts with reference to the target.The first part of the fire at any target Is accordingly conductedso as to facllltate observation. Such fire is called, fire for

adjustment. .990. The fire must always be adjusted in direction, In distri-bution, and in range. In time fire the height of burst mustalso be adjusted. . ,As n rule, the direction, distribution, and height of burst

may be' quite accurately observed and adjustt>tl by makIngchanges in the deflection,deflection difference, and corrector.Adjustment of the range is more difficult. It is usually impos-sible to determine a single range which will surely give hits on

the target. On this account it Is generally best to (leterminetwo ranges,.one of which gives bursts short of the target andone of which gives bursts beyond the target. The determlna-tion of these two ranges Is culled bracketing the target. Thedifference between the two ranges is called the bracket.

991. Having obtained the adjustment, fire is. opened atrnnges and, in time fire, at a height of burst which will surely'give hlt& on the target. ThIs is called 1l.refor e1fect. .', .

' '

'




METHODS OF FIRE •.

276

,995. The methous of fire n re fire. by salvo, volley fire, volley-;flre sweeping, nnll fire at will. The.,m.:e of salvos und volleys ishUbitual nlltl both nntures of fire are oruinarily used In firing

ut euch turgpt, particularly in tllll~, fir~. Volley-tire sweepingis employt'd during 1jre fOl' e1,/"p(.t. Flr~ nt will is exceptional,being used only for tlll' dose defpn~e of the guns.

SAI_YOS.

996. The ('Ollll11nnd for n bnttery galvo is: Battery right(left). Upon the eOllllllllnd fire by the executive the pieces are1ired, at the eOllllllunl1 of thp ~unn('rs, in order from the right

at intervals of about two seeonds.997. The COlllnUll111or n platoon salvo is: Right right (left),

or, Left left (right). ... The first word of the comnlfilHl designates the platoon whlehis to fire.If the '('ommnnd bl' right right (left) the first an<l second

pi{'ces only fire lonuel.l. ~illlilarly, If the command he left left(right) the, third finu fOlll'th ple('('s oJlI~' are Joaded.. l.'he second word of tile cOlllmand indleates the flank fromwhich the piecl\s deslgJll1ted nre to he snceesslvely fired; . Upon~he command fire, by the ('x('cnt!ve, tIle pieces designated urefired, nt the comm:wl] of their gunllt'rs, in tbe order Indicate<lnt Ull intervlli of about two seco1ll1s.. 998. TJle interval of two '8(\('o)l(ls lllay be increas(\ll h)' cau-tionIng, nftpr the {'Ollllllllllll for the saho, At (so many) secondsThe interval thus pl'escrlbl'{l will hI' usptI as long ns salvos nr~tlr('l} until another interval Is annOUll('('Il.

~~)~~%II~\\::III~/~I:~l:~lJ~t~lll:l~SlJ~~II:~e('~~)~~~~~~I~~~~~1~~;ommand. I'~lI{'hpiece Is then tired upon the conulland by' theaptain: No. (So-and-so) Fire, each gunner repeating the ('om-antI fire wl\('n his pIece Is deslgnate(l. .1000. In certnln Cfises it mny be desirable to fire n sln~lell>ee.' 1.'he cnptnlll cOJnmnnlls: (Such) piece only. The deslg-nte(l pl(>('(>only is loud!'ll IInll It Is fired upon the command firethe executive:

'

'



MANUAL FOR' FIELD' ARTILLERY.

1001. When the .method of fire Is by platoon salvo or byiece, ..the gun squads of .the pieces which are not to take Ptlrt

in. the firing keepull. the .instruments' set and the pieces laid inccordance with the COlnIpands. All the guns are thus able topen fire immediately. 'rl,) change from platoon salvos, or firey single piece, to battery 8alvos, the comman<1is: Battery rightleft). All of the pieces take up the first in succession from thel:1nk inuicate<1. . ,1002. Salvos are particularly suitable for fire for adjustmentn account of the facility with which the bursts may be ob.

VOLLEY :FIRE.

. 1003. The communll for battery Yolle~'s is: Battery (So

any) rounds. Upon the commanu :fire by the executive, eachiece fires the designated ilUlllber of rounus as rapidly US pos.ible C(,msistent with accuracy ullll \vithout regnrd to the other

'ro make c{'rtain that the corred number of rounds isired, eadl :r\o. 4 as ,he lonus the piece calls out the runge andthe number of the rounu. 'A'l the Inst rouIlll ordered is loaded,he adds: Last round. Thus, the command' being Battery' 2J'ounds, 3200. On loading the first round, each No.4 calls 3200,One; on 10a<1ing the seconu round, cueh No.4 calls 3200, Two;;Last round. , .1004. In exceptional cases it may be desirable to use one

platoon only in volley fire. In such eases the 'command is :Right (Left), (So many) rounds. Only the pieces in the destg.nal(,'C.lplatoon are loaded und fired.. 1005. Volley fire I~ particularly suitable for fire for effect onaceount of the rapidity \Vitl,l whi~h it may he tleiiven'<.1. ".

VOLLEY-FIRE SWEEI'ING •. ,. ~. O f'

1006. The purpose of sweeping Is to ll1stribute the fire over uwide front. It consists In changing the direction of each piece

between shots .. ; This may be accomplished mechnnicully by n full turn of thetraYersing hanuwheel between rounds If there is not materiallostmotlon In the mechanism. Or, if the reticule of the 'pan.oramic sight Is provided with a horizontul scule,- the Hne ofsIght may be shifteu through an appropriate angle.

-

-

' -

•



MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.' 277

1007. The commands for SWeE'ping are: Battery (So many)rounds, sweeping, or, Right (Left); (So many) rounds, sweeping.The execution Is the same ns that. ,of volley fire (1003-1005)

in every respect, except that after the fIr~t lllld euch succeedinground of the swepp the gunner traverses the piece to the left

by one full turn of the truverslng' lIandwlwel. disregardingaccurate laying in direction; 01', if the reticule of the sight hnsa horizontal scale, insh.'lltl of turning the IInn(lwlleel he shiftsthe line of sight 10 mils to the l..ft for rHng:l'~ up to 2,500 ;yards,5 mils for rallg'es ('xceetllllg 2,riOO ~'llrtl~ (1376-1380).As soon us the last roulld of the S\H>l')) ha~ been tired, the

gunner traverses the piece bn('k to thl' right UlltU the line ofsight is again on the right of his portion of the target or on theaiming point.

FIRE AT WILL

1008. 11'01' the ycry close Ilefense of the guns the command is:1. Target (So-and-s'o), 2.' FIRE AT WILL. At this command.slghts ure set at deflection zero antI rnnge 1000. I<'uze settersare set at corrector 30 and range z(>ro. Hhrnpnel only Ilre used •.l<Jncllgun Is loat1('d f\ntl luiu on the target. Cpon the commandfire by the ex{'eut!\'e, each gun is fIretl as rapidly as possible

until the eOIllJ11111HI cease, :firing or until the target uisappearsor actually reaches the gUll. In fire at will, the gunner l1(:>gled~all refinements of laying, rapidit~' in this cuse being of moreimportance than grent ac~urucr.

CLASSES OF TAIWETS.

1009. Targets fire elml!'ollfipuwith reference to their nature asartillery, infantry, machine guns, etc. The~' are nl~o classifieu

llecordlllg to their movPIlwnt, or power to move, as :fixed 01'

stationary, transient, antI moving. All of the8e muy, of course,vnry us to size and ns to degrpe of movement.1010. I~'lxed, or statlonarr, targ('ts are targets wbich are

fixed to their position for nt least a consldernble time. Ex-nmples of such tllrgets are bulll1lngfo;,trpllches, artillery in posi-tion, troops held unuer cover b:r fire.r.rl'allslent targets are those which while fullr exposed. to

fire fire likely to remain so for u Yer~' brief time. Examples of

'

~



:MANUAL FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.:

ch targets are infantry skirmish lines, machine guns, observa-on parties. : . . .Moving targets are those which are changing their location.xamples of slowly movhlg targets are huge bodies of troopsthe' march, infantry w1lether on the mardl or advancing to

e attaek, wagon trains 'on the murch. Exaruples of rapidlyoving targets nre nrtllJei"y' ntfast gaits, chnrging cnvaJry,valry at fast guits, small bouies of mounted men, motor cars.

RII"G DATA AI"D THEIR Co},nrUNICATION TO TIU~ GUN' SQUADS~

1016. The firing data embrace all the information and. com.ands necessnry to enable tlw gun squads to accomplish thel'llerJy, rapid, nnd accurate service of the pieces. '1'0. thisnd it Is essential thnt the firing llntu be communicated to theuns in an habitual sequence. First place must he given toe element of the data most essential to commencIng the serv-e of the pieces .• The sequence should favor as far as possiblee completion of one operation by n ,particular member of the

squnll hefore he is requlre,l to tnke the data for nnothN'.The necessary uatu for Inuirect luying In their hubitual

>quellcere- .. 1. The \ll'slgnatlon of the aiming point.

2.. The deflection. ,3. The detlt'ctlun difference.4. The site.G. 'rhe kind of projectile (corrector, shell, or percussion.

hrapnel ).G. The method of fire.

7. The J'an~e.8. The cOllllllllnd, by the executive, fire., 1018. The ne(:essary uata for ulrect laying In their habitual

qut'l1ee ure-1. 'rhe de~ignntion of the target.. 2. The deflection.3. The kind of projectile (corrector, shell, or percussion).

4. 'l'hellll~thotl of tIre.u. The range.G.. The command, by the executive, fire.

J

'




1019. Fire at w1ll being an exceptional and special method,in which the sight und the fuze setter have fixed settings(1008), und direct laying with shrapnel is always used, theonly tiring datu necessury are the designation of the target, themethod of fire, and the commund :fire.

1020. It Is generally possible to communicate certnfn Hemsof the <lata hefore the moment for opening tire. For example, inindirect laying tlH.~ uiming point may be designuted and thenpproximl1te deflection and the deflection difference announcedus soon us the guns are estublislH'u.

1021. I~xcept when tIle cuptuin Is near enough to the bntteryto muke his voice heuro by u11 the gun squads, the executiverepeats all tbe tiring datu. Without awaiting any signal orcommand from the ('uptain, the executive gives the commandfire at such time uftl'r the range is announced as will Insure theorderly dl'livery Iff the tire. If the ('uptain desires to give nrunge without opening firE', he cautions Do not load hefore an-nouncing the rUlIge. To load and fire. he agnin announces therange. To suspelll} the fire at uny time the captain commandsor signals: Cease firing .. The tiring Is stoppel} and all of thepIeces are unloaded hut ure k('pt laid with the last data re-ceived. 'l'he signal for cease tiring Is n prolonged IJlast on the

whistle with the rIght arm raised vertically until the sIgnal Isobe~'ed. ,1022. Each gunner gives tIle commantl fire so that .his piece

will be fired nt the proper time nlter tIle command 1lre by the(lxecutIve. No o1ller Hem of the firing data Is repeated unlessit Is called for. WIlPn fi mem1>er of a gun squad does not under-stand any Hem of the firfn~ du ta 11(' nsks his chIef of; sectionfor H. thus, Sitet Correctort etc. (950) .. 1023. The complete firIng data (1015-1018). are always .nec-

essary 1>(.'fo1'ciring the first salvo or Yollf'y after occupying. nposition. Aft(;\r the tirst salvo or volley the captain announcesonly so much of the datn us he desires to change, except thatthe range is nlways given ns fi definite signal to load and forthe executive to give the comnHlud fire at tbe proper time.In firing shell or percussion shrapnel each piece is loaded as

Soon as it Is fired; but the range is nevertheless given as a




efinite signal for the' executive to give the command, :fire' at

e proper time.1024. In the exceptional cases In which the captain cnusesach piece to fire at. his command, the executive, repeats the

No. (So and. so) Fire, unless the captain Is near

nough to the guns to make his voice heard by all the gunquads. Each gunner cautions fire at the proper time.

'CO}IDI~ED DUTIES OF THE MEMBERS OF THE GUN SQUADS.

1025. The duties of individuals in the gun squad are not Ill:- .ependent but are closely related. '.reamwork is essential toapidity nnd accuracy of fire and, therefore, to its effectiveness.ach man must exactly perform his functions without inte.'.

ering with other men. Each must cooperate with and assist thethers in every practicable way.' 1026. To attain a high quality of teamwork the most neces-ary requisite is a profound knowledge by each man of his ownunctions and facility in executing them at high speed, rein-orced by fl thorough understanding of the duties of each of the

ther memhers of the gun squad .. 1027. In the first combined drllls It Is advisable to explainxactly what cuch man does after the announcement of eachtem of the firing data. After this explanation the men 8hou1l1e required to perform their duties precisely but slowly.' Ashe instrnctlon progresses, they ure urged, toward greaterapidity without sacrltice of precision. When the squads arevmrkillg smoothly as units, the explanations are omitted.Finally the firing dl1tn are announced with as great rapidity asis consistent with distinct enunciation. .. 1028. In indirect laying it Is not necessary for the gunner toset tht1 range exuctly. During direct laying the exact settingof the sight for range Is e8sential. Hapidity on the part of. theJ.!uuner in traversing the piece to the center of its traverse whenthe trail is to be shifted in indirect laying facilltates the workof the chief of section. Similarly, for direct luying nt movingtargets the work of ~o. 2 is greatly facilltated if the gunner,when the trail must be shifted, rapidly traverses the gun as faras it wm go in the direction opposeu to thut in which the target




is moving. The gunner must not interfere with the ele\"'ntlngmechanism in indirect loying.

manual for non commissioned officers and privates of field artillery

Documents